TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS...ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association . MPTA Mechanical Power Transmission Association . MTI Marine Testing Institute . NAAMM

TABLE OF CONTENTS TS-i

Trask Hatchery

New Hatchery Building

Project 16-043

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Division .... Section Title .................................................................................................... ...…Page Number

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 09 10 Reference Standards ....................................................................................................... TS-3

01 10 00 Summary of Work .......................................................................................................... TS-7

01 22 00 Measurement and Payment ............................................................................................ TS-11

01 33 00 Submittal Procedures ...................................................................................................... TS-21

01 37 00 Schedule of Values ......................................................................................................... TS-25

01 40 00 Quality Control ............................................................................................................... TS-27

01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls ................................................................................. TS-29

01 70 00 Project Closeout ............................................................................................................. TS-35

01 73 00 Operating and Maintenance Data ................................................................................... TS-37

01 78 39 Project Record Documents ............................................................................................. TS-41

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

03 11 13 Cast-In-Place Concrete Forming .................................................................................... TS-47

03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing ..................................................................................................... TS-51

03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete ................................................................................................... TS-57

DIVISION 05 – METALS

05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing ................................................................................................. TS-81

05 31 13 Steel Floor Decking ........................................................................................................ TS-87

05 50 00 Metal Fabrications .......................................................................................................... TS-91

05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings ................................................................................................... TS-99

05 53 00 Metal Gratings ................................................................................................................ TS-103

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 Rough Carpentry & Wood Construction ........................................................................ TS-107

06 17 53 Prefabricated Metal Plate Wood Trusses ....................................................................... TS-111

06 20 00 Finish Carpentry ............................................................................................................. TS-113

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 21 00 Thermal Insulation ......................................................................................................... TS-119

07 26 00 Weather Barriers............................................................................................................. TS-123

07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels .......................................................................................................... TS-125

07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ...................................................................................... TS-129

07 84 00 Firestopping .................................................................................................................... TS-133

07 92 00 Joint Sealants .................................................................................................................. TS-143

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

08 11 00 Metal Doors and Frames ................................................................................................ TS-149

08 14 29 Wood Doors ................................................................................................................... TS-151

08 31 00 Floor Access Doors ........................................................................................................ TS-155

REVISED: 04-16-2019

Section 04 05 13; 04 43 31; 11 52 13; 26 32 13;

26 36 23 & 27 41 16 Deleted

TABLE OF CONTENTS, CONTINUED

Division .... Section Title .................................................................................................... …Page Number

TABLE OF CONTENTS TS-ii Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building Project 16-043

08 54 13 Fiberglass Windows ....................................................................................................... TS-165 08 70 00 Hardware ........................................................................................................................ TS-171 08 80 00 Glazing ........................................................................................................................... TS-177

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

09 21 00 Gypsum Wallboard ......................................................................................................... TS-185 09 30 00 Tile ................................................................................................................................. TS-189 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring ........................................................................................................... TS-195 09 80 00 Protective Coatings......................................................................................................... TS-201 09 90 00 Painting ........................................................................................................................... TS-213 09 96 70 Intumescent [Paints] Fireproofing .................................................................................. TS-215

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

10 28 13 Toilet Accessories .......................................................................................................... TS-221 10 44 00 Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets & Accessories .................................................................. TS-223

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

11 45 00 Miscellaneous Equipment .............................................................................................. TS-227

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

12 21 00 Horizontal Louver Blinds ............................................................................................... TS-231 12 36 23 Countertop Coverings ..................................................................................................... TS-235 12 36 40 Stone Countertops .......................................................................................................... TS-237

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 05 41 Seismic Restraint Requirements for Non-structural Components .................................. TS-243

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

22 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment ........................... TS-253 22 11 13 Facility Water Distribution Piping ................................................................................. TS-263 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping .................................................................................................. TS-279 22 13 53 Facility Septic Tanks ...................................................................................................... TS-293 22 45 00 Emergency Plumbing Fixtures ....................................................................................... TS-299

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

23 00 00 HVAC Systems .............................................................................................................. TS-305

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

26 05 00 Electrical General Requirements .................................................................................... TS-311 26 05 10 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods ......................................................................... TS-317 26 05 33 Raceways ........................................................................................................................ TS-323 26 27 13 Sevice and Distribution .................................................................................................. TS-327

REVISED: 04-16-2019 Section 04 05 13; 04 43 31; 11 52 13; 26 32 13; 26 36 23 & 27 41 16 Deleted



TABLE OF CONTENTS TS-iii Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building Project 16-043

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

31 20 00 Earthwork and Trenching ............................................................................................... TS-333 31 23 10 Site Demolition and Preparation .................................................................................... TS-341 31 23 19 Dewatering ..................................................................................................................... TS-347 31 51 00 Erosion Control .............................................................................................................. TS-351

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 12 18 Surface Restoration ........................................................................................................ TS-359

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

33 05 16 Precast Concrete Vaults .................................................................................................. TS-365 33 41 00 Storm Utility Drainage Piping ........................................................................................ TS-367

DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION

40 23 00 Piping, General ............................................................................................................... TS-375 40 23 16 High Density Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings ................................................................. TS-385 40 92 10 Electrical Motor Actuators for Valves ........................................................................... TS-391

DIVISION 42 – PROCESS WATER SYSTEMS

42 05 23 Valves ............................................................................................................................. TS-399

REVISED: 04-16-2019 Section 04 05 13; 04 43 31; 11 52 13; 26 32 13; 26 36 23 & 27 41 16 Deleted



TABLE OF CONTENTS TS-iv Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building Project 16-043

PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Project 16-043 TS-1



Project 16-043 TS-2

REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 09 10 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 01 09 10 – REFERENCE STANDARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Titles of sections and paragraphs: Captions accompanying specification sections and paragraphs are for convenience of reference only, and are not to be used to define the limits of subcontracts.

B. Applicable publications: Whenever in these Specifications references are made to published specifications, codes, standards, or other requirements, it shall be understood that wherever no date is specified, only the latest specifications, standards, or requirements of the respective issuing agencies which have been published as of the date that the Work is advertised for bids, shall apply; except to the extent that said standards or requirements may be in conflict with applicable laws, ordinances, or governing codes. No requirements set forth herein or shown on the Drawings shall be waived because of any provision of, or omission from, said standards or requirements.

C. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of the Specifications, all work specified herein shall conform to or exceed the requirements of applicable codes and the applicable requirements of the following documents to the extent that the provisions of such documents are not in conflict with the requirements of these Specifications nor the applicable codes.

D. In case of conflict between codes, reference standards, drawings and the other Contract Documents, the most stringent requirements shall govern. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Owner’s Authorized Representative for written clarification and directions prior to ordering or providing any materials or labor.

E. Applicable standard specifications: The Contractor shall construct the Work specified herein in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and the referenced portions of those referenced codes, standards, and specifications listed herein; (except, that wherever references to "Standard Specifications" are made, the provisions therein for measurement and payment shall not apply).

F. References herein to "OSHA Regulations for Construction" shall mean Title 29, Part 1926, Construction Safety and Health Regulations, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA), including all changes and amendments thereto.

G. References herein to "OSHA Standards" shall mean Title 29, Part 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA), including all changes and amendments thereto.

1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. The following documents or agencies may be referenced in the Contract Documents.

AA Aluminum Association AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association AAR Association of American Railroads AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists

Project 16-043 TS-3


ACI American Concrete Institute ADC Air Diffusion Council AEIC Associated Edison Illumination Companies AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association, Inc. AGA American Gas Association AGC Associated General Contractors of America AGMA American Gear Manufacturer's Association AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturer's AI The Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association ANS American Nuclear Society ANSI American National Standards Institute, Inc. APA American Plywood Association API American Petroleum Institute APWA American Public Works Association AREA American Railway Engineering Association ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASA Acoustical Society of America ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers ASLE American Society of Lubricating Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASPA American Sod Producers Association ASQC American Society of Quality Control ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWPA American Wood Preservers Association AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BBC Basic Building Code, Building Officials and Code Administrators International BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturer's Association CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers CDA Copper Development Association CEMA Conveyors Equipment Manufacturer's Association CGA Compressed Gas Association CLPCA California Lathing and Plastering Contractors Association CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturer's Institute CMA Concrete Masonry Association COE Corp of Engineers CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CSI Construction Specifications Institute DCDMA Diamond Core Drill Manufacturer's Association DOE Department of Ecology DOT Department of Transportation EEI Edison Electric Institute EIA Electronic Industries Association EJCDC Engineer's Joint Contract Documents Committee

Project 16-043 TS-4


EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association EPA Environmental Protection Agency ETL Electrical Test Laboratories FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association FM Factory Mutual FS Federal Specification GA Gypsum Association IBC International Building Code ICBO International Conference of Building Officials ICC Interstate Commerce Commission IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IES Illuminating Engineering Society IME Institute of Makers of Explosives IMIA International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council IP Institute of Petroleum (London) IPC Institute of Printed Circuits IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association ISA Instrument Society of America ISO International Organization for Standardization ITE Institute of Traffic Engineers MBMA Metal Building Manufacturer's Association MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturer's Association MIL Military Specification ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association MPTA Mechanical Power Transmission Association MTI Marine Testing Institute NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer's NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers NBS National Bureau of Standards NCCLS National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association NESC National Electric Safety Code NFPA National Fire Protection Association NGLI National Lubricating Grease Institute NMA National Microfilm Association NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association OAC Oregon Administrative Code ODOT Oregon Department of Transportation OSSC Oregon Structural Specialty Code OSEPA Oregon State Environmental Protection Agency OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute PS Product Standard RCO Revised Code of Oregon RIS Redwood Inspection Service RVIA Recreational Vehicle Industry Association RWMA Resistance Welder Manufacturer's Association SAE Society of Automotive Engineers SAMA Scientific Apparatus Makers Association SDI Steel Deck Institute

Project 16-043 TS-5


SDI Steel Door Institute SIS Swedish Standards Association SJI Steel Joist Institute SMA Screen Manufacturers Association SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association SPR Simplified Practice Recommendation SSBC Southern Standard Building Code, Southern Building Code Congress SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction TAPPI Technical Association of the Pulp and Paper Industry TFI The Fertilizer Institute UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WCRSI Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute WIC Woodwork Institute of California WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute, Inc. WSDOT Washington State Department of Transportation WWPA Western Wood Products Association

B. Standard Specifications

1. Where indicated in these Contract Documents, Work shall be in accordance with the referenced sections of the Oregon Standard Specifications for Construction, Current Edition, hereinafter referred to as "Standard Specifications."

2. The Specifications of these Contract Documents shall supersede any provisions of the Standard Specifications in conflict herewith.

3. Reference to measurements and payment in the Standard Specifications do not apply to this Contract.

4. References to department, secretary, State or other similar terms in the Standard Specifications shall mean Owner’s Authorized Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION 01 09 10

Project 16-043 TS-6

SUMMARY OF WORK 01 10 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 01 10 00 – SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes a general description of the Work required for this Contract.

1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. This project shall be constructed in accordance with:

1. Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building – Project Manual 2. Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building – Construction Drawings. 3. Oregon Standard Specifications for Construction, Current Edition.

B. Standard Plans or Specifications, when referenced in this Project Manual, shall mean Oregon Standard Specifications for Construction, Current Edition; Volume 2; Technical Specifications. A copy of this document shall be on site during construction.

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. In general, the work to be performed under this contract consists of the following:

1. Base Bid: Construct new hatchery building including, clearing and grubbing, building pad construction, foundation and wall system, 2nd floor framing, electrical, plumbing, HVAC; connect to existing 24” HDPE supply line, install new discharge piping and storm piping including new manholes, concrete vaults and catch basins. Install owner-supplied drum filters and ultra-violet water treatment systems, and water refrigeration equipment as indicated on plans. Site restoration including pavement.

B. The Work to be performed under this Contract shall consist of furnishing tools, equipment, materials, supplies, and manufactured articles and for furnishing transportation and services, including fuel, power, water, and essential communications, and for the performance of all labor, work, or other operations required for the fulfillment of the Contract in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. Refer to work by Owner in paragraph 1.4 below.

1.4 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner will furnish the following items as noted on the Drawings:

1. Owner will provide reference points for building layout and elevation. Contractor is responsible for staking building corners and improvements.

2. Owner will remove overhead telephone and cable lines between the residence and shop if deemed necessary.

3. Drum Filters (2) water treatment systems. a. CM-Aqua Technologies, Model #HEX F3-3T

4. Ultra-violet (2) water treatment systems. a. Pro-Tect HMI UV System, Model #Amalgam (L) Series 60 MJ/CM2

5. Water refrigeration system a. Rain Country Refrigeration, Inc., Model # To Be Determined

6. Owner to purchase and have delivered specified building wood and trim materials.

1.5 LABOR AND SAFETY STANDARDS A. All Work shall be done in accordance with these specifications and requirements of the State of

Oregon and OSHA standards.

1.6 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. The Contractor shall furnish all temporary facilities such as portable toilets, job office, security

fencing and temporary power as needed to perform the Work. Refer to Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls.

REVISED: 04-16-2019 Bid Alternates deleted, owner-supplied 24” HDPE deleted, Owner-supplied wood added.

Project 16-043 TS-7


1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall coordinate the Work with the Hatchery Manager to minimize disturbance

of ongoing hatchery operations.

1.8 WORK AND STORAGE AREA A. The primary work, storage and staging areas are designated on the Drawings and shall be

available to the Contractor for work including all functions incidental to the work and storage areas during the construction period. All operations and storage of materials by the Contractor shall be confined to the immediate work area and other approved areas as directed by the Hatchery Manager.

1.9 ACCESS TO THE WORK AREA A. The Contractor shall repair any damage to access facilities and roadways for which the

Contractor is responsible and shall restore them to conditions at least equaling preconstruction conditions.

B. The Contractor shall take reasonable measures to limit entry of unauthorized persons and vehicles to the work areas and to allow for access for employees, agents, etc. required for the performance of this contract, and to authorized personnel of Federal, State, and local agencies, and to others having a right thereto.

1.10 RESTORATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform all work to lines, grades and cross sections shown on the drawings.

Final grades shall match existing grades unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Where final grades are indicated on the Drawings, grades shall slope uniformly between elevations shown. All final grades shall be free of hollows that would pond water, and sloped to allow for surface drainage. All earthwork shall have finish surface that have neat, reasonably uniform appearance.

1.11 EASEMENTS AND RIGHTS-OF-WAYS A. Confine construction operations to the immediate vicinity of the locations indicated on

Drawings and use due care in placing construction tools, equipment, excavated materials, and pipeline materials and supplies so as to cause the least possible damage to property and interference with traffic.

1.12 PERMITS A. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and paying for all permits, fees, charges, or

assessments necessary to complete the work including but not limited to electrical, plumbing and mechanical.

a. NOTE: Owner has applied and paid for the Plan Review Fee, Structural Building Permit and Septic Authorization.

1.13 DONATED MATERIALS A. Stimpson Lumber is donating rock from their pit off Chance Road, see map attached.

a. Stimpson Lumber has a CAT 966 available at the rock pit for the contractor to use to load. b. Stimpson Lumber will allow the Contractor to dispose of construction debris in an end

haul area next to the rock pit. The following is not approved for disposal: i. Scrap steel

ii. Rebar iii. Pipe iv. Garbage

c. The following rock is available at the rock pit: i. 1” minus

ii. 2” minus iii. 3” minus

Project 16-043 TS-8


ROCK PIT LOCATION MAP

Project 16-043 TS-9





Project 16-043 TS-10

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 22 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 01 22 00 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT AND DESCRIPTION OF BID ITEMS A. Partial payment of bid items shall be in conformance with the General Conditions. Partial payment

for work completed, and materials installed, which will become an integral part of the finished work, shall be determined by the Owner’s Authorized Representative and shall be made on the basis of duly certified and approved estimates of the work, which, in the opinion of the Owner’s Authorized Representative, has been satisfactorily completed. It is understood that the determination by the Owner’s Authorized Representative as to whether or not a certificate or estimate for payment should be issued, or the amount of said payment, shall be based entirely upon the opinion of the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Said determination shall include without limitation the following factors:

1. All phases of the work being accomplished in a proper manner and being pursued in a proper sequence of operation, particularly with regard to testing, clean-up and surface restoration.

2. Partial payments for work performed, may be made in accordance with the State of Oregon General Terms and Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts (General Conditions). Retainage will be deducted from each invoice as specified in the Contract.

B. The contract price shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, equipment and materials, mobilization, demobilization, travel, and performing all operations required to complete the work, as specified, and as shown on the Drawings and Specifications.

1.2 BASE BID

A. ITEMS

GENERAL

1. Bid Item – Mobilization, Demobilization, Bonding & Permits – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price for mobilization & demobilization includes, but not limited to, preparatory work and operations necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to and from the project site; for the establishment of offices, buildings and other temporary facilities necessary for the work; costs for permit fees, bonds and insurance for the work; site clean-up during the project and at the completion of the project; project record documents, and for other operations performed or costs incurred before the beginning of the work.

2. Bid Item – Demolition – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price for demolition, salvage and preparation shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for removal of existing structures, utilities, trees, or other improvements and preparation as needed to construct the improvements. The price shall include all removal, hauling and disposal in accordance with applicable laws.

3. Bid Item – Erosion and Sediment Control – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price for erosion and sediment control shall constitute full payment for all labor, materials and equipment necessary to install and maintain the erosion control measures. Price includes preparation of erosion control plans as specified and procurement of all required permits, removal of all temporary erosion control measures once the project is finished or as directed by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

SITE

4. Bid Item – Excavation, Dewatering and Grading – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price for this item shall constitute full payment for all labor, materials and equipment necessary to excavate, dewater, stockpile, replace native materials, and site grading to complete the

REVISED: 04-16-2019



facility. Price includes hauling and disposal of all excess materials once the project is finished or as directed by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

5. Bid Item – Crushed Rock Embankment and Grading – Cubic Yard

The cubic yard unit bid price for Embankment and grading of crushed rock shall constitute full payment for all labor, materials and equipment necessary to place, compact, stockpile and grade materials to complete the facility. Price includes hauling rock from local rock stockpile source donated by others.

6. Bid Item – Crushed Rock Surfacing – Cubic Yard

The cubic yard unit bid price for crushed rock surfacing shall constitute full payment for all labor, materials and equipment necessary to place and compact crushed aggregates for pavements, or finished grades. Price includes hauling rock from local rock stockpile source donated by others.

7. Bid Item – Surface Restoration – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price for surface restoration shall constitute full payment for all labor, materials and equipment necessary to restore disturbed surfaces as indicated or, where not indicated, to original conditions.

BUILDING CONCRETE

8. Bid Item – Building Foundation and Walls – Cubic Yard

The cubic yard bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for construction of concrete foundation and walls, as needed to complete the improvements. The price includes, but not limited to, formwork, reinforcing, embedments, joints, concrete in place, testing and finishing.

9. Bid Item – Building Slab and Trench – Cubic Yard

The cubic yard bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for construction of concrete slabs and trenches as needed to complete the improvements. The price includes, but not limited to, formwork, reinforcing, embedments, joints, concrete in place, testing and finishing.

10. Bid Item – Retaining Walls and Vault – Cubic Yard

The cubic yard bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for construction of concrete retaining walls and poured in place pipe valve vault as needed to complete the improvements. The price includes, but not limited to, formwork, reinforcing, embedments, joints, concrete in place, testing and finishing.

11. Bid Item – Exterior Pads and Footings – Cubic Yard

The cubic yard bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for construction of exterior concrete pads and footings located outside the building foot print as needed to complete the improvements. The price includes, but not limited to, formwork, reinforcing, joints, concrete in place, testing and finishing.

12. Bid Item – Precast Stair Treads – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of precast stair treads as needed to complete the improvements. The price includes, but not limited to, treads, all anchors, fasteners and special inspection for anchors.



13. Bid Item – 2nd Floor Concrete and Curbs – Cubic Yard

The cubic yard bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for construction of 2nd floor concrete floor slab and curbs as needed to complete the improvements. The price shall include formwork, reinforcing, embedments, joints, concrete in place, testing and finishing.

BUILDING METALS

14. Bid Item – Steel Framing and Columns – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for installation of steel floor framing and columns, as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, steel, embedments, fabrication, fireproofing, final painting, all anchors, fasteners and special inspection for anchors.

15. Bid Item – Steel Floor Deck and Accessories – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for installation of steel floor decking and accessories as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, decking & accessories, shoring & design, all anchors, fasteners, fireproofing, and special inspection for anchors.

16. Bid Item –Stairs and Landings – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for fabrication and installation of stairs and landings as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, steel, fabrication, all anchors, fasteners, finishes, and special inspection for anchors.

17. Bid Item – Guardrails and Handrails – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for fabrication and installation of all guardrails and handrails as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes steel, fabrication, all supports, anchors, fasteners, finishes and special inspection for anchors.

BUILDING WOOD, TRIM & FINISHES

18. Bid Item – Premanufactured Roof Trusses – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for installation of premanufactured roof trusses, as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, wood trusses, bracing, hardware, anchors, and fasteners.

19. Bid Item – Heavy Timber Trusses – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for fabrication and installation of heavy timber trusses, as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, steel side plates & brackets, hardware, fabrication, anchors, finishes and fasteners. See Bid Alternate 1 for wood material.

20. Bid Item – Gypsum Board – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for installation of gypsum board, as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, all standard and moisture-resistant gypsum board, anchors, fasteners, tape and texture.

21. Bid Item – Thermal and Moisture Protection – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for installation of all thermal and moisture protection as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, membrane, joint sealants, flashing, weather barriers, firestopping, anchors, and fasteners.



22. Bid Item – Rough Carpentry – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for rough carpentry, as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, fabrication, anchors, fasteners, hardware. See Bid Alternate 1 for wood material.

23. Bid Item – Finish Carpentry – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for finished carpentry, as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, fabrication, anchors, fasteners, hardware. See Bid Alternate 1 for wood material.

24. Bid Item – Man Doors – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for installation of all man doors, as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, wood and metal doors and frames, door hardware, fasteners, and weather stripping.

25. Bid Item – Overhead Coiling Doors – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for installation of all overhead coiling doors, as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, doors, tracks, framing, hardware, flashing, anchors, fasteners, finishes and operating devices.

26. Bid Item – Windows – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for installation of all windows, as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, windows, frames, glazing and window hardware, anchors, fasteners and finishes.

27. Bid Item – Cabinetry – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for fabrication and installation of cabinetry, as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, kitchen sink base, Apartment bathroom cabinetry, hardware, fasteners, finishes, countertops, shelving.

28. Bid Item – Miscellaneous Hardware – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for installation of all miscellaneous hardware, as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, miscellaneous hardware, anchors and fasteners.

29. Bid Item – Finishes – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the application of all surface finishes, as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, painting, staining, sealing, and all other protective coatings.

30. Bid Item – Metal Roof, Gutters & Drain System– Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for installation of metal roofing, gutters, downspouts and drain system as needed for a complete roofing system. Item includes, but not limited to, roofing, vented ridge, metal flashing, metal trim, weather barriers, gutters, downspouts, piping, anchors, and fasteners.

ELECTRICAL – HVAC - PLUMBING

31. Bid Item – Electrical System – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for a complete and functional electrical and lighting system. Item includes, but not limited to, trenching and backfill, conduit, conductors, raceways, wiring, vaults, junction boxes, panels, exit signage, emergency exit



lighting, and equipment necessary for a complete and functional electrical system. Includes buried conduit for emergency system from mechanical room to generator pad.

32. Bid Item – Alarm System – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price for alarm shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for installation of alarm conduit, junction boxes and alarm conductors. Item includes, but not limited to, conduit, junction boxes, electrical panels, connections, conductors, pull string, excavation, bedding, backfill and wall mounting hardware.

33. Bid Item – Ventilation System: 1st Floor – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for a complete and functional ventilation system for the First Floor Rearing Room, O2 Room, Chemical Room, and Bathroom. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, piping, ducting, anchors, fasteners, controls, wiring, and mounting hardware.

34. Bid Item – Heating: 1st Floor – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for a complete and functional heating system for the O2 Room, Chemical Room, Mud Room, and Bathroom. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, piping, ducting, anchors, fasteners and mounting hardware.

35. Bid Item – Heating/Cooling System 2nd Floor – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for a complete and functional heating and cooling system for the 2nd floor. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, piping, ducting, louvers, dampers, anchors, fasteners, controls and mounting hardware. 2nd Floor heating and cooling shall have isolated zones that are individually controlled through separate digital controllers.

36. Bid Item – Dedicated Outdoor Air System 2nd Floor – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for a complete and functional Dedicated Outdoor Air System for the 2nd floor. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, piping, ducting, louvers, anchors, fasteners, controls and mounting hardware. 2nd Floor ventilation shall have a digital control located in the Common Room.

37. Bid Item – HVAC and Lighting Controls – Lump Sum The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for a complete and functional HVAC and lighting controls for the 1st and 2nd floor. Item includes, but not limited to, pro-grammable thermostat controls for HVAC zones, lighting intensity dimming controls for all lighting that is dimmable, standard toggle switches for non-dimmable lights, conduit, wiring, mounting hard-ware, and the cabinet housing. 1st Floor cabinet shall be an epoxy painted washdown rated steel cabinet mounted inset into the wall as much as possible. 1st Floor Cabinet shall contain all dimmer switches for the lights located in the Rearing Room. Dimmer switches shall be assigned to lighting zone as shown. 2nd Floor Cabinet shall contain all dimmer switches for lighting zones located in the Common Space. Each zone shall be assigned a single dimmer switch. HVAC controls shall be programmable thermo-stats with standard temperature, day/time scheduling, and air flow controls. Locate HVAC control thermostats at locations shown.



38. Bid Item – Building Plumbing System – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for a complete and functional plumbing system. Item includes, but not limited to, trenching and backfill, hot and cold water supply piping, water heaters, sanitary drain lines and venting, bathroom and laundry room fixtures, kitchen fixtures and equipment necessary for a complete and functional system. Shut off valves shall be included to individually isolate water to the 1st and 2nd floors. Isolation valves shall be located on the 1st floor and placed in an epoxy painted wash down rating cabinet.

39. Bid Item – Septic System – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for a complete and functional septic system. Item includes, but not limited to, septic tank, pump, pump line, vehicle rated access lid, delivery and setting in place, excavation, trenching, bedding, backfill, piping installation, grouting, testing and finishing, sanitary drain lines, force mains, and venting, and equipment necessary for a complete and functional system.

40. Bid Item –Plumbing Fixtures – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of all plumbing fixtures for a complete and functional plumbing system. Item includes, but not limited to, bathroom and laundry room fixtures, kitchen fixtures, blocking and equipment necessary for a complete and functional system.

41. Bid Item –Toilet Accessories – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of all toilet accessories for a complete and functional system. Item includes, but not limited to, bathroom and laundry room accessories, miscellaneous fixtures, fasteners, anchors, blocking, as necessary for a complete and functional system.

PIPING

42. Bid Item – Foundation Drain System – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of foundation drain for a complete and functional system. Item includes, but not limited to, piping, bedding, filter wrap, connections, as necessary for a complete and functional system.

43. Bid Item – Exterior Supply Piping – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall constitute full payment for all labor, materials and equipment necessary to fabricate and install the exterior creek supply piping as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, pipe, pipe fabrication, supports, connections, excavation, bedding and backfill.

44. Bid Item – Interior Process Piping – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall constitute full payment for all labor, materials and equipment necessary to fabricate and install the interior process piping as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, pipe, pipe fabrication, supports, connections, excavation, bedding and backfill.

45. Bid Item – Exterior Drain Piping to NE Manhole – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall constitute full payment for all labor, materials and equipment necessary to fabricate and install the blow off line from creek supply pip to NE manhole as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, pipe, pipe fabrication, supports, connections, excavation, bedding and backfill.



46. Bid Item – 6" ADS N-12 WT Pipe – Lineal Foot

The linear foot bid price shall constitute full payment for all labor, materials and equipment necessary to fabricate and install the 12” ADS water tight N-12 piping as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, pipe, connections, excavation, bedding and backfill.







50. Bid Item – Precast Concrete Catch Basins – LS

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of precast concrete catch basins as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, assembly, delivery and setting in place, excavation, bedding, backfill, piping installation, connections, grating, grouting and finishing.

51. Bid Item – Precast Concrete Manholes – LS

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of precast concrete manholes as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, access lid and grate assembly, delivery and setting in place, excavation, bedding, backfill, piping installation, channeling, grouting, ladder rungs, testing and finishing.

52. Bid Item – Exterior Lighting Patio: Recessed – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of recessed lighting in the ceiling of the two exterior decorate truss areas. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, conduit, and controls. Lighting shall be zoned according to the plans.

53. Bid Item – Exterior Lighting Trusses: Accent – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of access lighting of the exterior exposed timber roof trusses. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, conduit, and controls. Lighting shall be zoned according to the plans.

54. Bid Item – Exterior Lighting Wall Sconce – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of exterior wall sconces. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, conduit, and controls. Lighting shall be zoned according to the plans.

55. Bid Item – Exterior Lighting Roll Up Door Flood Lights – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of area flood lights above the roll up doors. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, conduit, and controls. Lighting shall be zoned according to the plans.



56. Bid Item – Interior Lighting 1st Floor Rearing Room/Vault – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of overhead lights in the 1st floor Rearing Room and the Vault. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, conduit, hardware, mounting brackets to attach to pan deck and beams, and controls. Lighting shall be zoned according to the plans.

57. Bid Item – Interior Lighting 1st Floor Wall Sconces – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of wall sconces on the 1st Floor. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, conduit, hardware, mounting brackets, and controls. Lighting shall be zoned according to the plans.

58. Bid Item – Interior Lighting 1st Floor Mech/O2/Chem/Utility/Restroom – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of overhead lights in the 1st floor Mechanical, O2, Chemical, Utility and Restroom. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, conduit, hardware, mounting brackets to attach to pan deck and beams, and controls. Lighting shall be zoned according to the plans.

59. Bid Item – Interior Lighting 1st & 2nd Floor Exit Sign with Lights – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of exit lights on the 1st and 2nd floor. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, conduit, hardware, mounting brackets to attach to pan deck and beams, and controls.

60. Bid Item –1st, 2nd Floor & Attic Exit Sign – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of exit signs on the 1st and 2nd floor and Attic Space. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, conduit, hardware, mounting brackets to attach to walls, and controls.

61. Bid Item – Interior Lighting 2nd Floor Offices/Bathroom/Storage/Apartments – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of overhead lights in the 2nd Floor Offices, Bathrooms, Storage, and Apartments. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, conduit, hardware, mounting brackets to attach to framing, and controls. Lighting shall be zoned according to the plans.

62. Bid Item – Interior Lighting 2nd Floor Hallways and Common Room Entrance – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of overhead lights in the 2nd Floor Hallways and Common Room Entrance. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, conduit, hardware, mounting brackets to attach to framing, and controls. Lighting shall be zoned according to the plans.

63. Bid Item – Interior Lighting 2nd Floor Common Room & Stairwell Wall Sconce – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of wall sconce lights in the 2nd Floor Common Room and Stairwell. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, conduit, hardware, mounting brackets to attach to structure, and controls. Lighting shall be zoned according to the plans.

64. Bid Item – Interior Lighting 2nd Floor Common Room Recessed – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of recessed overhead lights in the Common Room. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, conduit, hardware, mounting brackets, and controls. Lighting shall be zoned according to the plans.



65. Bid Item – Interior Lighting 2nd Floor Common Room Hanging – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of hanging overhead lights in the Common Room. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, conduit, hardware, mounting brackets, and controls. Lighting shall be zoned according to the plans.

66. Bid Item – Interior Lighting 2nd Floor Filter Equipment Room – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of hanging overhead lights in the Filter Equipment Room. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, conduit, hardware, mounting brackets, and controls.

67. Bid Item – Interior Lighting 2nd Floor Stair Closet – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of a single bulb light fixture operated by pull chain in the Stair Closet. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, conduit, hardware, mounting brackets, and controls.

68. Bid Item – Interior Lighting 2nd Floor Apartment Closet – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of a double bulb LED light fixture with a glass cover in the apartment closets. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, conduit, hardware, mounting brackets, and controls.

69. Bid Item – Interior Lighting Attic Space – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of overhead lights on the Attic Space. Item includes, but not limited to, equipment, conduit, hardware, mounting brackets, and controls. Lighting shall be zoned according to the plans.

VALVES

70. Bid Item – 12” MJ Butterfly Valve – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary to provide, install and test valve. Item includes, but not limited to, valve; 2” operating nut, supports and stainless steel bolts.


The item bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary to provide, install and test valve. Item includes, but not limited to, valve; 2” operating nut, supports and stainless steel bolts.


The item bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary to provide, install and test valve. Item includes, but not limited to, valve; 2” operating nut, traffic rated valve box, supports and stainless steel bolts.

73. Bid Item – 12” Flanged Gate Valve w/ hand wheel operation – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary to provide, install and test valve. Item includes, but not limited to, valve; 2” operating nut, hand wheel, supports and stainless steel bolts.

74. Bid Item – 12” Flanged Gate Valve w/ electrical actuation– Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary to provide, install and test valve. Item includes, but not limited to, valve; electrical actuator with hand wheel for manual operation, supports and stainless steel bolts.



75. Bid Item – 12” Butterfly Valve w/ hand wheel and indicator– Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary to provide, install and test valve. Item includes, but not limited to, wafer style valve; hand wheel operation, supports and stainless steel bolts.

76. Bid Item – 8” Flanged Gate Valve w/ hand wheel – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary to provide, install and test valve. Item includes, but not limited to, valve, supports and stainless steel bolts.

77. Bid Item – 8” Flanged Gate Valve w/ electrical actuation– Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary to provide, install and test valve. Item includes, but not limited to, valve; electrical actuator with hand wheel for manual operation, supports and stainless steel bolts.

78. Bid Item – 2” PVC Ball Valve – Each

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary to provide, install and test valve. Item includes, but not limited to, valve, operator, supports and stainless steel bolts.

79. Bid Item – Install Owner-supplied Equipment – Lump Sum

The item bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary to install and test owner-supplied equipment for full functioning systems. Item includes, installation of (2) drum filters, (2) UV treatment systems, water refrigeration system, piping, wiring, connections, supports and stainless steel anchors.

80. Bid Item – Floor Access Door – Lump Sum

The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for installation of floor access door for vault, as needed to complete the improvements. Item includes, but not limited to, doors, frame, hardware, anchors, fasteners, finishes and operating devices.





SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 01 33 00 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Other provisions pertaining to submittals are included in the General Conditions, the

Supplementary General Conditions and in the various sections of the specifications.

1.2 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. General:

1. All submittals shall be identified by project title and number and shall include Contractor's name, date and revision date. In addition, shop drawings, product data and samples shall include names of subcontractor and supplier, applicable specification section number and Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, verification of field measurements and compliance with Contract Documents.

2. All submittals shall be accompanied by a submittal transmittal form. Equipment numbers shall be listed for items being submitted. A separate form shall be used for each specific item, class of material, equipment, and items specified in separate, discrete sections, for which the submittal is required. Submittals for various items shall be made with a single form when the items taken together constitute a manufacturer's package or are so functionally related that expediency indicates checking or review of the group or package as a whole.

3. A unique number, sequentially assigned, shall be noted on the transmittal form accompanying each item submitted. Original submittal numbers shall have the following format: "XXX"; where "XXX" is the sequential number assigned by the Contractor. Resubmittal shall have the following format: "XXX-Y"; where "XXX" is the originally assigned submittal number and "Y" is a sequential letter assigned for resubmittals; i.e., A, B, or C being the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd resubmittals, respectively. Submittal 25B, for example, is the second re-submittal of Submittal 25.

4. Submittal Completeness: Submittals that do not have all the information required are not acceptable and will be returned without review.

B. Shop drawings: Submit 2 copies of each shop drawing required by the Specifications. Show the information, dimensions, connections and other details necessary to ensure that the shop drawings accurately interpret the contract documents. Show adjoining work in such detail as required indicating proper connections. Where adjoining connected work requires shop drawings or product data, submit such information for review at the same time so that connections can be accurately checked.

C. Product data: Submit 2 copies of each item of product data required by the specifications. Modify product data by deleting information which is not applicable to the project or by marking each copy to identify pertinent products. Supplement standard in-formation, if necessary, to provide additional information applicable to project. It is recognized that in some cases manufacturer’s product data will be adequate and further shop drawings as stated in the specifications may not be required, unless requested by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

D. Samples 1. Submit 2 (unless specific number is specified) of each sample required by the

specifications. Samples shall show the quality, type, range of color, finish and texture of the material intended to be furnished for the work.



2. Samples shall become the property of the Owner unless specifically stated otherwise, and will not be incorporated in the work.

E. Review Procedure: Unless otherwise specified, within 10 to 14 days after receipt of the submittal, the Owner’s Authorized Representative will review the submittal. The returned submittal will indicate one of the following actions: 1. If the review indicates that the material, equipment, or work method is in general

conformance with the design concept and complies with the Drawings and specifications, submittal copies will be marked "NO EXCEPTION TAKEN" and given review action 1. In this event, the Contractor may begin to implement the work method or incorporate the material or equipment covered by the submittal.

2. If the review indicates that limited corrections are required, copies will be marked 'NOTE MARKINGS" and given review action 2. The Contractor may begin implementing the work method or incorporating the material and equipment covered by the submittal in accordance with the noted corrections. Where submittal information will be incorporated in O&M data, a corrected copy shall be provided; otherwise, no further action is required.

3. If the review reveals that the submittal is insufficient or contains incorrect data, copies will be marked "COMMENTS ATTACHED". If the comments are of a nature that can be confirmed without a resubmittal, copies will be further marked "CONFIRM" and given review action 3. If the comments require a revision and resubmittal, copies will be further marked "RESUBMIT" and given review action 4. Except at its own risk, the Contractor shall not undertake work covered by this submittal until the attached comments have been either confirmed by a separate written communication or the submittal has been revised, resubmitted and returned marked with "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "NOTE MARKINGS".

4. If the review indicates that the material, equipment, or work method is not in general conformance with the design concept or in compliance with the Drawings and specifications, copies of the submittal will be marked "REJECTED" and given review action 5. Except at their own risk, the Contractor shall not undertake work covered by such submittals until a new submittal is made and returned marked either "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "NOTE MARKINGS".

F. Effects of Review of Contractor's Submittals: Review of Drawings, method of work, or information regarding materials or equipment the Contractor proposes to provide, shall not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for errors therein and shall not be regarded as an assumption of risks or liability by the Owner’s Authorized Representative on behalf of the Owner, and the Contractor shall have not claim under the Contract on account of the failure, or partial failure, of the method of work, material, or equipment so reviewed. A mark of "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "NOTE MARKINGS" shall mean that the Owner’s Authorized Representative has no objection to the Contractor, upon the Contractor's own responsibility, using the plan or method of work proposed, or providing the materials or equipment proposed.

1.3 SCHEDULE A. The Contractor shall provide the following schedules and submit them not later than 10 days

after notice to proceed. 1. Contractor's construction schedule:

a. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Owner’s Authorized Representative for review an overall construction schedule covering all work to be performed.

b. The schedule shall indicate the sequence of the work, the time of starting and completion of each part and the installation dates for major items.

c. The schedule shall be submitted to the Owner’s Authorized Representative for review. This schedule shall be revised and resubmitted as necessary until it is



acceptable to the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Action on payment requests will be contingent upon receipt of an acceptable construction schedule.

d. The construction schedule shall include, but not be limited to the following items:

1) Shop drawing receipt from Contractor, submitted to Owner’s Authorized Representative, review and return to Contractor.

2) Material and equipment order, delivery and installation and check-out. 3) Demolition 4) Excavation and foundation preparation 5) Constructing concrete structures. 6) Piping installation. 7) Backfilling, grading, seeding and paving. 8) Installation of gates, miscellaneous metals, and equipment. 9) Substantial completion of improvements. 10) Subcontractor work. 11) Final cleanup. 12) Testing activities. 13) Allowance for inclement weather.

e. The construction schedule shall be a series of line diagram showing a step by step sequence of each construction activity. Construction activities proceeding simultaneously should be shown as parallel lines. Each activity shall be labeled and the estimated number of days to complete the activity shall be shown on the schedule.

f. Should the Contractor fail to meet any critical dates within the schedule, the Contractor shall immediately undertake appropriate action which shall assure an acceptable return to the approved construction schedule.

g. The Contractor will be required to accept the risk of any delays caused by the rate of progress of the work to be performed under the Contract, and that in the event the Contractor is delayed in the prosecution and completion of his work because of such conditions; he shall have no claim for damages or contract adjustment.

2. Contractor's list of subcontractors: Establish the items of work proposed to be accomplished by subcontractors, the name and address of each proposed subcontractor and the date proposed to award each subcontract.

3. Schedule of submittals: Establish for each item for which shop drawings, product data or samples are required, the date of submission will be made and the date approval is required for the installation to be completed in accordance with the Construction Schedule.

4. The Contractor's list of subcontractors and schedule of submittals shall be based upon the Contractor's progress schedule so that the work can progress in accordance with the approved progress schedule.

B. The Contractor shall immediately advise the Owner’s Authorized Representative of any proposed changes in his submitted schedules. If, in the opinion of the Owner’s Authorized Representative, any submitted schedule is inadequate to ensure completion of work within the time limit, or is otherwise not in accordance with the specification, or if the work is not being adequately or properly prosecuted in any respect, the Owner’s Authorized Representative shall have the right to require the Contractor to submit new schedules providing for proper and timely completion of the work.



C. During the term of this Contract, the Owner’s Authorized Representative may require any schedule to be modified so that the changes in the work of this Contract or related contracts (if any) are properly reflected in the schedule.

1.4 DETAILED BREAKDOWN OF LUMP SUM PRICES A. Provide Schedule of Values in accordance with Section 01 37 00.





SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 37 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 01 37 00 – SCHEDULE OF VALUES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Contractor to submit to the Owner’s Authorized Representative a Schedule of Values allocated

to the various portions of the work, within 15 days after Award of Contract. B. Upon request of the Owner’s Authorized Representative, support the values with data which

will substantiate their correctness. C. The Schedule of Values, unless objected to by the Owner’s Authorized Representative, shall be

used only as the basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment. D. Payment for work shall not be made until a schedule of values has been accepted by the

Owner’s Authorized Representative.

1.2 FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Type schedule on 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch white paper; Contractor's standard forms and

automated printout will be considered for approval by Owner’s Authorized Representative upon Contractor's request. Identify schedule with: 1. Title of project and location. 2. Owner’s Authorized Representative and project number. 3. Name and address of Contractor. 4. Date of submission.

B. Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing value for progress payments during construction.

C. Follow the table of contents of this project manual as the format for listing component items. D. For each major line item list subvalues of major products or operations under the item. E. For the various portions of the work:

1. Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor's overhead and profit.

2. For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials, break down the values into: a. The cost of the materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid. b. The total installed value.

F. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total contract sum.

1.3 REVIEW AND RESUBMITTAL A. After review by Owner’s Authorized Representative revise and resubmit schedule as required. B. Resubmit revised schedules in same manner.





SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 37 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building



QUALITY CONTROL 01 40 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 01 40 00 – QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Work under this Section includes all testing required by the Contract as specified herein and

further specified in the technical sections.

1.2 BUILDING CODE A. Conform to the requirements of the most recent addition of the Oregon Structural Specialty

Code (OSSC). 1. Special Inspection: OSSC Chapter 17

1.3 TESTING METHODS A. All tests shall be made in accordance with commonly recognized standards of national

organizations unless alternate specific testing methods are set forth in the technical specifica-tions.

1.4 COSTS A. The Contractor shall employ and pay for an independent testing laboratory to perform all testing

services as specified in the technical sections.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Samples: The Contractor shall supply samples if and when required by the Specifications or the

Owner’s Authorized Representative. These samples or test specimens shall be prepared and furnished with information as to their source in such quantities and size as may be required for proper examination and tests, with all freight charges prepaid. All samples shall be submitted before shipment of materials to the site of the work and in ample time to permit the making of proper tests, analysis, examination, rejections and resubmissions before the time required to incorporate the materials into the work. No such materials shall be used in work until they have been reviewed in writing by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Samples of materials will be retained by the Owner’s Authorized Representative for reference and comparison purposes.

B. Certification: Producers and associations which have instituted approved systems of quality control and have been approved by the local building department/jurisdiction may submit certifications of compliance in lieu of further testing. Concrete mixing plants, plants producing fabricated concrete, products certified by lumber and plywood grademarks by approved associations and materials for equipment bearing Underwriter's Laboratory label require no further plan inspection and testing, unless more restrictive requirements are required, or otherwise specifically required in the specifications.

1.6 TESTING LABORATORIES A. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner’s Authorized Representative, for review and

approval, the names of the testing laboratories he proposes to use in the work.

1.7 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A. Access: Furnish access to various parts of the work and assist testing inspection personnel in

performance of their duties. B. Concealed work: When directed by the Owner’s Authorized Representative, the Contractor

shall open for inspection any part of the work which has been concealed. Should the Contractor


QUALITY CONTROL 01 40 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

refuse or neglect such a request, the Owner may employ any other person to open up the same or do so themselves. If any parts of the work have been concealed in violation of the Owner’s Authorized Representative's instructions or, if on being opened, it is found not to be in accordance with the terms of the contract documents, the expense of opening and recovering, whether done by the Contractor or not, shall be charged to the Contractor.

C. Data: Furnish samples, records, drawings, certificates and similar data as may be required by testing and inspection personnel to assure compliance with the contract documents

D. Notices: The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Authorized Representative not less than 48 hours before work requiring inspection is started. The Contractor shall schedule portions of the work requiring inspection and additional testing by the Owner’s Authorized Representative, so that the Owner's time on the project is continuous and as brief as possible. Provide notice to the Owner’s Authorized Representative 48 hours prior to concealment.

1.8 INSPECTORS A. Appointment: The Owner’s Authorized Representative or Owner may appoint inspectors to in-

spect any and all portions of the work. Such inspection may extend to any or all parts of the work, and to the preparation or manufacture of materials to be used.

B. Authority of Inspector: Inspectors are not authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge or relax the provisions of the Contract Documents, and the inspector is placed on the work to keep the Owner’s Authorized Representative informed as to the progress of the Work and the manner in which it is being done. He may also call the attention of the Contractor to any deviations from the plans or specifications. Failure of the inspector or the Owner’s Authorized Representative to call the attention of the Contractor to faulty work or deviation from the Contract Documents shall not constitute acceptance of said work. An inspector is not authorized to approve or accept any portions of the Work or to issue instructions contrary to the contract documents. The inspector will exercise only such additional authority as may be specially delegated to him by the Owner’s Authorized Representative, notice of which will be given in writing to the Contractor.

1.9 TEST REPORTS A. Independent testing and inspection agency and/or agencies will prepare logs, test reports and

certificates applicable to specific tests and inspections. Reports shall include description of method of test, identification of samples and portions of the work tested. They shall state de-scription of location of work, time and date of obtaining and testing samples, weather and climatic conditions, and evaluation of results of tests, including recommendations for action. Reports shall be submitted to the Contractor and Owner’s Authorized Representative as soon as practical.

1.10 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Remove and replace any work found defective or not complying with requirements of contract

documents, at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Work will be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect any defective work or materials shall

not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is not discovered, nor shall it obligate the Owner’s Authorized Representative for final acceptance.





TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and

protection facilities. B. Related Sections:

1. Division 31 Section 31 51 00 “Erosion Control” for temporary erosion and sediment control measures.

1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included

in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. B. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all

entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Contractor will have access to the existing hatchery potable and non-potable

water system during construction operations.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for

construction personnel. B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA

Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary

electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each

temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch 0.148-inch-thick galvanized steel, chain-link

fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete or galvanized steel bases for supporting posts.

B. Wood Enclosure Fence: 8 feet high, framed with four 2-by-4-inch rails, with preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet apart.

C. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10 mils minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84.



2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature

controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate

materials and equipment for construction operations.

2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by

locations and classes of fire exposures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference

with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 01 Section 01 10 00

"Summary of Work." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities

are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner’s Authorized Representative, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Water Service: Contractor will have access to the existing hatchery potable and non-potable water systems during construction operations.

C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets and wash facilities for use by construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

D. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated.

E. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements

without operating entire system. 2. Shield adjacent residences from high glare illumination.

F. Telephone Service: Provide a cellular phone number for superintendent as a contact number during construction. 1. Post additional information for the following in the contractor’s field office:

a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Engineers' offices. e. Owner's office. f. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

G. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office adequate to access project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications.



3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until Owner’s Authorized Representative schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner’s Authorized Representative.

B. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and

paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas

according to Division 31 Section "Earthwork and Trenching." 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material,

regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. 4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until

immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course according to Division 32 Section "Surface Restoration”.

C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

D. Parking: Provide temporary parking or use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or

adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and

equipment" and not temporary facilities.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct

construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section 01 10 00 "Summary of

Work." B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings.



1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones.

2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation from the project site during the course of the project.

4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

C. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.

D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.

E. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined

sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized

personnel. F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas

of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

G. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

H. Noise Control: Maintain temporary noise control barriers to minimize impacts on occupants of adjacent residences. Comply with local jurisdiction regulations for noise.

I. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing residences and occupied facilities as indicated and as required by Owner. Provide two days notice to residents and Owner’s Authorized Representative prior to disruption of access.

J. Temporary Parking: Maintain temporary parking for existing residences and occupied facilities when existing parking areas are disrupted by construction operations. Provide two days notice to residents and Owner’s Authorized Representative prior to disruption of parking.

K. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and

abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and

protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has

ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may



have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. 2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration

into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns.

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section 01 70 00 "Project Closeout."






PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 70 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 01 70 00 – PROJECT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. General: When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a designated portion thereof which is

acceptable to the Owner, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Owner’s Authorized Representative a list of items to be completed or corrected. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all work in accordance with contract documents. When the Owner’s Authorized Representative on the basis of an inspection determines that the work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, he will then prepare a certificate of substantial completion which shall establish the date of substantial completion. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of substantial completion of the work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Cer-tificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner’s Authorized Representative and the Contractor for their written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in such certificates.

1.2 WRITTEN GUARANTEES A. Written guarantees, in duplicate, addressed to the Owner, but submitted to the Owner’s

Authorized Representative.

1. Guarantee by Contractor: Guarantee by Contractor covering the entire work for the 1-year period from date of certificate of substantial completion as specified hereinbefore. Letter to be substantially as follows:

(Re: Project) (Owner) (Address)

Gentlemen:

"I (We) the undersigned do hereby guarantee for a period of one year(s) from date of certificate of substantial completion all work performed under the terms of the contract documents. I (We) will remedy at my (our) expenses any defects appearing during that period due to poor materials or workmanship and will pay for any dam-age to other work resulting from occurrence of said defects or the correction of same. The Contractor agrees to maintain the Performance Bond through the guaran-tee period.

This guarantee shall not be interpreted as holding the Contractor responsible for any deterioration of the work due to normal use or the abuse of the work by the Owner.

Very truly yours,

Contractor


PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 70 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

2. A Performance Bond for the face value of the contract shall be provided to the Owner for the one-year guaranteed period.

1.3 FINAL CLEANUP A. Completion of the work: At the completion of the work, leave the site of work in a neat,

unobstructed condition. B. Removal: Remove all tools, appliances, materials and equipment from the site of work as soon

as possible, upon completion of the work of the contract. C. Directions: When directed, just before the project is turned over to the Owner, remove stains,

excess glazing compounds, protective tape and other foreign material from both surfaces of glass installed under this contract, and wash and polish glass on both sides. Wash and polish mirrors.

D. Final cleanup: The final cleanup of the project shall be done with care and all ductwork, cubicles, cabinets, motor control centers, control panels, rooms and enclosures shall be clean and dust free prior to final acceptance of the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION



OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 73 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 01 73 00 – OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for maintenance and operation of

products furnished under the contract. 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in

other pertinent sections of specifications.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel:

1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of the described products. 2. Completely familiar with requirements of this Section. 3. Skilled as a technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data. 4. Skilled as a draftsman competent to prepare required drawings.

1.3 FORM OF MANUALS A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for use by ODFW personnel. Provide data

for each separate piece of operating equipment or product requiring maintenance. B. Format: Data to be provided in a series of 3 ring binders, each binder designated as a “Volume”.

Volumes to be numbered sequentially and organized in a systematic fashion. Should a volume contain multiple equipment sections, each section to be separated by a labeled index tab. 1. Identify each volume cover and spine with typed or printed title "Operating and

Maintenance Instruction." List title of project and equipment contents as applicable. 2. Each volume to contain a complete table of contents for all volumes.

1.4 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. List with each product, the name, address and telephone number of:

1. Subcontractor or installer. 2. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. 3. Identify the area of responsibility of each. 4. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 5. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.

B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts.

a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts.

2. Operating procedures: a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions.



3. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble-shooting." c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Alignment, adjusting and checking.

4. Servicing and lubrication schedule: a. List of lubricants required.

5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required

for maintenance. a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. 9. Each contractor's coordination drawings.

a. As-installed color-coded piping diagrams. 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve. 11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and

recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications.

C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate. 1. Description of system and component parts.

a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

2. Circuit directories of panelboards. a. Electrical service. b. Controls. c. Communications.

3. As-installed color-coded wiring diagrams. 4. Operating procedures:

a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions.

5. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble-shooting." c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Adjustment and checking.

6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and

recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications.

D. Drawings 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate:

a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow diagrams.



2. Coordinate drawings with information in project record documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation.

3. Do not use project record documents as maintenance drawings. E. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation.

1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide a logical sequence of instruction for each procedure.

F. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. 1. Provide information sheet for ODFW personnel that give:

a. Proper procedures in the event of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds.

1.5 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit 2 copies of preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents 30 days prior

to the scheduled date for receiving payment for 50% of the work. 1. Owner’s Authorized Representative will review draft and return 1 copy with comments.

B. Submit 4 set of Volumes of approved data in final acceptable form prior to the scheduled date for receiving payment for 90% of the work.

C. Should submitted data be incomplete or otherwise not be acceptable to the Owner’s Authorized Representative, the data will be returned to Contractor along with written comments on the required additions or changes.








PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,

including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Miscellaneous record submittals.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section 01 70 00 "Project Closeout" for general closeout procedures. 2. Divisions 02 through 42 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents

of the Work in those Sections.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up record prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit one paper-copy set of marked-up record prints. 2) Submit a PDF electronic file of scanned marked-up record prints. 3) Owner’s Authorized Representative will indicate whether general scope of

changes, additional information recorded, and quality of marked-ups are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit three paper-copy set(s) of final marked-up record prints. 2) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned final marked-up record prints. 3) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were

recorded. B. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-

keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit one paper copy of each submittal.

C. Reports: Submit written report weekly indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop

Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies

from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.



a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic

documentation. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Locations and depths of underground utilities. d. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. e. Revisions to electrical circuitry. f. Actual equipment locations. g. Changes made by Change Order or Work Change Directive. h. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. i. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. j. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings where the Owner’s Authorized Representative determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. 1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting

an alternate, substitution, or other modification. 2. Consult Owner’s Authorized Representative for proper scale and scope of detailing and

notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into

manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.



2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as paper copy and as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and

title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as paper copy and as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals. 1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section

number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project

record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Owner’s Authorized Representatives reference during normal working hours.







DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE





CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FORMING 03 11 13 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 03 11 13 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FORMING

PART 1 - GENERAL


Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete formwork for the following:

1. Footings. 2. Walls. 3. Slabs-on-grade. 4. Slabs. 5. Structural concrete members. 6. Structural concrete walls.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” for administration of required

submittals. 2. Division 01 Section 01 50 00 “Temporary Facilities and Controls” for temporary utility

services, construction and support facilities, security and protection facilities and temporary erosion and sedimentation control.

3. Division 03 Section 03 20 00 “Concrete Reinforcing” for reinforcement in formed concrete.

4. Division 31 Section 31 20 00 "Earthwork and Trenching" for fill under slabs-on-grade.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Words and terms used in this specification section are defined in ACI 116R.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product technical data including:

1. Certifications that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. 2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3. Manufacturer and type of proposed form materials. 4. Manufacturer and type of proposed form ties. 5. Manufacturer and type of proposed form coating material.

B. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Owner’s Authorized

Representative.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards:

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. ACI 116R-00 “Cement and Concrete Terminology.” b. ACI 347-04 “Guide to Formwork for Concrete.” c. ACI 318-08 “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.” d. ACI 350/350R-06 “Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete

Structures.” e. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. f. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.”

2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):



a. AISC 303-10 “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.” 3. Building Codes:

a. International Code Council (ICC): International Building Code and associated standards, latest edition, Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.

b. Oregon Structural Specialty Code (OSSC): Oregon Structural Specialty Code and Amendments referred to herein as Structural Code.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete

formwork to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Concrete subcontractor. c. Formwork subcontractor.

2. Review construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, forms and form removal limitations, and concrete protection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and

smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. Aluminum is not permitted. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with U.S.

Department of Commerce Voluntary Product Standards, PS 1, Structural Plywood (DOC PS 1), and as follows: a. Interior walls of holding pond: Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-

release agent treated and edge sealed. b. Exterior walls subject to public view: Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better;

mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. c. Exterior walls and structures to be backfilled: Structural 1, B-B or better; mill

oiled and edge sealed d. Face treatments exposed to raw water shall be bio-degradable and non-toxic to

fish. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic

concrete loads without detrimental deformation. D. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally

sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads. E. Aluminum Forms: Not permitted. F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. G. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal. H. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. 2. Biodegradable and non-toxic to fish.

I. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of

exposed concrete surface.



2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,

lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. For formed openings in walls, piers and risers to accept installation of pre-manufactured mechanical equipment: 1. Maximum variation from plumb or line in 10 feet: 1/16 inch. 2. Maximum variation from plumb or line in entire length: 1/8 inch.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Use ¾-inch by ¾-inch beveled edge chamfers unless otherwise indicated.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. Determine and conform to dimensional tolerance limits for pre-manufactured equipment installations.

J. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for installation of pre-manufactured void forms. K. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and

other debris just before placing concrete. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. L. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and

maintain proper alignment. M. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, before placing reinforcement. Form-release agents exposed to raw water shall be bio-degradable and non-toxic to fish.

3.2 REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with Division 03 Section 03 20 00 "Concrete Reinforcing" for fabricating and

installing steel reinforcement. Securely fasten steel reinforcement and wire ties against shifting during concrete placement.

B. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.



3.3 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

2. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. 3. Install embedments as indicated and conforming to dimensional tolerance limits for pre-

manufactured equipment installations.

3.4 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does

not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. 1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports

weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.

2. Leave formwork for retaining walls that support weight of backfill in place until concrete has achieved at least 40 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.

3. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Owner’s Authorized Representative.

3.5 SHORES AND RESHORES A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and

reshoring. 1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshores to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will provide an inspector to perform field inspections and

prepare inspection reports. B. Inspections:

1. Formwork products, including environmental requirements. 2. Formwork installation. 3. Conformance with dimensional tolerances. 4. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs.



CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 20 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 03 20 00 – CONCRETE REINFORCING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete reinforcement, steel and fibrous, for the following:

1. Footings. 2. Walls. 3. Slabs-on-grade. 4. Slabs. 5. Structural concrete members. 6. Structural concrete walls.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” for administration of required

submittals. 2. Division 01 Section 01 40 00 “Quality Control” for special inspection. 3. Division 01 Section 01 50 00 “Temporary Facilities and Controls” for temporary utility

services, construction and support facilities, security and protection facilities and temporary erosion and sedimentation control.

4. Division 03 Section 03 11 13 "Cast-in-Place Concrete Forming" for formed structural concrete.

5. Division 03 Section 03 30 00 “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for concrete materials, placing and finishing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product technical data including:

1. Certifications that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. 2. Material certificates for fiber reinforcement. 3. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 4. Mill certificates for steel reinforcing. 5. Manufacturer and type of proprietary rebar mechanical splices. 6. Manufacturer and type of rebar adhesive anchor including installation instructions.

B. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grades, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. Prepare in accordance with ACI Detailing Manual.

C. Qualification Data: For welders and welding procedures. D. Welding certificates.


1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. ACI SP 66 “ACI Detailing Manual - 2004.” b. ACI 318-11 “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.”



c. ACI 350/350R-06 “Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures.”

d. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.” 2. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. ASTM A185 “Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete.”

b. ASTM A497 “Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete.”

c. ASTM A615 “Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.”

d. ASTM A706 “Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.”

e. ASTM A484 “Standard Specification for General Requirements for Stainless Steel Bars, Billets, and Forgings.”

3. American Welding Society (AWS): a. AWS D1.4 “Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.”

4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): a. “Manual of Standard Practice, 28th Edition.”

5. Building Codes: a. International Code Council (ICC): International Building Code and associated

standards, latest edition, Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.


B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete

reinforcement to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Concrete subcontractor. c. Reinforcing subcontractor.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and

damage. B. Support and store all reinforcing steel above ground. C. Ship reinforcing steel to jobsite with attached plastic or metal tags with permanent mark

numbers which match the Shop Drawing mark numbers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel

products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed. C. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A706, deformed. D. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A184, fabricated from ASTM A615, Grade 60 deformed bars,

assembled with clips. E. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A82 as drawn.



F. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A484 smooth stainless steel bars, cut true to length with ends square

and free of burrs. Provide with plastic caps to accommodate longitudinal movement of joint width plus one inch.

B. Protective plastic caps at mechanical splices. C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening

reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use

CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. D. Tie Wire: #16 double annealed iron wire. E. Mechanical Splices:

1. Mechanical splices shall develop 125 percent of the specified yield strength of the bar in compression and tension.

2. Mechanical splices shall be one of the following: a. Metal Sleeve with Cast Filler Metal: Cadweld C-Series splice, manufactured by

Erico Products, Inc., Cleveland, OH. b. Mechanical Threaded Connections Utilizing a Metal Coupling Sleeve with Internal

Threads: Lenton Reinforcing Steel Couplers, manufactured by Erico Products, Inc., Cleveland, OH; Richmond DB-SAE Dowel Bar Splicers, manufactured by Richmond Screw Anchor Co., Inc., Fort Worth, TX.

2.3 FABRICATED STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.4 WELDING ELECTRODES A. E70 meeting requirements of AWS D1.4.

2.5 POST-INSTALLED BAR ANCHORAGE ADHESIVES A. Manufactured for the purpose of embedding bars in hardened concrete and developing 125

percent of the yield strength of specified reinforcing steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

2. Bends are per ACI 318, Section 7.1 - 7.3. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that

would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and

support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4 where indicated.

D. Reinforcement congestion and interference:



1. Notify Owner’s Authorized Representative whenever the specified clearances between bars cannot be met.

2. Do not place any concrete until the Owner’s Authorized Representative submits a solution to bar congestion problem.

3. If bars are required to be moved more than one bar diameter to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded items, obtain Owner’s Authorized Representative's approval of resulting arrangement of bars.

4. No field cutting of bars shall be done without written approval of Owner’s Authorized Representative.

E. On ground, provide metal bar supports with plates. Do not use concrete blocks. F. Over formwork, provide plastic coated metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, hangers and

other pre-fabricated bar supports. G. Provide bar supports which will not puncture or damage void forms during construction nor

impair the strength of the concrete members. H. To assure proper placement, furnish templates for all column vertical bars and dowels. I. Do not bend reinforcement after embedding in hardened concrete unless approved by Owner’s

Authorized Representative. Do not bend reinforcement by means of heat. J. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. K. Fabrication

1. Clean, bend and splice reinforcement in accordance with the International Building Code and ACI 315. Hooks shall conform to Table 1 of ACI 315. Do not straighten or rebend Grade 60 reinforcement. All bars shall be bent cold. Welding shall be performed by welders certified by American Welding Society and in accordance with AWS D1.1.

L. Bending Schedules 1. Placement drawings and bending schedules shall be submitted to the Owner’s Authorized

Representative for review. Reinforcement shall be formed as indicated on the Drawings. Except where specifically indicated otherwise on the Drawings, ends for bars shall be in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318, Section 7.1 -7.3.

M. Placing Reinforcing Steel 1. Reinforcing steel, before being positioned, shall be cleaned of mill scale. rust or other

coatings that will destroy or reduce the bond. Reinforcement appreciably reduced in section shall be rejected. Prior to placing concrete, the reinforcement shall be reinspected by the Owner’s Authorized Representative and, when necessary, cleaned to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Authorized Representative. a. Reinforcing steel shall not be bent or straightened without the approval of the

Owner’s Authorized Representative, nor in a manner that will injure the material. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings shall not be used. Heating or welding of bars will be permitted only when the entire operation is acceptable to the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

b. Reinforcing steel shall be positioned accurately and secured against displacement by using annealed iron wire or suitable clips at intersections and shall be supported by concrete or metal chairs or spacers, or metal hangers.

c. In slabs, beams and walls subject to lateral pressure, splices of reinforcement shall not be made at points of maximum stress without the express acceptance of the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Splices where permitted, shall provide sufficient lap to transfer the stress between bars by bond and shear. Adjacent bars shall not be spliced at the same point. Where not otherwise shown, reinforcement shall be in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318.

d. The clear distance between parallel bars shall not be less than the diameter of the bars and, unless specifically authorized, shall in no case be less than 1-inch nor less than 4/3 the maximum size of coarse aggregate specified. When reinforcement in



beams is placed in two or more layers, the clear distance between layers shall not be less than 1-inch, and the bars in the upper layers shall be placed directly above those in the bottom layer.

e. Concrete protection for reinforcement: Unless stated otherwise on the Drawings, reinforcement shall have a minimum cover of the following: 1) Cast against and permanently exposed to earth: 3 inches 2) Concrete to be in contact with ground, weather or clean water: 2 inches 3) Concrete not to be exposed to ground, weather or water:

a) Slabs and walls: 1-inch b) Beams and columns: 1-1/2 inches c) Joists: 3/4-inch

N. Tolerances 1. Fabricating and placing tolerances shall be in accordance with ACI 301.

O. Post-installed reinforcement: Embed bars into hardened concrete utilizing adhesive anchor system specifically manufactured for such installation. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for installation. Special inspection is required.

P. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on metal bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will provide an inspector to perform field observation for

general conformance to the Contract Drawings. Contractor shall employ qualified independent special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency for concrete field tests and inspections including adhesive anchor installation and prepare test reports. Contractor shall send copies of test reports to Owner’s Authorized Representative.

B. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Post-installed bar reinforcement.






CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 03 30 00 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including concrete materials, mixture design, placement

procedures, finishes, joints, grouts, anchorage, repairs and testing for the following: 1. Footings. 2. Walls. 3. Slabs-on-grade. 4. Slabs. 5. Structural concrete members. 6. Structural concrete walls.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures” for administration of required submittals. 2. Division 01 Section “Temporary Facilities and Controls” for temporary utility services,

construction and support facilities, security and protection facilities and temporary erosion and sedimentation control.

3. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete Forming" for formed structural concrete. 4. Division 03 Section “Concrete Reinforcing” for reinforcement in formed concrete. 5. Division 31 Section "Earthwork and Trenching" for fill under slabs-on-grade and

structure backfill.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the

following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.

B. Words and terms used in this specification section are defined in ACI 116R. C. Special Inspector: An independent professional testing/inspection firm or service hired to

perform testing, inspection or analysis services as directed, and as provided in the Contract Documents.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when

characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction, contraction, isolation and doweled concrete joints. 1. Location of concrete joints is subject to approval of the Owner’s Authorized

Representative. D. Samples: For waterstops. E. Qualification Data: For concrete manufacturer. F. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures.



3. Waterstops. 4. Curing compounds. 5. Grouts. 6. Bonding agents. 7. Adhesives. 8. Vapor retarders. 9. Semirigid joint filler. 10. Joint-filler strips. 11. Repair materials.

G. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: 1. Aggregates.


1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. ACI 116R “Cement and Concrete Terminology.” b. ACI 117 "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.” c. ACI 211.1 “Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight,

and Mass Concrete.” d. ACI 212.3R “Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.” e. ACI 211.1 “Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight,

and Mass Concrete.” f. ACI 301 “Specifications for Structural Concrete.” g. ACI 305R “Hot Weather Concreting.” h. ACI 306R “Cold Weather Concreting.” i. ACI 308 “Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.” j. ACI 309R “Guide for Consolidation of Concrete.” k. ACI 318-11 “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.” l. ACI 350/350R-06 “Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete

Structures.” 2. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. ASTM C31 “Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.”

b. ASTM C33 “Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.” c. ASTM C39 “Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens.” d. ASTM C42 “Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and

Sawed Beams of Concrete.” e. ASTM C94 “Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.” f. ASTM C143 “Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement.” g. ASTM C150 “Standard Specification for Portland Cement.” h. ASTM C157 “Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-

Cement, Mortar, and Concrete.” i. ASTM C172 “Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.” j. ASTM C260 “Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for

Concrete.” k. ASTM C309 “Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds

for Curing Concrete.” l. ASTM E329 “Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction

Inspection and/or Testing.” m. ASTM C494 “Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.”



n. ASTM C618 “Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.”

o. ASTM A706 “Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.”

p. ASTM D1751 “Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).”

3. United States Army Corps of Engineers (COE): a. CRD-C621 “Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout

(NonShrink).” b. CRD-C572 “Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstops.”

4. Building Codes: a. International Code Council (ICC): International Building Code and associated

standards, latest edition, Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.


B. Installer Qualifications: 1. An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design,

and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete

Production Facilities." D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077

and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing

Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing

Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

G. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine

procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor. e. Formwork and shoring subcontractor.



f. Steel reinforcing sub-contractor. g. Special concrete finish subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, fiber reinforcement batch plant mixing, dimensional tolerance limits, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other

contaminants. B. Concrete Materials:

1. Store cement and pozzolan in weathertight buildings, bins, or silos which will exclude moisture and contaminants.

2. Arrange aggregate stockpiles and use in a manner to avoid excessive segregation and to prevent contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates.

3. Allow natural sand to drain until it has reached relatively uniform moisture content before use.

4. Store admixtures in such a manner as to avoid contamination, evaporation, or damage. a. For those used in form of suspensions or non-stable solutions, provide agitating

equipment to assure thorough distribution of ingredients. b. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and temperature changes which would

adversely affect their characteristics and performance. C. Concrete Delivery:

1. Prepare a delivery ticket for each load of ready mixed concrete. 2. Truck operator shall hand ticket to Contractor at the time of delivery. 3. Ticket to show:

a. Mix identification. b. Quantity delivered. c. Amount of material in each batch. d. Outdoor temperature in the shade. e. Time at which cement was added. f. Time of delivery. g. Time of discharge. h. Amount of water that may be added at the site without exceeding the specified

water-cement ratio. i. Amount of water added at the site. j. For fiber reinforced concrete, the delivery ticket shall include the type and amount

of fibers added to the concrete mix. 4. Ready mixed concrete products delivered to the Project site more than one hour after

batching will not be accepted for placement without prior written approval of the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL – HABITAT PROTECTION A. Fish Toxicity: Concrete structures included in this specification are designed and built for fish

habitat. Do not use temporary or permanent construction products that may be toxic to fish. B. Biodegradability: Use only biodegradable products in applications where product may be

exposed to stream water.



2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and

source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II, gray. Supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

2. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type IP, portland-pozzolan or Type I (SM), slag-modified portland cement.

B. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide

aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

D. Water: ASTM C 94 and potable.

2.3 ADMIXTURES A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with

other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,

Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 7. Permeability-Reducing Admixture: Premixed, noncorrosive, nontoxic to aquaculture (as

per COE CRD-C621) chemical admixture that contains Portland cement, fine treated silica sand and other chemicals to reduce the permeability of concrete. The following manufacturers and products are acceptable: a. Xypex: Admix C-500 b. Kryton: Krystol Internal Membrane c. Hycrete: W500 d. Sika: WT-215P

2.4 GROUT A. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404.

Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. Minimum 28-day compressive strength 3000 psi.

B. Drypack Grout: Drypack grout shall be a mixture of approximately one part cement, 1-1/2 to 2 parts sand, water reducing agent, and sufficient water to make a stiff workable mix.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents; complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application. Minimum 28-day compressive strength 6500 psi. Non-toxic to native fish species, in accordance with COE CRD-C621, and subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. BASF Admixtures, Inc. “Masterflow 713 Plus.”



2. Euclid Chemical Company “NS Grout.” 3. Sauereisen Cements "F-100 Level Fill Grout." 4. U. S. Grout “Five Star Grout.” 5. Set Products, Inc. "Set Non-Shrink Grout." 6. The Upco Corp "Upcon.” 7. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. "Crystex.” 8. Sika Corporation “Sika Grout 212.”

D. Epoxy Grout. Non-toxic to native fish species and subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Unitex ProPoxy 2000, or equal.

E. Polymer Concrete (for Resurfacing or Patching): 1. Polymer concrete (for resurfacing or patching) shall consist of a liquid binder and dry

aggregate mixed together to make a mortar or grout of a consistency as required for the application. The liquid binder shall be a chemical and oil resistant, stress relieved, low modulus, moisture insensitive, two-component epoxy-resin compound. The consistency shall be similar to lightweight oil for proper mixing with aggregate. Material shall conform to ASTM C 881 Type III Grade 1, such as Sika Corporation Sikadur Lo-Mod series, Master Builders Concresive Standard LVI, or equal.

2. Aggregate shall be oven dry in sealed packages until time of mixing, and shall be of size and consistency compatible with recommendations of manufacturer of liquid binder for intended application.

2.5 WATERSTOPS A. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of

fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BoMetals, Inc. b. Greenstreak Group, Inc. c. Paul Murphy Plastics Company. d. Vinylex Corp.

2. Construction and control joints: a. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb - 3/8-inch by 6-inch, minimum weight 1.4 lbs/ft.

3. Expansion joints: a. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb – 3/8-inch by 9-inch, minimum weight 2.3 lbs/ft.

B. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; MiraSTOP. b. CETCO; Volclay Waterstop-RX. c. Concrete Sealants Inc.; Conseal CS-231. d. Greenstreak; Swellstop. e. Henry Company, Sealants Division; Hydro-Flex. f. JP Specialties, Inc.; Earth Shield Type 20.

C. Self-Expanding Rubber Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, bentonite-free hydrophilic polymer modified chloroprene rubber, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/8 by 3/4 inch. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:



a. Adeka Ultra Seal/OCM, Inc.; Adeka Ultra Seal. b. Greenstreak; Hydrotite. c. Vinylex Corp.; Swellseal.

2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive

or pressure-sensitive tape. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400. b. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Florprufe 120. d. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck 16. e. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil. f. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15. g. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 15 mil Green. h. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A.

B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 sieve, and at least 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.

2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application

to fresh concrete. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm. c. ChemMasters; SprayFilm. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor-Aid. i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin. j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE. l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. m. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM. n. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm. o. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film. p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid. q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM. r. Unitex; PRO-FILM. s. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.



E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 200. c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; W.B. Resin Cure. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Res X Cure WB. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX;

TAMMSCURE WB 30C. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. i. Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - CLEAR. j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR. l. Nox-Crete Products Group; Resin Cure E. m. Right Pointe; Clear Water Resin. n. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Rez Clear. o. Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear. p. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 DC WB. q. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.

2.8 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips:

1. ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

2. Neoprene, closed cell, expanded, ASTM D 1056, Grade No. 285, with a compression deflection of 25% for a pressure range of 17 to 24 psi.

3. Bituminous type conforming to ASTM D 1751 or sponge rubber type conforming to ASTM D 1752, Type I. For use on sidewalks and pavements. May also be used on foundation slabs below the waterstop and on backfilled walls on the backfill side of the waterstop.

4. Bond breaker tape for use in joints in walls or elevated slabs to receive joint sealants shall be an adhesive-backed glazed butyl or polyethylene tape which will satisfactorily adhere to the closed cell premolded joint material or concrete surface as required. The tape shall be the same width as the joint.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to

hardened concrete. E. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm)

thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.



2.9 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Inserts shall be as required by other trades. Attach securely to forms. Inserts within

reinforcement cover thickness shall be hot-dip galvanized, nonferrous or other approved nonrusting material.

B. Embedded conduit: Rigid embedded conduit shall be of hot-dip galvanized steel. Conduit shall be approved and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and bear the UL label.

C. Miscellaneous embedded item: Exposed items permanently embedded in concrete with concrete reinforcement thickness shall be hot-dip galvanized, nonferrous or plastic as approved, to eliminate the possibility of stained or rusty spots.

2.10 ANCHOR BOLTS AND CONCRETE ANCHORS A. General:

1. This section covers the work necessary to furnish and install, complete, all anchorage to concrete, complete with washers and nuts.

2. Like items of materials provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, maintenance, and replacement.

3. The diameter and projection shall be as required by the equipment or machinery manufacturer. The Contractor shall verify the capacities and configurations conform to the Drawings.

4. The Contractor shall provide design calculations, stamped by a State of Oregon licensed professional engineer, for all anchor bolts and concrete anchors exceeding the capacities, or not conforming to the configurations, specifically shown on the Drawings.

5. Submittals: Comply with requirements of Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. In addition, the following specific information shall be provided: a. ICC Evaluation Service reports verifying the products meet or exceed the

capacities shown on the Drawings. Manufacturers’ information showing the recommended installation equipment and procedures for the following: 1) Drilled in concrete anchors. 2) Adhesive anchors.

b. Design calculations, stamped by a State of Oregon licensed professional engineer, for all anchor bolts and concrete anchors exceeding the capacities, or not conforming to the configurations, specifically shown on the Drawings.

6. Exposure Conditions: Exposure conditions shall be defined as follows: a. Dry: Interior areas not subject to moisture, washdown, or chemicals. b. Wet: Interior areas subject to moisture, washdown, or chemicals, or outdoor areas. c. Submerged: At or below a point 1 foot 6 inches above maximum fluid surface.

7. Unless otherwise indicated, all materials shall conform to the latest issue of the following ASTM Specifications: a. Anchor Bolts and Nuts:

1) Carbon Steel: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 2) Stainless: ASTM F 593, Type 316, Grade CW1 or SH2. 3) Nuts: ASTM A 194 or A 563.

b. Galvanized Steel Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 153, zinc coating for ASTM F 1554 or A 194.

c. Flat Washers (Unhardened): ASTM F 844, use ASTM A 153 for zinc coating. d. Threaded Bars: ASTM A 36. e. Drilled-In Concrete Anchors:

1) Carbon Steel Anchors: ASTM A 108. 2) Stainless Steel: ASTM F 593, Type 316, Grade CW1 or SH2.

f. Adhesive Threaded Rod Anchors: 1) Do not use where fire or elevated temperatures exceeding 150 degrees F can

occur, unless specifically shown otherwise.



2) Anchor Rod: ASTM F 593, Type 316 stainless steel threaded rod free of grease, oil, or other deleterious material with a 45-degree chisel point.

3) Adhesive: a) Meet ASTM C 881, Type 1, Grade 3, Class A, B, or C. b) Two-component, 100 percent solids, nonsag, paste, insensitive to

moisture, designed to be used in adverse freeze/thaw environments, and gray in color. Cure Temperature, Pot Life, and Workability: Compatible for intended use and environmental conditions.

4) Mixed Adhesive: Nonsag paste consistency holding the following properties: a) Slant Shear Strength, ASTM C 881 and ASTM C 882, No Failure in

Bond Line, Dry/Moist Conditions: 5,000 psi. b) Compressive Strength, ASTM D 695: 12,000 psi minimum. c) Compressive Modulus ASTM D 695: 0.22 x 106 psi. d) Tensile Strength, ASTM D 695: 6,300 psi. e) Heat Deflection Temperature, ASTM D 648: 145 degrees F,

minimum. f) Linear Coefficient of Shrinkage on Cure ASTM D 2566: 0.004.

5) Adhesive Packaging: a) Disposable, self-contained cartridge system capable of dispensing

both epoxy components in the proper mixing ratio and fit into a manually or pneumatically operated caulking gun.

b) Dispense components through a mixing nozzle that thoroughly mixes components and places epoxy at base of predrilled hole.

c) Mixing Nozzles: Disposable, manufactured in several sizes to accommodate sizes of anchor rods.

d) Cartridge Markings: Include manufacturer’s name, batch number, mix ratio by volume, product expiration date, ANSI hazard classification, and appropriate ANSI handling precautions.

6) Storage of Adhesive: a) Store epoxy cartridges on pallets or shelving in a covered storage

area. b) Control temperature above 60 degrees F and dispose of cartridges if

shelf life has expired. If stored at temperatures below 60 degrees F, test adhesive prior to use to determine if adhesive meets specified requirements.

g. Grouted Concrete Anchors: 1) Stainless-Steel Anchors: ASTM F 593, Type 316. 2) Grout: Nonshrink grout per Paragraph 2.14C.

h. Nuts: 1) Carbon Steel: ASTM A 194 or A 563. 2) Stainless Steel: ASTM F 593, Type 316.

i. Galvanizing: 1) Carbon Steel: ASTM A 153, Zinc Coating for ASTM F 1554.

8. The concrete anchorage system indicated on the Drawings, or required to secure the various parts together and provide a complete installation, shall be included under this section. The tabulation of items herein is not intended to be all-inclusive, and it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to provide all metalwork and castings shown, specified, or which can reasonably be inferred as necessary to complete the project.

B. Anchor Bolts 1. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, use 3/4-inch minimum diameter by 12-inch

long and other geometry shown on the Drawings. Furnish a minimum of two nuts and a



washer of the same material for each bolt. Provide sleeves as shown on the Drawings for location adjustment.

2. Provide anchor bolt material for the exposure conditions as noted below: a. Equipment and Machinery:

1) Dry exposure, use galvanized steel. 2) Wet exposure and submerged exposure use stainless steel.

b. Fabricated Metalwork or Structural Building or Frame Components: 1) Dry Exposure, use galvanized steel. 2) Wet exposure and submerged exposure, use stainless steel.

c. Anchor Bolt Sleeve: High-density polyethylene plastic. 1) Single unit construction with deformed sidewalls such that the concrete and

grout lock in place. 2) The top of the sleeve shall be self threading to provide adjustment of the

threaded anchor bolt projection. 3) Material requirements shall conform to the following:

a) Plastic: High-density polyethylene. b) Density: ASTM D 1505. c) Vicat Softening Point: ASTM D 1525. d) Brittleness Temperature: ASTM D 746.

4) Manufacturer: Sinco West, 655 East Cochran Street, Simi Valley, CA 93085.

C. Concrete Expansion Anchors: Drilled-in concrete anchors shall be Trubolt Wedge anchors manufactured by ITW Ramset/Red Head; Kwik-Bolt II stud type anchors, manufactured by Hilti, Inc., or Power-stud anchors by Powers Rawl, unless noted otherwise. Provide diameter shown or required except minimum diameter of 3/8 inch.

D. Adhesive Threaded Rod Anchors: 316 stainless steel threaded rod free of grease, oil, or other deleterious material. 1. Products: Hilti HIT RE-500, or Simpson Set Adhesive, Epoxy Resin for use in cracked

or uncracked concrete, unless otherwise noted or required. 2. Storage of Adhesive:

a. Store adhesive cartridges on pallets or shelving in a covered storage area. b. Control temperature above 60 degrees F and dispose of cartridges if shelf life has

expired. c. If stored at temperatures below 60 degrees F, test adhesive prior to use to

determine if adhesive meets specified requirements. E. Provide concrete anchors for the exposure conditions as noted below:

1. Drilled-In Concrete Anchors: a. Dry exposure, use galvanized steel. b. Wet exposure, use stainless steel. c. Submerged exposure, do not use.

2. Adhesive Anchors: a. Dry exposure, use galvanized steel. b. Wet exposure, use stainless steel. c. Submerged exposure, use stainless steel. d. Epoxy anchors shall not be used in any overhead applications.

3. Grouted Concrete Anchor: a. Dry exposure, use stainless steel. b. Wet exposure, use stainless steel. c. Submerged exposure, use stainless steel.

F. Drilled-in concrete anchors shall not be used for anchoring of any machinery or equipment with moving parts.



G. Stainless-Steel Fasteners Lubricant (Anti-Seizing) 1. Where stainless steel nuts and machined bolts, anchor bolts, concrete anchors, and all

other threaded fasteners are used, Contractor shall apply an anti-seizing lubricant to the threads prior to making up the connections. The lubricant shall contain substantial amounts of molybdenum disulfide, graphite, mica, talc, or copper.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture

designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. All concrete unless noted otherwise. Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): a. Footings – 3500 psi. b. Foundation Walls – 3500 psi c. Slabs-on-grade – 3500 psi d. Elevated Slabs – 4000 psi

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Maximum Slump: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Maximum Slump: 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before

adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.

5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

C. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent

portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. 5. Silica Fume: 10 percent. 6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not

exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. 7. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag, and Silica

Fume: 50 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.

D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of cement.

E. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and

workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. . 3. Use permeability-reducing admixtures (PRA) in concrete for water-retaining structures as

specified herein.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94

and ASTM C 1116 and furnish batch ticket information.



1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Not permitted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to

ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

B. Granular Course: Cover vapor retarder with fine-graded granular material, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch or minus 3/4 inch.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Position in form at location shown. Do not place concrete before receiving approval of

placing plan. 2. Provide adequate support to prevent displacement during concreting. 3. Allow other trades ample time and facilities for placing and installing embedded items. 4. Conduits must have same cover as required for reinforcing. Do not embed conduits

larger than 2-inch nominal size or any piping unless written approval of Owner’s Authorized Representative is obtained. Comply with ACI 318 Section 20.7.

5. No insert shall be permitted with less cover than the reinforcement unless corrosion problems are adequately resolved.

3.3 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at

locations indicated or as approved by Owner’s Authorized Representative. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset

joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

6. Walls exceeding 50 feet in length shall be cast in panels not to exceed 30 feet in length. Where the number of panels is three or more, the panels shall be cast in an alternating pattern, unless 5 days have elapsed between casting of adjoining panels.

7. Slabs shall be cast in panels not to exceed 25 feet in length, not to exceed 500 square feet in area, and with a length to width ratio less than 1-1/2:1. Panels shall be cast in checkerboard patterns. Minimum lapsed time between placing adjacent panels shall be 48 hours.

8. Vertical construction joints shall be grooved at exposed faces. Grooves subjected to wetting or weather shall be caulked with joint sealer as specified.



9. Girders and floor slabs shall not be constructed over columns or walls until at least one hour has elapsed to allow for shrinkage in the column or wall. No joint will be allowed between a slab and a beam or girder unless otherwise specified. Waterstops shall be provided in construction joints at locations as specified.

10. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing

each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished

concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below

finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.

3.4 WATERSTOPS A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a

continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded

items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. Placement shall be per ACI 301 unless noted otherwise.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Owner’s Authorized Representative. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture. C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new

concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.



3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three

successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing

water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with defects

repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to view: foundations and backfilled walls.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to view, exposed to water, in contact with water or to

be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete: interior walls of intake structure, intake dam, fishways, lower fish barrier, interior walls of adult holding pond, portions of exterior walls exposed to view.

C. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match surrounding concrete.



Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to fish habitat: interior walls of intake structure,

fishways, lower fish barrier and adult holding pond. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces

adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.7 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and

finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small

or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to all exposed horizontal surfaces.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces of interior floors. 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an

unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch.

D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, walkways, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with

fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Owner’s Authorized Representative before application.

3.8 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in

place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

C. Anchor Bolts and Concrete Anchors: Install per manufacturer’s recommendations. Cutting and welding shall not be permitted. Protect dissimilar metals in conformance to Division 5. Items to be embedded in concrete shall be placed accurately and held securely during placement. Anchors shall be protected after installation by coating the exposed threads with lubricant (anti-seizing) and installing the nut. 1. Anchor Bolts: All anchor bolts shall be accurately located and held in place with

templates at the time the concrete is poured. 2. Concrete Anchors: Installation shall not begin until the concrete or masonry receiving

the anchors has attained its design strength. Install in strict conformance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Use manufacturer’s recommended drills and equipment. a. Adhesive Anchors: Do not install when temperature of concrete is below 35

degrees F or above 110 degrees F.



1) Adhesive anchors shall be installed in concrete having a minimum age of 21 days at time of anchor installation.

b. Furnish manufacturer’s representative, for each type of concrete anchor used, to the jobsite to conduct jobsite training for proper installation, handling, and storage of each anchor system for personnel as required. Notify the Owner’s Authorized Representative of training session schedule.

c. Flush mounted concrete anchors shall not be used unless specifically shown on the Drawings or approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

3. Galvanizing and Repair: a. The minimum pitch diameter of the threaded portion of all bolts, anchor bars, or

studs shall conform to ANSI B1.1, having a Class 2A tolerance before galvanizing. After galvanizing, the pitch diameter of the nuts or other internally threaded parts may be tapped over ANSI B1.1, Class 2B tolerance by the following maximum amounts: 1) 3/8-inch through 9/16-inch 0.016-inch oversize 2) 5/8-inch through 1-inch 0.023-inch oversize 3) 1-1/8-inch and larger 0.033-inch oversize

b. Galvanized surfaces that are abraded or damaged at any time after the application of the zinc coating shall be repaired to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the

following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

penetrating liquid floor treatments.



c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without

damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer.

3.10 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least 28 days or per manufacturer’s recommendation. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.11 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Owner’s Authorized

Representative. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Owner’s Authorized Representative's approval. Match repairs to color, texture, and uniformity of surrounding surfaces and to repairs on approved mockups

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than

1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Owner’s Authorized Representative.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.



3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

6. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Owner’s Authorized Representative's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Owner’s Authorized Representative's approval.

3.12 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect corners, edges, and surfaces of exposed cast-in-place concrete from damage; use guards

and barricades. B. Protect exposed cast-in-place concrete from staining, laitance, and contamination during

remainder of construction period. C. Clean exposed cast-in-place concrete surfaces after finish treatment to remove stains, markings,

dust, and debris. D. Protect other Work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.

1. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of cast-in-place architectural concrete finishes.

2. Use only cleaning materials that are biodegradable and non-toxic to fish.

3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner’s Inspections: Owner will provide an inspector to perform inspections and prepare

inspection reports. B. Special Inspection and Testing: Contractor shall employ a qualified independent special

inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform concrete field tests and adhesive anchor inspections and prepare test reports. Contractor shall send copies of test reports to Owner’s Authorized Representative.

C. Inspections: 1. Formwork. 2. Steel reinforcement placement. 3. Steel reinforcement welding. 4. Embedded items. 5. Anchor bolts. 6. Adhesive anchors 7. Verification of use of required design mixture. 8. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.



9. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 10. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from structural

components. D. Sampling Assistance and Notification for Owner

1. To facilitate testing and inspection, perform the following: a. Furnish any necessary labor to assist Testing Agency in obtaining and handling

samples at site. b. Provide and maintain for sole use of Testing Agency adequate facilities for safe

storage and proper curing of test specimens on site for first 24 HRS as required by ASTM C31.

2. Notify Owner’s Authorized Representative sufficiently in advance of operations (minimum of 24 HRS) to allow for assignment of personnel and for scheduled quality tests.

E. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof.

2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests

for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

3. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each

composite sample. b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite

sample. 7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured

specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens

at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of

two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-

cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Owner’s Authorized Representative, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete



placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Owner’s Authorized Representative. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Owner’s Authorized Representative.

12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Watertightness, Testing and Repair 1. All liquid holding structures:

a. Perform leakage tests after concrete has cured and obtained its design strength, and before backfill or other work which will cover concrete wall surfaces is begun.

b. Make other equipment, i.e., stop gates, sluice gates, etc., or temporary bulkheads watertight prior to test.

c. As an alternative to having watertight bulkheads, gates, or valves, accurately measure the leakage through gates, valves and bulkheads with methods acceptable to Owner’s Authorized Representative. An assumed leakage through gates and valves based on manufacturer’s recommendations is not acceptable.

d. Fill with water to maximum operating liquid surface prior to leak testing, and maintain level for 48 hours for moisture absorption by concrete.

e. Close all valves and gates to the structure and measure the change in water surface for a 24-hour period.

f. During test period, examine exposed portions of structure for dampness or leaks and mark visible leaks or damp spots.

2. Test Evaluation Criteria: a. Drop in water surface in 24-hour period with basin full to the leakage test water

level elevations is less than 1/10 of 1 percent of normal volume of liquid contained in water-holding structure, after accounting for evaporation and precipitation in open basins, and damp spots or seepage are not present on walls or other areas exposed to view.

b. Determine evaporation by floating an evaporation pan in structure during test period.

3. Excessive Leakage and Leakage Test Failure: If drop in water surface exceeds test evaluation criteria or if damp spots or seepage is visible in exposed surfaces.

4. Repairs: a. If leakage is excessive, and if damp spots and observed seepage is present on

exposed surfaces, drain water-holding structure, epoxy grout inject all cracks, patch all surface areas and damp spots previously marked, and make necessary repairs as outlined hereinbefore and retest basin.

5. Retest: a. Refill liquid-holding structure and test for leakage until structure meets test

criteria. b. Successful Test: If liquid level criteria is met and damp spots and seepage

problems are corrected. G. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 48 hours of

finishing.







DIVISION 05 - METALS





STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes structural steel, including the fabrication and erection of framing and bracing

members, including connections and grout. B. Related Sections:

1. Division 03 "Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.

2. Section 05 50 00 “Metal Fabrications” 3. Section 05 52 13 “Pipe and Tube Railings” 4. Section 09 80 00 “Protective Coatings”

1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of

Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Complete Shop Drawings for all of the work showing clearly all pieces, sizes, dimensions,

details, connections materials and shop coatings. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their

connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 2. All Shop Drawings must be checked and signed "approved" before submittal. 3. Show all cuts, copes, and holes. 4. Indicate all shop and field bolts. 5. Indicate all shop and field welds using AWS symbols.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. D. Welding certificates for all personnel performing welds. E. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. F. Source quality-control reports.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification

Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 360. 3. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) "Specification for Structural Joints

Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. F. Building Code

1. International Code Council (ICC) a. Oregon Structural Specialty Code and associated standards, latest adopted edition,

including all amendments, referred to herein as Building code.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M. B. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections (HSS): ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex

steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

B. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH (ASTM A 563M, Class 10S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating.

C. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

D. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

E. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

F. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

G. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035.

H. Expansion Anchor Bolts and Adhesive Anchor Bolts for Fastening to Concrete: 1. Use of expansion bolts requires approval by Owner’s Authorized Representative. 2. Stainless steel, Type 304 or 316. 3. Provide minimum edge distance cover as recommended by manufacturer or as indicated

on Drawings. 4. Submit manufacturer's data to verify at least the load test capacities of the following

embedment depth: a. Submit manufacturer's load test data to verify at least the anchor bolt capacities at

the following embedment depths: ANCHOR BOLT DIAMETER (IN)

EMBEDMENT (IN)

MINIMUM ULTIMATE TENSION CAPACITY (KIP)*, **

3/8 3 4.8 1/2 4 8.1 5/8 5 11.4 3/4 6 15.4 7/8 7 20.0 1 8 24.7

1-1/4 10 34.3 * Data must be based on actual tests performed in unreinforced mass concrete of not

more than 4000 psi compressive strength. ** Capacity must be at a concrete temperature of at least 130 Deg. F.



2.3 PRIMER A. Primer: Comply with Division 09 Protective Coatings

2.4 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate

according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360.

B. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Connection Details: 1. Connections not fully detailed on Drawings shall be designed by a professional engineer

registered in the State of Oregon, retained by Contractor, based on requirements of Contract Documents.

2. Where beam reactions are shown on Drawings, design beam connection to support reaction shown.

3. Where no reactions are shown each beam connection shall be designed to support one-half of total uniform load capacity tabulated in AISC tables for "Uniform Load Constants for Beams" for the given shape, span and steel specified.

D. Cut, drill, or punch holes at right angles to surface of metal. 1. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Make holes clean cut, without torn or ragged edges. 3. Remove outside burrs resulting from drilling or reaming operations with tool making

1/16 IN bevel. 4. Provide holes in members to permit connection of work of other trades or contractors.

E. Make splices only where indicated or where approved. F. Cope at 45 degrees, corners of stiffener plates at junction of member flanges with webs. G. Flame cut bevels for welds, provided such cutting is done automatically.

1. Leave free of burrs and slag by grinding or plane the cut edges. H. Grind smooth all rough welds and sharp steel edges shall be ground to approximately 1/8 IN

radius. I. Welding:

1. Do not perform welding when ambient temperature is lower than 0 DegF or where surfaces are wet or exposed to rain, snow, or high wind, or when welders are exposed to inclement conditions.

2. Headed Studs and Deformed Bar Anchors: a. Automatically end welded in accordance with the AWS Code and manufacturer's

recommendations b. Fillet welding of headed studs and deformed bar anchors is not allowed unless

approved by Owner’s Authorized Representative. 3. Test in-place studs in accordance with requirements of AWS Code to ensure satisfactory

welding of studs to members. a. Replace studs failing this test



4. When headed stud-type shear connectors are to be applied, clean top surface of members to receive studs in shop to remove oil, scale, rust, dirt, and other materials injurious to satisfactory welding.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches.

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner or Owner’s Authorized Representative reserves the right to engage an

independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being

fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the

Contract Documents. C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested

and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL A. Contractor is solely responsible for safety.

1. Construction means and methods and sequencing of work is the prerogative of the Contractor a. Take into consideration that full structural capacity of many structural members is

not realized until structural assembly is complete; e.g., until slabs, decks, bracing or rigid connections are installed

2. Partially complete structural members shall not be loaded without an investigation by the Contractor.

3. Until all elements of the permanent structure and lateral bracing system are complete, provide temporary bracing designed, furnished, and installed by the Contractor for the partially complete structure.

B. Adequate temporary bracing to provide safety, stability and to resist all loads to which the partially complete structure may be subjected, including wind, construction activities, and operation of equipment is the responsibility of the Contractor. 1. Use temporary guys, braces, shoring, connections, etc., necessary to maintain the

structural framing plumb and in proper alignment until permanent connections are made, the succeeding work is in place, and temporary work is no longer necessary.

2. Use temporary guys, bracing, shoring, and other work to prevent injury or damage to adjacent work or construction from stresses due to erection procedures and operation of erection equipment, construction loads, and wind.

3. Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the temporary bracing system and must consider the sequence and schedule of placement of such elements and effects of loads imposed on the structural steel members by partially or completely installed work, including work of all other trades. a. If not obvious from experience or from the Drawings, the Contractor shall confer

with their Engineer to identify those structural steel elements that must be complete before the temporary bracing system is removed.

4. Remove and dispose of all temporary work and facilities off-site. C. Examine work-in-place on which specified work is in any way dependent to ensure that

conditions are satisfactory for the installation of the work. 1. Report defects in work-in-place which may influence satisfactory completion of the

work. 2. Absence of such notification will be construed as acceptance of work-in-place.

D. Field Measurement: 1. Take field measurements as necessary to verify or supplement dimensions indicated on

the Drawings. 2. Contractor responsible for the accurate fit of the work

E. Check the elevations of all finished footings or foundations and the location and alignment of all anchor bolts before starting erection. 1. Notify Owner’s Authorized Representative of any errors or deviations found by such

checking

3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and

locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to

AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-

reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Do not use gas cutting to correct fabrication errors. 1. In case members do not fit or holes do not match, ream out the holes and insert the next

larger size bolt. a. If the connections require new holes, then drill new holes b. Make no such corrections without prior approval of the Owner’s Authorized

Representative 2. Burning of holes: Not permitted

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary

connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency

to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification

for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.



STEEL FLOOR DECKING 05 31 13 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 05 31 13 - STEEL FLOOR DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following:

1. Composite floor deck. B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 01 40 00 “Quality Control” 2. Section 03 30 00 “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for concrete fill. 3. Section 05 12 00 “Structural Steel Framing 4. Section 05 50 00 “Metal Fabrications” 5. Section 07 62 00 “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim”

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each type of decking specified, including dimensions of individual

components and accessories, profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings:

1. Prior to fabrication; prepare shop drawings for work under this section and submit to Owner’s Authorized Representative. Shop drawings are to include deck layout, framing and support of openings, layout and quality of studs on beams, dimensions and sections, details of accessories and type and location of welds.

2. Manufacturer's product literature and relevant approvals are to be submitted with the shop where metal decking is part of a fire rated assembly, the metal deck manufacturer shall provide all data to insure compliance with the UL design number and with ICC.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck, signed by product manufacturer. D. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. E. Research/Evaluation Reports for steel deck. F. Shoring design

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E329 for

testing indicated. B. Codes/Standards – The work and materials of this section shall comply with:

1. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

2. Metal Decking is to be attached to the structural frame in conformance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code – Steel" and D1.3 "Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel."

3. ICC Research Report No. ESR-2408. 4. Uniform Evaluation Service Report 329. 5. ASTM A653, "Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-

Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process." 6. Steel Deck Institute (SDI)-Metal floor deck profiles shall be in conformance with

ANSI/SDI standard C1.0 "Standard for Composite Steel Floor Deck."

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transport, store, and erect metal deck and its accessories in a manner that will prevent

corrosion, deformation, or other damage. Store deck clear of the ground with one end elevated



to promote drainage; protect metal deck from water and the elements with a water resistant material. Do not use as a storage platform.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Deck:

a. ASC Profiles, LLC b. Verco Manufacturing Co. c. Pre-approved equal.

2.2 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK A. Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs

and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30 and Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Panel Profile:

a. ASC Steel Deck NH-32 Hi Form b. Verco Decking N3 Formlock

2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50, G90 zinc coating. 3. Profile Depth: 3 inches. 4. Total Depth including concrete: 7½” 5. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0478 inch (18 gage). 6. Finish: Factory prime paint over galvanized finish. Verify compatibility with

intumescent paint. 7. Span Condition: Simple span.

B. Concrete: Normal Weight with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 psi. C. Minimum Reinforcing: Grade 60, #3 bars at 18” on center, 2” clear of the top face.

2.3 FABRICATION A. Manufacture deck units to lengths as indicated on shop drawings. Panel end conditions are to be

butted. Sidelaps are to be male/female interlocking type, suitable for button punching.

2.4 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with

requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically

driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws. C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel

screws, No. 10 minimum diameter. D. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000

psi not less than 0.0478-inch uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

E. Pour Stops: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile indicated or recommended by SDI Publication No. 30 for overhang and slab depth.

F. End Closures: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in

SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, as required to meet deflection limitations. 1. Shoring design is the responsibility of the Contractor. Design to be prepared and

stamped by an engineer licensed in the State of Oregon. C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned

and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting

through or adjacent to deck. G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,

continuity of deck, and support of other work. H. Welded attachment of metal deck units to the supporting members shall conform to AWS D1.1

and D1.3. Welders shall be certified prior to commencing work. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

3.3 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION A. Attach metal deck units to supporting steel members with puddle welds.

1. Puddle Weld Effective Diameter: 0.5 inch. 2. Attachment Pattern: 32/5.

B. Perimeter Wall Attachment and where shown on plans. 1. 3/4” diameter headed shear stud anchor 2. Spacing:

a. Bearing ledge: Match 32/5 attachment pattern b. Perimeter edges of panels: 24”

C. Side-Lap: Fasten side laps between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of half of the span or 36 inches, and as follows: 1. Triple button punch or DeltaGrip® punch.

D. Pour Stops: Fasten steel sheet pour stops to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. A qualified Special Inspector shall perform inspections of the cold-formed steel and concrete

construction per the Oregon Structural Specialty Code (OSSC) Chapter 17 and prepare inspection reports. 1. Field Welding: Periodic special inspection. 2. Concrete: Continuous and Periodic

B. Inspector shall prepare inspection reports and submit promptly, in writing, to Contractor and Owner’s Authorized Representative.

C. Contractor to remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance of

corrected work with specified requirements.



3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Before concrete placement, inspect deck for tears, dents, or other damages that may prevent the

deck from acting as a tight and substantial form. The need for repair of the damaged deck shall be determined by the Owner’s Authorized Representative or Engineer of Record.

B. Deck surfaces shall be cleaned of debris, including, but not limited to welding rods, stud ferrules that are broken free from the stud, and excess fasteners, prior to concrete placement.

C. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections.

2. Metal ladders. 3. Metal floor plate and supports. 4. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards, steel edgings. 5. Metal bollards. 6. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other

Sections. 7. Embed channels

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section: 1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated

to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 2. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not

specified in other Sections. C. Related Sections:

1. Division 03 "Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.

2. Section 05 12 00 “Structural Steel Framing” 3. Section 05 52 13 “Pipe and Tube Railings” 4. Section 09 80 00 “Protective Coatings”

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Metal nosing and treads. 2. Paint products. 3. Grout.

B. Complete Shop Drawings for all of the work showing clearly all pieces, sizes, dimensions, details, connections materials and shop coatings. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections.

Show anchorage and accessory items. 2. All Shop Drawings must be checked and signed "approved" before submittal. 3. Show all cuts, copes, and holes. 4. Indicate all shop and field bolts. 5. Indicate all shop and field welds using AWS symbols.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. E. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that products furnished

comply with requirements. F. Welding certificates.



G. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint

and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel

products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304. D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. E. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with

ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. F. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793. G. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. H. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 NONFERROUS METALS A. Aluminum Plate: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6. C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 5005-H34



2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners where indicated

and hot dip galvanized fasteners at all other locations unless noted otherwise. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Per general structural notes. C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,

ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1. D. Anchor Bolts: Per general structural notes.

1. Hot-dip galvanized coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. 2. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36

E. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

F. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Per general structural notes. G. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors: Per general

structural notes.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy

welded. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and

compatible with paints specified to be used over it. C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous

grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

E. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units

only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.



F. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

G. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to

complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise

indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with primer specified in Division 09 Section "High-

Performance Coatings" where indicated.

2.8 METAL LADDERS A. General:

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Ladders:

1. Space side rails 24 inches apart unless otherwise indicated. 2. Side rails: Continuous, 3/8 by 2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges. 3. Rungs: 1 inch diameter steel bars. 4. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-oxide

granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout.

6. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded to rung. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) IKG Industries, a division of Harsco Corporation; Mebac. 2) SlipNOT Metal Safety Flooring, a W. S. Molnar company; SlipNOT.

7. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from welded or pressure-locked steel bar grating, supported by steel angles. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 3/4 inch in least dimension.

8. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets.

9. Galvanize ladders, including brackets and fasteners. C. Aluminum Ladders:

1. Standard Duty Channel Rail a. Model 500 as manufactured by O’Keefee’s, Inc., or equal.

2. Tubular Rail low parapet access ladder with walk-through rail extension a. Model 504 as manufactured by O’Keefee’s Inc., or equal

3. Rungs: Not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in section and 18–3/8 inches (467mm) long, formed from tubular aluminum extrusions. Squared and deeply serrated on all sides.

4. Rungs shall withstand a 1,500 pound (454 kg) load without deformation or failure. 5. Channel Side Rails: Not less than 1/8 inch (3 mm) wall thickness by 3 inches (76 mm)

wide. 6. Heavy Duty Tubular Side Rails: Assembled from two interlocking aluminum extrusions

no less than 1/8 inch (3 mm) wall thickness by 3 inches (76 mm) wide. Construction shall



be self-locking stainless steel fasteners, full penetration TIG welds and clean, smooth and burr-free surfaces.

7. Walk-Through Rail and Roof Rail Extension: Not less than 3 feet 6 inches (1067 mm) above the landing and shall be fitted with deeply serrated, square, tubular grab rails.

8. Mill finish. As extruded. 9. Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M10C22A41 Mechanical finish as fabricated. Architectural

Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker.

2.9 METAL FLOOR PLATE A. Fabricate from rolled-steel floor plate of thickness indicated below:

1. Thickness: As indicated. B. Provide grating sections where indicated fabricated from welded steel bar grating. Limit

openings in gratings to no more than 1 inch in least dimension. C. Provide steel angle supports as indicated. D. Include steel angle stiffeners, and fixed and removable sections as indicated.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown

with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

C. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim.

2.11 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe or steel shapes, as indicated.

1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch thick steel plate. B. Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill

baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch anchor bolts. 1. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for plumb

alignment of bollards. C. Paint bollards with Alkyd Enamel as specified in Division 09 Section "Protective Coatings."

2.12 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete

construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Galvanize plates.

2.13 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.14 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for

recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into

surrounding surface.



2.15 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for

steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint

adhesion. B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded

in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with primers specified in Division 09 painting Sections unless primers

specified in Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings" are indicated. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial

Blast Cleaning." 3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Division 09 Section "High-Performance

Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2.16 EMBED CHANNELS A. Fabricate from materials and dimensions as shown on Contract Drawings B. No paint or galvanizing is required. C. All sharp edges shall be ground smooth. D. Vertical portions shall be fabricated plumb.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing

metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.



E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before

installing. 1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete.

B. Anchor bollards to existing construction with anchor bolts. Provide four 3/4 inch bolts at each bollard unless otherwise indicated.

C. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inchesabove bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.

3.4 INSTALLING CAST-IRON WHEEL GUARDS Anchor wheel guards to concrete or masonry construction to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Fill cores solidly with concrete.

3.5 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to

improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have

been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonshrink grout, nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture;

use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and

abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mi dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780.






PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 05 52 13 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Steel pipe and tube railings. 2. Aluminum pipe and tube railings.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.


1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Railing brackets. 3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. Complete Shop Drawings for all of the work showing clearly all pieces, sizes, dimensions, details, connections materials and shop coatings.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

2. All Shop Drawings must be checked and signed "approved" before submittal. 3. Show all cuts, copes, and holes. 4. Indicate all shop and field bolts. 5. Indicate all shop and field welds using AWS symbols.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=4155&mf=04&src=wd


a. Pisor Industries, Inc. b. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies.

2. Aluminum Pipe and Tube Railings: a. ATR Technologies, Inc. b. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. c. Braun, J. G., Company; a division of the Wagner Companies. d. CraneVeyor Corp. e. Hollaender Manufacturing Company. f. Kee Industrial Products, Inc. g. Moultrie Manufacturing Company. h. Pisor Industries, Inc. i. Sterling Dula Architectural Products, Inc.; Div. of Kane Manufacturing. j. Superior Aluminum Products, Inc. k. Thompson Fabricating, LLC. l. Tri Tech, Inc. m. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. n. Tuttle Railing Systems; Div. of Tuttle Aluminum & Bronze, Inc. o. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies.

2.2 METALS, GENERAL Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 STEEL A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed). B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40),

unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.4 ALUMINUM A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and

finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required.

B. Extruded Bars and Tubing: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5/T52. C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6. D. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210 (ASTM B 210M), Alloy 6063-T832. E. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Provide the following:

1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.

3. Aluminum Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 4. Stainless-Steel Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.

B. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

C. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

D. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456818474&mf=04&src=wd




















E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous

grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.6 FABRICATION A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius

of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings

designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness

shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. D. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with

concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings.

E. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

F. Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. G. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling or otherwise deforming

exposed surfaces. H. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. I. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. J. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous

fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers to transfer loads through wall finishes.

2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings:

1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.

B. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.

2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M32C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines

and levels and free of rack.



1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m).

B. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

C. Anchor posts to concrete as shown on the standard structural detail drawings. D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges. E. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction. F. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces. G. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Use type of

bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. H. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use adhesive anchors as shown on the details. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between

studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 4. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs.

Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 5. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to

concealed steel reinforcements. 6. For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or

through concealed steel reinforcements.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.



METAL GRATINGS 05 53 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 05 53 00 - METAL GRATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Safety Grating walkways, planks, stair-treads with reticulated and formed metal cross struts.

2. Regular and Heavy Duty Safety Grating products constructed from single-sheet with integrally-formed channels at the edges.

3. Slip resistant walkways, planks and stair-treads with stamped surface textures/patterns. B. Related Sections:

1. Section 05 50 00 “Metal Fabrications” 2. Section 05 52 13 “Pipe and Tube Railings” 3. Section 09 80 00 “Protective Coatings”

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit drawings of Slip Resistant Grating products, accessories and attachments. B. Submit manufacturer’s product data on Slip Resistant Grating products including, but not limited

to; types, materials, finishes, gauge thickness, surface patterns. For each grating cross-section, submit dimensional information, span, load capacity and deflection requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Show fabrication and installation details, including plans. 2. Coordination of drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale. Include scaled layout

and relationships between grating and adjacent structural elements.

1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 123 – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products B. ASTM A 240 – Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications C. ASTM A 653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process D. ASTM A 924 – Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-

Coated by the Hot-Dip Process E. ASTM A 1011 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability F. ASTM B 209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate G. OSHA-Occupational Safety and Health Administration- Standards for walking-working surfaces.

Part Number 1910, Subpart D. H. RR-G-1602D- Federal Specification For Safety Grating (other than bar type & excluding naval

vessels) I. ISO 9001:2000 Quality Management System- Requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of (Safety Grating) (Slip Resistant

Grating) of the types required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. OSHA Compliance: All grating installations must comply with OSHA Standards for walking-working surfaces.

C. Federal Specification RR-G-1602D (or current revision) defines the criteria for items to be considered “Safety Grating”. Slip resistant performance data must be available to support compliance.


METAL GRATINGS 05 53 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

D. Manufacturer must have an ISO registered quality system in place, and Manual available upon request.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver (Safety Grating) (Slip Resistant Grating) and components carefully to avoid damage,

denting and scoring of finishes. Do not install damaged material. B. Store materials in original packaging and in clean, dry space; protect from weather and

construction traffic. Materials to be elevated off of ground by blocks or skids or pallets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Slip Resistant Gratings: Subject to compliance with these specifications, Slip Resistant Gratings

shall be installed as manufactured by Cooper B-Line, Grating Pacific or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS AND FINISH A. Hot Rolled, Pickled & Oiled Steel: Commercial steel per ASTM A 1011, minimum yield of 33

ksi. B. Mill Galvanized Steel: Commercial steel per ASTM A 653 and ASTM A 924 with G-90 coating

designation, minimum yield of 33 ksi. C. Hot-Dip Galvanized After Fabrication: Commercial steel per ASTM A 1011, minimum yield of

33 ksi, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication per ASTM A 123. D. Aluminum: Alloy 5052, Temper H32 aluminum per ASTM B 209 E. Stainless Steel: Type 304 (Type 316) stainless steel, 2B or 2D finish, per ASTM A 240.

2.3 GRATINGS AND COMPONENTS A. Slip Resistant Grating: (planks)(walkways)(treads)(ladder rungs) shall be constructed from a

single sheet with integrally formed side channels and surface textures..

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. A. Inspect areas to receive Grating for obstacles. Notify the Owner’s Authorized Representative

of conditions that would adversely affect the installation or subsequent utilization of the areas. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

B. Install Grating according to manufacturer’s recommendations and as shown on the construction drawings.

C. Postion Grating sections flat and square with ends bearing minimum 1-1/2” on supporting structure.

D. Keep sections at least ¼” away from vertical steel sections and ½” from concrete walls. E. Allow clearance at joints between sections of maximum ¼” at side channels and maximum 3/8”

at ends. F. Band random cut ends and diagonal or circular cut exposed edges with a minimum 1/8” thick

bar welded at contact points. G. Join abutting walkway sections with manufacturer supplied splice plates; bolted or welded as

specified.Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.




DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES





ROUGH CARPENTRY AND WOOD CONSTRUCTION 06 10 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY AND WOOD CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section Includes:

1. Dimension lumber framing. 2. Blocking and backing to support the Work of other Sections. 3. Wood panel products decking and sheathing. 4. Wood panel product underlayment under finish flooring.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Concrete Formwork, Section 03300. B. Prefabricated Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses, Section 06190. C. Finish Carpentry, Section 06220.

1.3 BUILDING CODE A. Building Code requirements govern, if more restrictive than those specified herein. Notify

Owner’s Authorized Representative of differences prior to starting work.

1.4 EVIDENCE OF GRADE A. Grade Mark and Trade Mark of Association listed below and having jurisdiction must appear on

each piece of material. 1. WWPA: Western Wood Products Assn., 1500 Yeon Bldg., Portland, OR 97204. 2. APA: American Plywood Assn., 119 "A" St., Tacoma, WA, 98401.

B. On members scheduled to receive Transparent Finish do not place Grade Mark Stamp where exposed to view. In lieu thereof stamp where concealed, or submit Certificate of Inspection.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect against moisture, damage and discoloration. B. Do not store Wood materials in wet or damp areas, or in contact with ground. C. Avoid overloading Floor and Roof Framing with stored Materials.

1.6 PROTECTION A. Protect Sheathing until covered.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FRAMING LUMBER A. Material

1. Douglas Fir/Larch, surfaced 4 sides to standard nominal dimensions except where rough sawn stock or special shapes are indicated.

B. Grade 1. As indicated on Structural Drawings.

C. Maximum Moisture Content when delivered to Project 1. All Framing Lumber is to be kiln-dried to achieve the following values:

a. Wood embedded in Masonry or Concrete; and Sub-Floors: 19%. b. All Other Wood materials: 19%.

2. Submit Moisture Content Certificates to Owner’s Authorized Representative.



2.2 WALL, FLOOR AND ROOF SHEATHING A. US Product Standard PS-1 Performance Standard. Panels shall be APA rated Sheathing,

Exposure I. 1. Each piece shall bear APA Grade mark. 2. Thickness and span rating as indicated on Drawings. 3. Floor and wall sheathing shall be plywood panel index as required. Roof sheathing shall be

plywood. OSB is not permitted as roof sheathing.

2.3 DRAFT STOP SHEATHING A. U.S. Product Standard PS-1 Performance Standard, APA rated sheathing. B. 3/8-inch thick unless noted otherwise.

2.4 UNDERLAYMENT PAPER A. Asphalt saturated, unperforated Roofing Felt; ASTM D-226, 15 lb. type. Provide over structural

wood floor sheathing prior to placement of underlayment.

2.5 FRAMING CONNECTORS A. Zinc-Coated Steel, ICBO-approved, manufactured by Simpson, or approved. Proposed

substitutions must be ICBO approved with equivalent corrosion resistance. B. If specific type is not shown on Drawings, use type recommended by Manufacturer for

conditions of installation.

2.6 FASTENERS A. Bolts: ASTM A307 B. Nuts: ASTM A563 C. Wood Screws: ASTM C1002 D. Nails and Staples: ASTM F1667. E. Provide Washers under Bolt heads, Lag heads, and Nuts. F. Provide all necessary for installation of Work specified herein; sizes and quantities noted

hereunder in Nailing Schedule or in Building Code. Provide Stainless Steel Fasteners where exposed to moisture.

2.7 CONSTRUCTION ADHESIVE A. As recommended by floor joist Manufacturer.

2.8 STUDS A. Sizes and spacings shown on Drawings.

2.9 WOOD BLOCKING A. Provide 2 inch nominal framing Lumber behind Cabinets, Roofing, Sheetmetal, Doors,

Windows, Finish Hardware including Door Stops, Railings, Chalkboards, Tackboards, Pegboards, Toilet Room Accessories, Mirrors, Miscellaneous Specialties, Building Equipment, Blinds, and Mechanical and Electrical Work; verify exact location.

2.10 BUILDING PAPER A. Water-resistive barrier wrap with integral drain system, Tyvek DrainWrap or approve equal.. B. Provide over sheathing prior to installing siding.

2.11 PLYWOOD UNDERLAYMENT A. 1/2 inch thick, manufactured for use as resilient floor covering underlayment, Weyerhauser

“Structurewood, Multiply Plywood, or approved.



2.12 WINDOW FLASHING TAPE A. 20-mil polyethylene-backed rubberized adhesive membrane tape. Self-adhering air/vapor

moisture barrier.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that surfaces to receive Work specified herein are rigid, secure, accurately sized and

located, and otherwise properly prepared. Prior to starting work notify General Contractor of surfaces requiring correction. Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.

3.2 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Where necessary verify field measurements prior to fabrication. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions, modify Work as required for

accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Owner’s Authorized Representative prior to fabrication.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install proprietary Products in accordance with Manufacturer's directions. B. Use additional Fasteners to those specified herein where necessary to insure rigidity and

permanence. C. Provide Washers under Nuts and Heads when making Bolted or Lag Screwed connections. D. Drive Nails perpendicular to grain in lieu of toe-nailing, where feasible. E. Provide for installation and support of Plumbing, Heating, Ventilating, and Electrical Work. F. Accurately locate, cut, fit and install Work secure, rigid, to true lines, plumb, and level, unless

otherwise indicated.

3.4 FRAMING CONNECTORS A. Provide where indicated; secure with Fasteners recommended by Manufacturer.

3.5 PLATES A. Provide single Plates at Floors and bottoms of Openings, double Plates face-nailed together at

Ceilings and heads of Openings. B. Provide Headers as specified hereunder. C. Splice single Plates; stagger ends of double Plates at least 4 ft.; splice Plates abutting at Corners. D. Locate Plate Splices directly over Studs. E. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, anchor Plates resting on Masonry or Concrete with 5/8

inch diameter Steel Bolts at 4 ft. maximum centers; embed Bolts into Structure 7 inches minimum.

F. Provide 2 Bolts minimum per piece and locate within 12 inches of piece ends.

3.6 STUDS A. Place with wide dimension perpendicular to Wall line. B. Double at openings and triple at corners and intersections, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. C. Secure Studs to top and bottom Plates per Code. Provide Blocking for nailing Surfacing Material

and Firestopping with nominal 2 inch materials, full width of Stud. D. Boring and Notching: Comply with building code and manufacturer’s recommendations.



3.7 BEAMS AND JOISTS A. Set with crown side up.

1. Double Headers and Trimmers; spike Beams with Ledgers to ends of Joists. Frame Roofs for free flow of water to Outlets.

3.8 PLYWOOD WALL, FLOOR AND ROOF SHEATHING A. Apply face grain perpendicular to and continuous over two or more Supports, with 1/8-inch

space between Sheets, and end joints on Bearings and staggered. B. Secure Sheathing with Nails and Blocking as indicated on Drawings. In addition, all Floor

Sheathing is to be adhered to Floor Framing with continuous bead of Construction Adhesive. C. Ply clips may not be used at metal roofs.

3.9 BUILDING PAPER A. Install according to Building Code and Siding and Build Wrap manufacturer’s written directions.

3.10 PLYWOOD UNDERLAYMENT A. Except where cutting is necessary, lay in full size sheets over Underlayment Paper immediately

prior to installing Resilient Flooring or Carpet Tile. B. Stagger cross joints at least 16 inches, and space sheets thickness of dime. C. Secure with 6 d ring shank nails spaced 6-inches apart along Panel edges and 8-inches apart

along intermediate Supports.

3.11 WINDOW FLASHING TAPE A. Provide at all vinyl windows. Install according to Manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.12 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust moving parts to operate satisfactorily at time of final Project acceptance and during

Warranty period.

3.13 PRODUCT CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products

which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this Section. B. Leave surfaces ready for Finishing specified in other Sections. C. Remove debris from Project Site upon Work completion or sooner, if directed



PREFABRICATED METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06 17 53 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 06 17 53 - PREFABRICATED METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Supply and erect wood trusses ash shown on the drawings and as specified. Work to include

anchorage, blocking, miscellaneous incidental framing and bracing.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Rough Carpentry, Section 06 10 00.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Trusses shall be designed by an Engineer licensed to practice in the State of Oregon. B. Trusses shall be designed in accordance with National Design Specification for Wood

Construction, AFPA and National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction, ANSI/TPI.

C. See Drawings for load requirements.

1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Conform to Building Code if requirements are more restrictive than those specified herein.

Notify Owner’s Authorized Representative of differences prior to starting work.

1.5 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES A. Fabricate and install Trusses with Bottom Chord level and true within 1/8 inch per 12 ft. B. Connector Locations: Within 1/4 inch of approved Shop Drawing position. C. Length: Within 1/16 inch per 20 feet of specified length. D. End Cuts: True within 1/16 inch per ft. or depth or width.

1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. Include species, size and stress grade of lumber; configuration and spacing for each type of

truss; type, size, material, finish, design values, and location of metal connector plates; and bracing details.

C. Provide shop drawings that have been stamped and signed by an Engineer licensed to practice in the State of Oregon.

D. Provide complete calculations stamped and signed by an Engineer licensed to practice in the State of Oregon.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to installation, submit handling and erection instructions to Project Manager.

1.8 CERTIFICATES A. Prior to installation, submit to Owner’s Authorized Representative:

1. Load carrying capacity: Certification by Fabricator that Trusses will sustain design loads.


PREFABRICATED METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06 17 53 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CHORD AND WEB MEMBERS A. Fir; graded for axial forces; surfaced four sides. B. Minimum nominal size: 2 x 4 inches, except where shown otherwise on Drawings. C. Maximum Moisture content: 19% D. When end-wall trusses are indicated, provide vertical members at 16 inches on center.

2.2 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES A. Galvanized Sheet Steel, ASTM A-446, Grade A; G-90 Coating Class, 20 gauge minimum. B. Fabricated with holes, plugs, teeth or prongs uniformly spaced and formed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify that Structure and Surfaces to receive Trusses are rigid, secure, accurately sized and

located, and otherwise properly prepared. B. Prior to starting work, notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction. C. Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory. D. Installation shall be in accordance with “Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing and

Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses” (BCSI) by WTCA and TPI. E. Trusses shall be set and secured level and plumb and in the correct location. F. Trusses shall be sufficiently braced during installation to prevent toppling. Install all bracing

before placing concentrated loads atop trusses. G. Cutting and altering of trusses is not permitted.



FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 06 20 00 – FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Exterior finish carpentry. 2. Interior finish carpentry.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Rough Carpentry, Section 06 10 00. B. Countertop Covering, Section 12 36 23. C. Caulking and Sealing, Section 07 92 00. D. Painting, Section 09 90 00.

1.3 QUALITY STANDARDS A. General

1. Unless otherwise modified herein, Materials and Workmanship Quality Grades shall be determined by the Association listed below.

2. Standards may be obtained from Association. Plywood, Fir Lumber and Workmanship: Quality Standards of American Woodwork Institute, herein after referred to as AWI, 2310 S. Walter Reed Dr., Arlington, VA 22206.

1.4 SUBMITTAL A. Product Data: For all products in the Work under this Section. B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show profiles, joint details and other pertinent items. 2. Show connections to adjacent Work and complete assembly, whether or not Materials are

furnished by Mill. 3. Identify each Item as to location, material grade, workmanship grade, species and finish.

C. Color Samples for Selection: Manufacturer’s complete line of standard colors for all exposed materials which have finish colors that will not be covered with paint in the finished Work.

D. Samples of Work for Approval: Provide sample for approval of quality and appearance of all items of Work under this Section. After approval, each sample may be incorporated into the Work and will be the standard for quality and appearance of subsequent similar Work.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY A. Do not deliver Products to Jobsite until notified by General Contractor that Project is

conditioned and prepared to handle and store Products without damage or discoloration.

1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration.

1.7 ILLUMINATION A. Perform no Work under less than 30 feet candles of light measured 3 feet above floor.

1.8 TEMPERATURE A. Maintain 50°F minimum in interior spaces where Finish Carpentry Materials are located.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MOISTURE CONTENT IN LUMBER A. 12% maximum.

2.2 EXTERIOR WOOD TRIM AND FASCIAS A. Species: Cedar

1. Grain: Tight Knot 2. AWI Grade: Custom 3. Surface Texture: Smooth 4. Minimum size: 5/4x4 or 5/4x6 5. Minimum Lengths: a. Opening Trim: 1 piece, single length. b. Standard Trim: No less than full story height. c. Fascias and Running Trim: Joints no closer than 12 ft. apart.

2.3 INTERIOR WOOD TRIM A. Window Sills and Aprons, and Any Other Running Trim: Cedar on all exposed running surfaces.

1. Grade: Tight Knot 6. AWI Grade: Custom 7. Surface Texture: Smooth 8. Minimum size: 5/4x4 or 5/4x6 9. Minimum Lengths: a. Opening Trim: 1 piece, single length. b. Standard Trim: No less than full story height. c. Running Trim: Joints no closer than 12 ft. apart

2.4 PLYWOOD A. Douglas Fir, US Product Standard 1, exterior type where exposed to weather or around sinks. B. Rotary cut, AWI custom grade.

2.5 FABRICATION A. General

1. Conform to AWI Premium Grade unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. Assemble finish material at Mill where feasible. Use concealed Fastenings wherever

possible. Conceal end grain in exposed surfaces. 3. Kerf backs of flat grain Members more than 5 inches wide or more than 1 inch nominal

thickness. 4. Back-plow interior trim.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that surfaces to receive Finish Carpentry are straight, plumb, true, solid, rigid and

otherwise properly prepared. B. Prior to starting Work, notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.



3.2 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify prior to fabrication. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions,

modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Owner’s Authorized Representative prior to fabricating Work.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. General

1. Square cut corners. Accurately scribe Filler Strips and Trim Strips to adjacent Surface irregularities.

2. Remove sharp external corners prior to finishing. 3. Ease all edges prior to finishing.

3.4 EXTERIOR TRIM INSTALLATION A. Fit carefully at joints and against other members; all joints on bearings; secure with hot-dipped

galvanized casing nails of proper size. B. Bevel-cut and glue end joints. C. Set exposed nails 1/16 inch below wood surface. D. Prime coat all surfaces of exterior trim prior to delivery for site, in accordance with Section 09

90 00.

3.5 INTERIOR WOOD TRIM INSTALLATION A. In accordance with AWI Premium standards.

3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Sections, clean, repair and touch-up or replace when directed, products

which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Leave Surfaces ready for finishing specified in Section 09 90 00. C. Remove debris from Project Site upon Work completion or sooner, if directed.







DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION





THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Batt insulation. 2. Vapor barriers.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Acoustical Insulation, Section 09500.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. "R" value designates thermal resistance of Insulation only, not including alleged air spaces or

other factors assumed to result in higher "R" values.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver to Project Site in Manufacturer's original unopened packages. B. Label package wrappers with brand name, Insulation type, and thermal rating. C. Imprint Insulation Facing at 24-inch maximum intervals with brand name, thickness, and

thermal rating. D. Store Materials off ground. E. Protect against moisture and damage. F. Immediately remove damaged or wet Material from Jobsite.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not install Insulation when surfaces to receive Insulation are wet or when surface and/or

ambient temperatures are lower than Manufacturer's specified minimums.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLEXIBLE MINERAL WOOL TYPE A. Material and Type

1. Manufactured by Johns-Manville, US Gypsum, Owens-Corning, Certain-teed, or approved.

2. Rock or glass wool blankets, full-length, single-piece where practicable. 3. Vapor barrier at warm face of insulation. 4. U.L. Flame Spread Rating: 25 or less, except where covered with Gypsum Board.

B. Extent of Work 5. Provide Insulation of the following types over all interior areas of the following surfaces:

a. Framed Walls and Roofs 1) Minimum Resistance Factor:

a) Walls: R-21. b) Flat Ceilings with Attic Above: R-38. c) Rafter Ceilings: R-30.

2.2 RIGID INSULATION AT WALL HEADERS A. Owens Corning “Foamular 250" or approved, ASTM C578 Type IV, square edge.



B. Provide Rigid Insulation at headers spanning over door and window openings. Provide 1-1/2-inch thickness at headers as allowable.

2.3 VAPOR BARRIER A. Provide beneath Insulation at ceilings, roofs, walls, and as indicated on Drawings. Polyethylene

Film, "Visqueen" or approved, 6-mil thickness, with Vapor Transmission Rating of 0.10 perms.

2.4 MECHANICAL FASTENERS A. Type recommended by Insulation Manufacturer. B. Long enough to penetrate substrate ½ inch, minimum

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Work of preceding Trades is completed. B. Verify that surfaces and spaces to receive Insulation are accurately sized, located, dry, protected

against inclement weather, clean, and otherwise properly prepared. C. Prior to starting Work notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction. D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.

3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Remove, or protect against projections which may damage Insulation or prevent proper

installation.

3.3 NOTICES A. Notify Owner’s Authorized Representative at least 24 hours prior to completing Insulation Work

for inspection.

3.4 INSTALLATION A. General

1. Follow Manufacturer's directions. 2. Fit Insulation snugly between Framing without forcing. 3. Permit no gaps for air passage. 4. Carefully cut and fit Insulation around Pipes, Conduits, and other obstructions. 5. Where Pipes, Conduit, and other obstructions are located in space to receive Insulation,

place Insulation between cold-in-winter surface and obstruction, compressing Insulation where necessary. Except where indicated above, do not compress Insulation more than 10%.

3.5 FLEXIBLE MINERAL WOOL TYPE INSULATION A. Install Insulation with Vapor Barrier facing warm-in-winter side of Assembly. B. Use full-length, single-piece Batts where practicable. C. Staple Facing Flanges to Wood Framing, 8 inches o.c. maximum. Provide additional Wire

support as necessary to prevent Insulation displacement or sagging.

3.6 RIGID INSULATION AT WALL HEADERS A. Install with Adhesive recommended by Insulation Manufacturer.



3.7 POLYETHYLENE SHEET VAPOR BARRIER A. Install continuous without gaps at warm side of all above-grade insulation. Lap sheets and

vertical/horizontal transitions a minimum of 3 inches over a continuous Sealant Bead, and staple edges to top plates, overlapping wall insulation by 3 inches.

3.8 PRODUCT CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Sections, clean, repair, and touch-up, or replace when directed,

products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. Remove debris from Project Site upon Work completion or sooner, if directed.






WEATHER BARRIERS 07 26 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 07 26 00 - WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vapor Retarders: Materials to make exterior walls, joints between exterior walls and roof,

and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls water vapor-resistant and air tight.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Water-resistive barrier under exterior cladding. B. Section 07 21 00 - Board and Batt Insulation: Vapor retarder installed in conjunction

with batt insulation. C. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal flashings installed in

conjunction with weather barriers. D. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealers: Sealant materials and installation techniques. E. Section 09 21 00 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Water-resistive barrier under exterior

cladding.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Vapor Retarder: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively water vapor

impermeable, to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. 1. Water Vapor Permeance: For purposes of conversion, 57.2 ng/(Pa s sq m) = 1 perm.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D4397 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction,

Industrial, and Agricultural Applications.

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before,

during and after installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 APPLICATIONS A. Inside Surface of Exterior Stud Walls: Sheet seal applied to stud faces.

2.2 VAPOR RETARDER MATERIALS (AIR BARRIER AND WATER-RESISTIVE) A. Sheet Seal: ASTM D 4397 polyethylene film, clear.

1. Thickness: 6 mil. 2. Water Vapor Permeance: As required by referenced standard for thickness specified. 3. FS25 FRK, 50" wide roll at all exposed locations.

B. Vapor Retarder Tape: Polyethylene self adhering type, 2 inches wide, compatible with sheet material.

2.3 SEALANTS A. Polyurethane Sealant: as specified in Section 07 92 00.


WEATHER BARRIERS 07 26 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

B. Sealant Backers: As specified in Section 07 92 00. C. Primers, Cleaners, and Other Sealant Materials: As recommended by sealant manufacturer,

appropriate to application, and compatible with adjacent materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere

with proper installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Vapor Retarders: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed

seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. C. Mechanically Fastened Sheets - Vapor Retarder On Interior:

1. When insulation is to be installed in assembly, install vapor retarder over insulation. 2. Seal seams, laps, perimeter edges, penetrations, tears, and cuts with self-adhesive tape,

making air tight seal. 3. Locate laps at a framing member; at laps fasten one sheet to framing member then

tape overlapping sheet to first sheet. 4. Seal entire perimeter to structure, window and door frames, and other penetrations. 5. Where conduit, pipes, wires, ducts, outlet boxes, and other items are installed in

insulation cavity, pass vapor retarder sheet behind item but over insulation and maintain air tight seal.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed.

3.5 PROTECTION A. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer.

3.6 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. At window and door openings install sheet seal between frame and adjacent wall seal

material and attach with adhesive. Seal laps with sealant. Position lap seal over firm bearing.



METAL ROOF PANELS 07 41 13 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 07 41 13 – METAL ROOF PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide metal roofing system of preformed steel standing seam pan-

els including fastening system, factory finish, and any related miscellaneous components.

1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, product data and samples for the following:

1. Product Data: a. Summary of test results, indicating compliance with specified requirements. b. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. c. Installation methods. d. Specimen warranty

2. Shop Drawings a. Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions, spacing and

type of connections, flashings, underlayments, and special conditions. b. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled.

3. Selection Samples: For each roofing system specified, submit color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

4. Test Reports: Indicate compliance of preformed metal roofing system to specified requirements

1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2006a. B. ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and

Waterproofing; 2006. C. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2007. D. ASTM E 1646 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel

Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1995 (Reapproved 2003). E. ASTM E 1680 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof

Panel Systems; 1995 (Reapproved 2003). F. UL 580 - Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies; 2006

1.4 QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of roofing systems sim-

ilar to those required for this project, with not less than 5 years of experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company trained and authorized by roofing system manufacturer

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide strippable plastic protection on prefinished roofing panels for removal after installa-

tion. B. Store roofing panels on project site as recommended by manufacturer to minimize damage to

panels prior to installation.



1.6 WARRANTY A. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s special warranty covering failure of factory-applied

exterior finish on metal roof panels and agreeing to repair or replace panels that show evidence of finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or peeling within speci-fied warranty period of 20 year period from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Waterproofing Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s warranty for weather tightness of roofing sys-tem, including agreement to repair or replace roofing that fails to keep out water within speci-fied warranty period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL ROOF PANELS A. Performance Requirements: Provide complete system complying with specified requirements

and capable of remaining weather tight while withstanding anticipated movement of substrate and thermally induced movement of roofing system

B. Metal Roofing: Roofing shall be factory formed standing seam design; concealed fastener sys-tem with 1” minimum ribs. 1 inch vertical standing seam “Snap- Lock” (or approved equal). Vertical ribs to be 12” or 16” O.C. Panels are to be full length, ridge to eave. 1. Steel Panels:

a. Hot dipped galvanized steel conforming to ASTM -653, Grade C with G-90 zinc coat-ing, with minimum yield strength of 40,000 PSI and 24 asg.

b. Steel Thickness: Minimum 24 gauge c. Protective coating to be G-90 galvanization.

2. Panel Fasteners: When applied directly to sheathing, 1 inch hi-tensile, double threaded, sealed drywall screws will be used for the roofing panel attachment through the screwing clima-flange. Other applications - follow manufacturer’s directions.

3. Roof Flashings: Shall be flashed using Manufacturers recommended materials. Metal flashings will be of same finish, 26 gaige and matching color, unless otherwise noted

4. Flashing fasteners: self-drilling screws of sufficient length to properly secure flashings.

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type I, 30-pound asphalt-saturated organic felts, nonperforated. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Granular Surfaced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40-mil-

thick sheet; glass-fiber-mat-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt; mineral-granule surfaced; with release paper backing; cold applied 1. Products

a. Tamko Roofing Products; Moisture Guard Plus b. Grace Ice & Water Shield c. Or Approved

2.3 ATTACHMENT SYSTEM A. Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel concealed anchor clips de-

signed for specific roofing system and engineered to meet performance requirements, including anticipated thermal movement. Provide Class UL-90 Roof System

REVISED: 04-10-2019 Alternate rib spacing added



2.4 PANEL FINISH A. Exterior Finish: “Premium PVDF” Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVF2); 0.8 mil “Premium PVFD”

applied over 0.2 mil baked on polyester primer for a minimum total of 1.0 full mil. Color to be selected by Owner from manufacturer’s selection of colors.

B. Interior Finish: (underside) Shall consist of a 0.15 – mil polyester primer and a 0.35 mil of off white backer.

2.5 ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, trim, moldings, closure strips, preformed

crickets, caps, equipment curbs, and similar sheet metal items of the same material, thickness, and finish as used for the roofing panels. Items completely concealed after installation may op-tionally be made of stainless steel.

B. Sealants: caulking gun dispensed “Flexible Seal” by Epmar Corp., Santa Fe Springs, California, (or approved equal) in double ¾” continuous beads spaced 2” apart at top and bottom of all roof panels per details. No preformed closures or tapes will be allowed on this project.

2.6 FABRICATION A. Panels: Fabricate and finish panels and accessory items at factory, using manufacturer’s stand-

ard processes as required to achieve specified appearance and performance requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Bidder to inspect project site to confirm that that no problems are visible. Before installation

contractor shall verify that the surface is in such a condition as to allow an installation of the quality that is acceptable to the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Owner’s Authorized Representative of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Broom clean decking prior to installation of roofing system. B. Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations, and

other adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks. C. Remove protective film from surface of roof panels immediately prior to installation. Strip film

carefully, to avoid damage to prefinished surfaces. D. Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering rubberized Asphalt

sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Overall: Install roofing system in accordance with panel manufacturer's instructions and rec-

ommendations, as applicable to specific project conditions. Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing for thermal and structural movement. 1. Install roofing system with concealed clips and fasteners. 2. Minimize field cutting of panels. Where field cutting is absolutely required, use methods

recommended by manufacturer that will not distort panel profiles. Use of torches for field cutting is absolutely prohibited

B. Accessories: Install all components required for a complete roofing assembly, including flash-ings, trim, moldings, preformed crickets, caps, equipment curbs, rib closures, ridge closures, and similar roof accessory items.



C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install 36 inch wide strip of self-adhering sheet underlay-ment, wrinkle free, at perimeter of roof deck along the entire length of eaves and rakes. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. 1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and block-

ing or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely an-

chored; and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through asphalt shingles.

3. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected E. Roof Panels: Install panels in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, minimizing

transverse joints except at junction with penetrations 1. Form weather tight standing seams incorporating concealed clips, using an automatic me-

chanical seaming device approved by the panel manufacturer. 2. Incorporate concealed clips at panel joints, and apply snap-on battens to provide weather

tight joints. 3. Provide joint sealer at lapped panel joints. 4. Install sealant, as recommended by panel manufacturer, at end laps and side joints

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films, ex-

cess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean and un-marked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish.

B. Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels. Provide temporary walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to completed work. Protect roofing until completion of project.

C. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged roof panels or accessories before date of Substantial Completion at no additional cost to the Owner.



SHEETMETAL FLASHING & TRIM 07 62 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 07 62 00 – SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL


1. General sheetmetal and flashing. 2. Gutters and downspouts.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Wood Blocking and Nailers, Section 06100. B. Building Caulking and Sealing, Section 07951.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show joints, types and locations of fasteners and special shapes.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. B. Store off ground.

1.5 WARRANTY A. Warrant Work weather tight for 2 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEETMETAL A. Galvanized Steel

1. ASTM A-446; coating designation C-90; lock-forming quality conforming to ASTM A-527.

2. Exposed surfaces factory-coated with two-coat, thermocured fluoropolymer finish per AAMA 2604. Provide at all sheetmetal work.

2.2 NAILS A. Flat head, wire, barbed, slating type, conforming to Fed. Spec. FF-N-105B, Type II, Style 23. B. Galvanized Steel, 1 inch long, 12 gauge, minimum.

2.3 SCREWS A. Pan head, self-tapping, sheetmetal type, conforming to Fed. Spec. FF-S-107; #7 by one inch long

minimum, Cadmium plated.

2.4 RIVETS A. 1/8-inch minimum diameter, length as recommended by Rivet Manufacturer for materials to be

joined; Cadmium plated.

2.5 EXPANSION ANCHORS A. Type recommended by Manufacturer by conditions of use.

2.6 SOLDER A. ASTM B-32; 50% Tin and 50% Lead.



2.7 FLUX A. Rosin, cut muriatic acid, or commercial preparation for material to be soldered.

2.8 SEALANT A. Silicone type; Dow, GE, or approved.

2.9 ASPHALT PLASTIC CEMENT A. Fed. Spec. SS-C-153, Type 1.

2.10 OPEN VALLEY FLASHING UNDERLAYMENT A. Asphalt-saturated, unperforated Roofing Felt; ASTM D-226, 30 lb. type.

2.11 DOWNSPOUT BRACKETS A. Galvanized 16 gauge. B. Elcen Brackets.

2.12 FABRICATION A. General

1. Form to shapes and dimensions shown with planes and lines in true alignment. 2. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings or specified, fabricate with longest practicable

lengths. 3. Hem exposed edges. 4. Angle bottom edges of vertical surfaces to form drip.

B. Cleats 5. Same Material and thickness as Sheetmetal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that surfaces to receive Sheetmetal are smooth, clean, and otherwise properly prepared. B. Verify that Nailers to receive Sheetmetal are properly placed. C. Prior to starting work, notify General Contractor of defects that require correction. D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.

3.2 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Before fabricating Sheetmetal, verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions, modify Work as required for

accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Owner’s Authorized Representative prior to fabrication.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install work weather tight, without waves, warps, buckles, tool marks, fastening stresses,

distortion or defects which impair strength or mar appearance. B. Install planes and lines to true alignment. C. Allow for Sheetmetal expansion and contraction.

3.4 SEAM INSTALLATION A. Flat Lock Seams

1. 5/8-inch finish width; 4-ply flat-locked, malleted tight; sweat full with Solder. B. Single Corner Seams

2. 3/4-inch finish width; 3-ply loose locked.



C. Double Corner Seams 3. 5/8-inch finish width; 4-ply loose locked.

D. Lap Seams 4. 3-inch finish width.

E. Cover Plate Seams 5. Space abutting Sheets ½ inch; cover joint with 4-inch wide Cover and Match Plates to

Flashing profile. 6. Secure Plates to Substrate with screw installed through open space between Flashing

Sheets. F. S-Lock Seams

7. Form 1-1/4-inch wide "S" shaped Seam on one edge of Flashing Sheet for concealed fastening.

3.5 CLEAT INSTALLATION A. Space 2 feet on center, unless continuous Cleats or other spacings are specified hereunder. B. Secure spaced Cleats to Substrate with 2 Fasteners C. Secure continuous Cleats to Substrate with Fasteners spaced at 12-inch maximum centers. D. Cover fastener Heads with Cleat Tabs.

3.6 SEALANT INSTALLATION A. Apply 1/4-inch diameter bead, centered in full length of joint.

3.7 ASPHALT PLASTIC CEMENT INSTALLATION A. Trowel apply 1/8-inch thick.

3.8 COUNTER FLASHING A. Form of 24-gauge minimum galvanized steel. B. Overlap Base Flashing 4 inches minimum. C. Install bottom edge spring-tight against base Flashing, or at Contractor's option secure bottom

edge with 1-inch wide Clips spaced no greater than 24 inches o.c. Attach Clips to Substrate with concealed Fasteners. Reinforce Clips by double-bending back over bottom edge of Counter Flashing 3/4 inch.

D. Lap-Seam vertical joints, and apply Sealant. E. Provide where roof intersects vertical surfaces, and elsewhere shown on Drawings.

3.9 ROOF PENETRATION FLASHING A. General

1. Form of 26 gauge minimum galvanized steel. 2. Extend Flange onto Roof 6 inches minimum in all directions away from Penetration, and

upward around Penetration to position at least 2 inches above Roof flood line. 3. Solder-Lap joints. 4. Furnish to Roofer for installation.

B. Counter Flashing 5. Overlap Base Flashing at least 1 inch wide with storm collar sloped away from

Penetration. 6. Secure to Penetration with Draw Band and Sealant.

C. Miter and extend around corner 3 inches minimum and solder joints. D. Install bottom edge spring-tight against roofing.



3.10 RAKE FLASHING A. Form of 26 gauge minimum Galvanized Steel. B. Extend horizontal flange 3 inches under roofing and nail to substrate. C. Extend vertical flange as shown on Drawings. D. Lap-seam joints in direction of water flow.

3.11 HUNG GUTTERS A. Form to detail of 20 gauge minimum Aluminum, with "ogee" profile, 5 inch width x 3-3/4 inch

height. B. Lap joints 1-inch minimum and solder. C. Locate outer edge ½-inch lower than back edge. D. Stiffen outer edge with hemmed return. E. Counter flash back edge. F. Secure end caps with 1 inch minimum with Flanges riveted and soldered to gutter. G. Secure Gutter to Rafters with Gutter Screws and Ferrules spaced 4 ft. o.c. maximum. H. Provide Expansion Joints midway between Downspouts; overlap Gutter sections 2-1/2 inches

and provide end caps spaced ½ inch apart. I. Cover Expansion Joint tops with loose-lock cover; extend Cover over outer edge of Gutter and

embed in Sealant. J. Size thimble 1/8 inch less than Downspout and extend 2 inches below Gutter bottom. K. Rivet and solder thimble flanges to Gutter bottom.

3.12 DOWNSPOUT STRAINERS A. Removable wire basket type, 0.054 inch minimum wire size, same material as Downspout. B. Provide one in each Downspout Inlet, fit tight.

3.13 DOWNSPOUTS A. Form of uncorrugated 26 gauge minimum Aluminum. 3-inch x 3-inch size. B. Fabricate longitudinal joints with double corner seams. C. Telescope upper into lower sections 1-1/2 inches minimum, rivet and solder. D. Attach to wall with 1-1/4 inch wide straps matching downspout material, and 2 gauge heaver. E. Locate straps at downspout tops, bottoms, horizontal joints, and 10 ft. maximum centers. F. Except where otherwise shown on Drawings, install downspouts plumb; modify straps if

necessary. G. Extend downspouts 3 inches minimum onto splash blocks.

3.14 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING A. Provide Flashing around Doors, Louvers, and other openings in exterior Walls where indicated

or required to maintain Building watertight.

3.15 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. As Work progresses, neutralize excess Flux with 5% to 10% Washing Soda Solution and

thoroughly rinse. B. Including Work of other Sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products

which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this Section. C. Remove debris from Project Site upon Work completion or sooner, if directed.



FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL


1. Through Penetration Firestopping. 2. Fire Resistive Joint Systems.

B. Related Sections 1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Division 3 – Concrete. 3. Division 4 – Masonry. 4. Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection. 5. Division 9 – Finishes. 6. Division 22 – Plumbing. 7. Division 23 – Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning. 8. Division 26 – Electrical.

1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI/UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. ANSI/UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. ANSI/UL 1479 - Standard for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. ANSI/UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials. 2. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and

Materials. 3. ASTM E 814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. ASTM E 1399 - Standard Test Method for Cyclic Movement and Measuring the

Minimum and Maximum Joint Widths of Architectural Joint Systems. 5. ASTM E 1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems. 6. ASTM E 2174 - Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Firestops. 7. ASTM E 2307 - Fire Tests of Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using Intermediate

Scale, Multi-Story Test Apparatus. 8. ASTM E 2393 - Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive

Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers. C. Factory Mutual (FM) - FM4991 - Standard for Approval of Firestop Contractors. D. International Code Congress (ICC):

1. International Building Code (IBC). 2. International Mechanical Code (IMC) 3. International Fire Code (IFC) 4. International Code Congress Evaluation Service (ICC ES)

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. 3. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial

Cooking Operations. 4. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 5. NFPA 5000 - Building Construction and Safety Code.



F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - UL Building Materials Directory: 1. Through-Penetration Firestops Systems (XHEZ). 2. Joint Systems (XHBN). 3. Firestop Devices (XHJI). 4. Forming Materials (XHKU). 5. Wall Opening Protective Materials (CLIV). 6. Fill, Void or Cavity Materials (XHHW).

G.; American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE): 1. ASSE Series 9000 – Professional Qualification Standard for Firestop Systems and

Device Installers, Inspectors and Surveyors. H. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO):

1. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC). 2. Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC).

I. International Standards Organization (ISO): 1. ISO 6944 2. ISO 10295-1: 2007. 3. ISO 10295-2: 2009. 4. ISO 10295-3:

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide systems that are listed by at least one the following:

1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), in "Fire Resistance Directory". 2. Intertek Testing Service (Formerly known as Omega Point Laboratories), in

"Directory of Listed Products". 3. Factory Mutual (FM), in FMRC Approval Guide. 4. Any other qualified independent testing and inspection agency that conducts periodic

follow-up inspections and is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Provide firestop products that are flexible enough to allow for pipe vibration in a through

penetration application. C. Provide fire resistive sealants and sprays for construction joint applications that are flexible

enough to satisfy the movement criteria per the test standards ASTM E 1399, ASTM E 1966 or ANSI/UL 2079.

D. Provide products with the appropriate flame spread index and smoke develop index, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

E. Provide products that meet the intent of the L rating classification for the movement of smoke per ANSI/UL 1479 for through penetrations and ANSI/UL 2079 for construction joints.

F. Provide products identical to those tested and listed for classification by UL, Intertek or any other qualified independent testing agency.

G. Provide products that bear classification marking of qualified independent testing agency. H. Where firestop systems not listed by any listing agency are required due to project

conditions, submit a substitution proposal with evidence specified. I. Use only products specifically listed for use in listed systems. J. Provide products that are compatible with each other, with the substrates forming openings,

and with the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping, under the conditions represented by this project, based on testing and field performance demonstrated by manufacturer.

K. Firestopping materials must meet and be acceptable for use by all building codes and NFPA codes cited in this section.

L. Provide products that meet the intent of the state or local guidelines on volatile organic compounds (VOC).

M. Where applicable provide products that meet the intent of the F rating classification for passage of flame per ANSI/UL 1479 for through penetrations.



N. Where applicable provide products that meet the intent of the T rating classification for the transfer of temperature per ANSI/UL 1479 for through penetrations.

O. Provide products that meet the intent of the L rating classification for the movement of smoke per ANSI/UL 1479 for through penetrations and ANSI/UL 2079 for construction joints.

P. Where applicable provide products that meet the intent of the W rating classification for passage of water per ANSI/UL 1479 for through penetrations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of the Contract and Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings: For each firestopping system, provide the following:

1. Listing agency's detailed drawing showing opening, penetrating item(s), and firestopping materials, identified with listing agency's name and number or designation and fire rating achieved.

2. For proposed systems that do not conform strictly to the listing, submit written instructions showing modifications and approved by firestop system manufacturer.

3. Submit under provisions of the International Building Code (IBC) section 107 and 703 requiring a submittal package for fire-resistance ratings and fire tests.

C. Product Certificates: Submit certificates of conformance signed by firestop system manufacturer certifying that materials furnished comply with requirements.

D. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's product data sheets on each material to be used in firestop systems. Information on manufacturer's product data sheet should include: 1. Product characteristics including compliance with appropriate ASTM/UL/ANSI test

standards. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

E. Installation Instruction: Furnish manufacturer's installation instructions. F. Sustainable or LEED Submittals:

1. VOC Content: For sealants and sealant primers, furnish documentation of VOC content.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: All through-penetration firestop systems and construction gap fire resistive

systems shall be installed with approved methods using materials that have been tested and classified to produce an approved assembly.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty five (25) years experience. 1. Products shall be manufactured in a facility that follows ISO 9001 best practices.

C. Installer Qualifications: Firm must be qualified by having experience, staff, and be properly trained to install the specified products, and meets the following criteria: 1. Contractor is acceptable to manufacturer. 2. Contractor is acceptable to Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 3. Contractor has completed the manufacturer's certified product installation training. 4. Contractor must provide a list of completed projects as evidence of experience;

include project name and address, owner's name and address, and architect's name and phone number.

5. Certificate: Contractor should provide certificate of qualification. D. Codes: Where manufacturer's application procedures are in conflict with those of the local

Authority Having Jurisdiction, the more strict guidelines will prevail. E. Pre-installation Meetings: Meetings to agree on firestop requirements, conditions,

manufacturer's instructions.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING



A. Deliver and store products until ready for installation in manufacturer's original unopened packaging, legibly marked with manufacturer's name and product identification, date of manufacture, lot number, listing agency's classification marking, curing/dry time, mixing instructions (if applicable) and MSDS reference number.

B. Store and handle in such a manner as to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, and other causes; follow manufacturer's instructions.

C. Store and dispose of hazardous materials, and materials contaminated by hazardous materials, in accordance with requirements of local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate construction and cutting of openings so that each particular firestop system may

be installed in accordance with its listing, including assembly rating, L rating, sizing, sleeves, manufacturer’s published STC rating and penetrating items.

B. Coordinate firestopping of dynamic and static construction joints (top-of-wall, bottom-of-wall, floor-to-floor, floor-to-wall), wall-to-wall, perimeter so that each particular system may be installed in accordance with its listing, including assembly rating, sizing, movement capabilities and manufacturer’s published STC rating.

C. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install firestopping under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

D. Provide ventilation as required by firestopping manufacturer, including mechanical ventilation if required.

1.8 WARRANTY A. At project closeout, provide to Owner’s Authorized Representative an executed copy of the

manufacturer's standard limited warranty against manufacturing defect, outlining its terms, conditions, and exclusions from coverage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 3M Fire Protection Products, which is located at: 3M Center

Bldg. 223-2N-21 ; St. Paul, MN 55144-1000; Toll Free Tel: 800-328-1687; Email: request info ([email protected]); Web: www.3m.com/firestop

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Division 1- General Requirements.

C. Single Source: To maintain control and integrity of the firestop applications a single manufacturer should be used. Specific UL or approved listing agencies systems applicable to each type of firestop condition should be supplied by one manufacturer.

2.2 SCOPE/APPLICATION A. Provide installed firestop products that limit the spread of fire, heat, smoke, and gasses

through otherwise unprotected openings in rated assemblies, including walls, partitions, floors, roof/ceilings, and similar locations, restoring the integrity of the fire rated construction to its original fire rating.

B. Provide firestop systems listed for the specific combination of fire-rated construction, type of penetrating item, annular space requirements, and fire rating, and the following criteria: 1. F-Rating: Equal to or greater than the fire-resistance rating of the assembly in which

the firestopping will be installed. 2. T-Rating: In habitable areas where penetrating items are exposed to potential contact

with materials on fire side(s) of rated assembly, T-rating must equal its F-rating. 3. L-Rating: L-rating of 1 cfm per linear foot (5.5 cu m/h/m) maximum at ambient


mailto:request%20info%20([email protected])

mailto:request%20info%20([email protected])

http://www.3m.com/firestop


temperatures. 4. W-Rating: meets UL Water Leakage Test, W Rating – Class 1 requirements for

systems tested and listed in accordance with ANSI/UL 1479. 5. Wall Penetrations: Through penetration systems must be symmetrical, with the same

rating from both sides of the wall. Membrane penetrations may be asymmetrical. 6. Testing: Determine ratings in accordance with ASTM E 814 or UL 1479.

C. Provide fire-resistive systems listed for construction gaps per the specific combination of fire-rated construction type, configuration, gap dimensions, and fire rating, and the following criteria: 1. Fire resistance rating must be equal to or greater than that of the assembly in which it

is to be installed. 2. Movement capability must be appropriate to the potential movement of the gap,

demonstrated by testing in accordance with ASTM E 1399/ASTM E 1966/UL 2079 for minimum of 500 cycles at 10 cycles per minute.

3. L-Rating: L-rating of 1 cfm per linear foot (5.5 cu m/h/m) maximum. 4. Determine ratings in accordance with ASTM E 1966/UL 2079.

2.3 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP PRODUCTS A. 3M Fire Barrier Cast-in-Place Devices: Firestopping device for use prior to a concrete pour.

Adjustable height with pull tabs, straight edge design for close placement to walls and adjacent devices. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, or 3 hour fire-rated systems. 2. Locations: Horizontal assemblies only.

B. 3M Fire Barrier Ultra RC Pack: One piece metal collar assembly encasing intumescent material for firestopping of pipes and cables through rated walls and floors. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1 or 2 hour fire-rated systems. 2. Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.

C. 3M Fire Barrier Ultra Plastic Pipe Device: Intumescent device for firestopping of plastic pipe and cables through rated walls and floors. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire-rated systems. 2. Configuration: One-piece metal collar, with locking latch and bendable tabs to secure;

equipped also for conventional anchoring. 3. Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.

D. 3M Fire Barrier RC-1 Restricting Collar with either FS 195+ Wrap Strip or 3M Interam Ultra GS Wrap Strip . (See product descriptions below): For firestopping of plastic pipes from 4 inches (102 mm) to 10 inches (254mm) in diameter. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1or 2 hour fire-rated systems. 2. Material: 28 gauge steel. 3. Size: 25 foot (7.6 m) roll. 4. Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.

E. 3M Fire Barrier CP25WB+ Sealant: High-performance, intumescent, water-based sealant. No-sag, fast drying, paintable, red in color. Versatile firestop sealant for pipes (not for use with CPVC), cables, cable tray, blank opening and other penetrations along with mineral wool or other fire-rated assembly products. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire-rated systems. 2. Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier. 3. STC rating of 54 when tested in STC 54-rated wall assembly.

F. 3M Fire Barrier IC 15WB+ Sealant: General-purpose, intumescent, water-based sealant. No-sag, fast drying, paintable, yellow in color. Economical firestop sealant for pipes, cables, cable tray, blank opening and other penetrations along with mineral wool or other fire-rated assembly products. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire-rated systems.



2. Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier. 3. STC rating of 54 when tested in STC 54-rated wall assembly.

G. 3M Fire Barrier Sealant FD 150+: Single-part, water-based, acrylic latex sealant. No-sag, low-shrinkage, low VOC. Blue, red or limestone color. Used to firestop for pipe penetrations (not for use with CPVC). 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire-rated systems. 2. Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier. 3. STC rating of 54 when tested in STC 54-rated wall assembly.

H. 3M Fire Barrier Water Tight Sealant 3000 WT: Single-part, water-tight, intumescent silicone firestop sealant for filling voids in concrete gypsum, metal, plastic, wood and insulation. Light gray color with black flecks. Meets UL Water Leakage Test, W Rating – Class 1 requirements. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire-rated systems. 2. Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier. 3. STC rating of 53 when tested in STC 54-rated wall assembly.

I. 3M Fire Barrier Water Tight 1000 NS Sealant: Single-part, non-slump firestopping silicone sealant for floor and wall openings. Light gray color. Meets UL Water Leakage Test, W Rating – Class 1 requirements. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire-rated systems.. 2. Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier. 3. STC rating of 56 when tested in STC 56-rated wall assembly.

J. 3M Fire Barrier Water Tight Sealant 1003 SL: Single-part, self-leveling firestopping silicone sealant for floor openings. Light gray color. Meets UL Water Leakage Test, W Rating – Class 1 requirements. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire-rated systems.. 2. Locations: For horizontal assemblies only. 3. STC rating of 56 when tested in STC 56-rated wall assembly.

K. 3M Fire Barrier Sealant 2000 NS: Single-part, non-slump elastomeric silicone firestop sealant. Sag-resistant, low VOC. Light grey color. Used in mechanical, electrical and plumbing applications to firestop openings and penetrations through fire-rated floor or wall assemblies. Typical penetrants include: metallic pipe, non-metallic pipe (FGG/BM system CPVC compatible), conduit, power and communication cable and telephone or electrical wiring. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire-rated systems. 2. Locations: Vertical and horizontal assemblies. 3. STC-Rating of 56 when tested in STC 56-rated wall assembly.

L. 3M Fire Barrier Sealant 2000+: Single-part, elastomeric silicone firestop sealant. Sag-resistant, low VOC. Light grey color. Used in mechanical, electrical and plumbing applications to firestop openings and penetrations through fire-rated floor or wall assemblies. Typical penetrants include: metallic pipe, non-metallic pipe (FGG/BM system CPVC compatible), conduit, power and communication cable and telephone or electrical wiring. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire-rated systems. 2. Locations: Vertical and horizontal assemblies. 3. STC-Rating of 56 when tested in STC 56-rated wall assembly.

M. 3M Fire Barrier Moldable Putty+: One-part, 100 percent solids intumescent firestop. Remains pliable, flexible and easily re-enterable. Non-toxic synthetic formula. Versatile putty for pipes, cables, cable tray, blank opening and other penetrations along with mineral wool or other fire-rated assembly products. 1. Type: Stick or Pad 2. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire-rated systems. 3. Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.



N. 3M Fire Barrier 2001 Silicone RTV Foam: Two-part, liquid-silicone elastomer, foams in place when mixed. For use sealing large or complex openings such as cable bundles, cable trays and conduit banks. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire-rated systems. 2. Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.

O. 3M Fire Barrier Mortar: For sealing openings in concrete and masonry walls and floors. Self Leveling, non-sag, low VOC. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire-rated systems. 2. Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.

P. 3M Fire Barrier Self-Locking Pillow: Self-contained, intumescent firestop pillow with interlocking strips. Meets fire rating without the use of wire mesh. For use in firestopping larger openings 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire-rated systems. 2. Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.

Q. 3M Fire Barrier Pillow: Self-contained, intumescent firestop product. Meets fire rating without the use of wire mesh. For use in firestopping larger openings 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire-rated systems.. 2. Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.

R. 3M Fire Barrier CS-195+ Composite Sheet: Organic/inorganic intumescent elastomeric sheet, bonded on one side to a layer of 28 gauge galvanized steel. Other side reinforced with steel-wire mesh and covered with aluminum foil. Re-enterable. For use in firestopping larger openings 1. Thickness: Nominal 0.3 inch (7.6 mm). 2. Thermal Expansion: 8 - 10 times original size. 3. Tensile Strength (ASTM D412): 93.6 psi (645 kPa)/489 percent. 4. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire-rated systems.. 5. Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.

S. 3M Interam Ultra GS Wrap Strip: Graphite based, flexible, largely inorganic, intumescent mat. For use around non-metallic piping with or with RC-1 collar. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire rated systems.. 2. Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.

T. 3M Fire Barrier FS-195+ Wrap/Strip: One-part, organic/inorganic intumescent strip with foil on one side. May be cut to fit irregular shapes. For use around non-metallic piping with or with RC-1 collar. 1. Length: 24 inch (610 mm). 2. Width: 1 or 2 inches. 3. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire-rated systems. 4. Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.

U. 3M Fire Barrier Pass-Through Devices: One-Piece device for firestopping of cable penetrations through rated walls and floors. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire-rated systems. 2. Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.

V. 3M Fire Barrier Tuck-In: Graphite-based, flexible, intumescent wrap strip for use around non-metallic piping. Adhesive closure tab. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire-rated systems. 2. Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.

W. 3M Fire Barrier Putty Sleeve Kit: Device used for firestopping of cable penetrations through fire rated walls and floors. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 3 or 4 hour fire-rated systems. 2. Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.

2.4 FIRE RESISTIVE JOINT PRODUCTS



A. 3M Fire Barrier Sealant FD 150+: Single-part, water-based sealant. Sag-resistant, low-shrinkage, low VOC. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire-rated systems. 2. Location: For use at top-of-wall, bottom-of-wall, wall-to-wall and floor-to-floor. 3. Compression/Extension Recovery: +/- 19 percent of original joint width. 4. Meets optional L rating requirements. 5. STC rating of 56 when tested in STC 56-rated wall assembly.

B. 3M Fire Barrier Water Tight Sealant 1000 NS: Single-part, non-slump elastomeric silicone sealant. Sag-resistant, low VOC. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire rated systems. 2. Meets UL Water Leakage Test, W Rating – Class 1 requirements. 3. Location: For use at top-of-wall, bottom-of-wall, wall-to-wall, floor-to-floor, floor-to-

wall and perimeter joints. 4. Compression/Extension Recovery: +/- 15 percent of original joint width. 5. STC-Rating of 56 when tested in STC-56-rated wall assembly.

C. 3M Fire Barrier Water Tight Sealant 1003 SL: Single-part, self-leveling elastomeric silicone sealant. Sag-resistant, low VOC. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire rated systems. 2. Meets UL Water Leakage Test, W Rating – Class 1 requirements. 3. Location: For use at top-of-wall, bottom-of-wall, floor-to-wall and floor-to-floor

joints. 4. Compression/Extension Recovery: +/- 15 percent of original joint width. 5. STC-Rating of 56 when tested in STC-56-rated wall assembly.

D. 3M Fire Barrier Sealant 2000 NS: Single-part, non-slump elastomeric silicone sealant. Sag-resistant, low VOC. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire rated systems. 2. Service Flexibility: Accommodate vibration from normal building movement. 3. Location: For use at top-of-wall, bottom-of-wall, wall-to-wall, floor-to-wall, floor-to-

floor and perimeter joints. 4. Compression/Extension Recovery: +/- 31 percent of original joint width. 5. STC-Rating of 56 when tested in STC 56-rated wall assembly.

E. 3M Fire Barrier Sealant 2000+: Silicone Sealant: Single-part, elastomeric silicone sealant. Sag-resistant, low VOC. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire rated systems. 2. Compression/Extension Recovery: +/- 13 percent of original joint width. 3. Location: For use at top-of-wall, bottom-of-wall, wall-to-wall, floor-to-wall and

floor-to-floor joints. F. 3M FireDam Spray 200: Water-based, paintable, low VOC, freeze/thaw resistant spray

applied fire resistive product. Applied with conventional airless spray equipment. 1. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire rated systems. 2. Compression/Extension Recovery: +/- 50 percent of joint width. 3. Location: For use at head-of-wall, wall-to-wall, floor-to-floor, bottom-of-wall, floor-

to-wall and perimeter joints. 4. STC-Rating of 56 when tested in STC 56-rated wall assembly.

2.5 FIRESTOPPING FOR SINGLE MEMBRANE PENETRATIONS A. 3M Fire Barrier Moldable Putty+: One-part, 100 percent solids intumescent firestop.

Remains pliable, flexible and easily re-enterable. Non-toxic synthetic formula. 1. Type: Pad. 2. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire rated systems.

B. 3M Endothermic Mat E-5A-4: Endothermic heat absorbing mat. 1. Type: Mat.



2. Fire Resistance: For use in 1 or 2 hour fire rated systems.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Conduct tests according to manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates

are free of oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers, loose mill scale, dirt and other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of firestopping.

C. Verify that items penetrating fire rated assemblies are securely attached, including sleeves, supports, hangers, and clips.

D. Verify that openings and adjacent areas are not obstructed by construction that would interfere with installation of firestopping, including ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction.

E. Verify that environmental conditions are safe and suitable for installation of firestopping. F. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Owner’s Authorized

Representative of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Install masking and temporary coverings as required to prevent contamination or defacement

of adjacent surfaces due to firestopping installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's detailed installation instructions and

procedures. B. Install so that openings are completely filled and material is securely adhered. C. Where firestopping surface will be exposed to view, finish to a smooth, uniform surface

flush with adjacent surfaces. D. After installation is complete, remove combustible forming materials and accessories that

are not part of the listed system. E. Repair or replace defective installations in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations, listed systems details and applicable code requirements. F. At each through penetration or fire-resistive joint system, attach identification labels on both

sides in location where label will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping.

G. Clean firestop materials off surfaces adjacent to openings as work progresses, using methods and cleaning materials approved in writing by firestop system manufacturer and which will not damage the surfaces being cleaned.

H. Notify Authority Having Jurisdiction when firestopping installation is ready for inspection; obtain advance approval of anticipated inspection dates and phasing, if any, required to allow subsequent construction to proceed.

I. Do not cover firestopping with other construction until approval of authority having jurisdiction has been received.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency to inspect installed firestopping and to prepare reports

indicating whether the installed work complies with the contract documents. B. Notify testing agency at least 7 days prior to date when firestopping installation will be ready

for inspection; obtain advance approval of general schedule and phasing, if any, required to allow subsequent construction to proceed.



3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove left over material and debris from Work area. Use necessary means to protect fire

protection product(s) before, during, and after installation. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. C. Install identification Labels for Through Penetration and Construction Joint Systems:

Pressure sensitive self-adhesive vinyl labels, preprinted with the following information: 1. The applicable words "Warning - Through Penetration Firestop System - Do not

Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." or "Warning – Construction Gap Fire Resistive System - Do not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Listing agency's system number or designation. 3. System manufacturer's name, address, and phone number. 4. Installer's name, address, and phone number. 5. General contractor's name, address, and phone number (if applicable). 6. Date of installation.



JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 07 92 00 – JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section Includes: 1. Caulking and sealants.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Sealing Sheet Metal Joints, Section 07 60 00. 1.3 EXTENT OF WORK

A. Caulk where shown on Drawings and at all exterior joints. B. Caulk exterior joints around meter bases, window frames, door frames, expansion joints, and oth-

er openings in exterior walls, which are subject to moisture infiltration, with STPe type sealant. C. Fill space beneath exterior door thresholds with latex acrylic sealant.

1.4 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE

A. Submit prior to starting work, manufacturer's written certification that specified sealants are suit-able for intended use.

B. Submit upon work completion, manufacturer's written certification that specified sealant has been properly mixed and installed.

1.5 APPLICATOR QUALIFICATIONS

A. Applicator shall have at least three years’ experience in installing products specified on similar sized projects.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect against damage and cold temperatures. B. Store in original, tightly sealed containers, and with original legible labels thereon. C. Do not open containers or remove labels until Owner’s Authorized Representative reviews.

1.7 WEATHER DURING WORK

A. Perform no Work when weather exceeds manufacturer's specified limits. 1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide 20-year warranty for Caulking and Sealing Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STPe SEALANT

A. Sonolastic 150 with VLM Technology or approved. B. Multi-component tintable, non-sag, silyl-terminated polyether elastomeric sealant.

2.2 LATEX ACRYLIC SEALANT

A. Pecora AC-20, Sonneborn Sonnolac Acrylic, or approved. 2.3 COLOR OF EXPOSED SEALANT

A. Approximate color of adjacent surfaces, unless otherwise directed.



2.4 PRIMER AND SURFACE CONDITIONER

A. Made or recommended by sealant manufacturer. 2.5 BACKER ROD

A. Soft Backer Rod. B. Reticulated closed cell polyethylene foam joint filler and backing for sealants. C. Use a backer-rod diameter that is approximately 25% larger than the width of the joint.

2.6 MIXING

A. Follow sealant manufacturer's directions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Verify that joints to be sealed and filled are clean, dry, and free from dust, oil, grease, rust, lac-quer, laitance, loose mortar, or other bond reducing matter.

B. Allow concrete surfaces to dry at least 4 weeks before caulking or sealing. C. Prior to starting work, notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Surfaces to receive sealant must be structurally sound, dry, clean, free of dirt, moisture, loose par-ticles, oil, grease, asphalt, tar, paint, wax, rust, waterproofing or curing compounds or any type of membrane material.

B. Remove dust and dirt by brushing and air blowing. C. Mock-up area of sealant applications, both on primed and unprimed surfaces, to establish quality

standards. Notify Owner’s Authorized Representative for review, before proceeding. 3.3 PRIMING

A. Prime surfaces as required by manufacturer's instructions. Apply with bristle brush. B. Do not flood surfaces.

3.4 BACKING INSTALLATION

A. Joints to Receive Latex Acrylic Sealant 1. If Joints are deeper than 3/4 inch and no suitable backstop is provided, pack joints with rope

yarn to within ½ inch of surface. B. Joints to Receive STPe Sealant

1. Install Backer Rod behind Sealant in accordance with Manufacturer's directions, using a blunt probe. Do not stretch backer rod during installation.

2. Dry install STPe at median temperature (above 40° F). 3. Provide in as long continuous lengths as practicable. 4. Stretch taut and force into Joints to uniform depth, approximately ½ joint width but not to

exceed 5/8 inch. 3.5 SEALANT INSTALLATION

A. Mix and apply in accordance with manufacturer's directions using gun type dispenser. B. Seal joints before applying final Paint coat. C. Size gun nozzle to fit joint. D. Fill joints and voids solid; superficial pointing with skin bead not acceptable. Fill joints from the

bottom up to the exterior face. E. Install flush with adjacent surfaces.



F. Tool joints smooth within 10 minutes after installation. G. Remove masking materials, if any, immediately after sealant installation.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Remove excess material as work progresses and leave surfaces neat, smooth, and clean. B. Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed. C. Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch up, or replace when directed, products

which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.







DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS





METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 08 11 00 – METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. The work covered by this section consists of furnishing all plant, labor, equipment, and materi-als, and performing all operations required to complete hollow metal doors, frames, and over-head steel doors shown on the drawings. All such work to be as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.

B. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer’s product sheet, for specified prod-ucts.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, in-cluding anchorage, accessories and finish colors.

1. Indicate door type, frame, steel, core, material thickness, reinforcements, anchorages, ex-posed fasteners locations, openings (glazed, paneled or louvered) and hardware arrangement.

D. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors and textures. Coordinate with Division 9 Painting Section for paint finishes.

E. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. 2. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

F. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Data and Operation Data) Section. Include methods for maintaining installed products and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance. 2. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.

G. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions. H. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s Authorized Representative’s acceptance, manu-

facturer’s standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.

1. Warranty Period: 2 years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. Shall be flush construction equal to LF series as manufactured by STEELCRAFT MANUFACTURING CO., Cincinnati, OH.

B. All exterior hollow metal doors shall be 1-3/4 inch thick. C. Doors shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, 18 gage. Doors shall be reinforced, stiffened sound

deadened and insulated with impregnated kraft honeycomb core completely filling the inside of the doors and laminated to both inside faces of the panels. Doors shall have continuous vertical mechanical interlocking joints at lock and hinge edges with edge seams welded and filled and ground smooth. Hinge and lock edges shall be beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inches. Top and bottom 14


METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

gage cold rolled steel reinforcing channels shall be spot welded within the door. Hinge reinforc-ing shall be 8 gage, lock reinforcing shall be 16 gage, and closer reinforcing shall be 12 gage. Adequate reinforcing shall be provided for other hardware as required. All doors shall be bonderized and finished as standard with one coat of baked-on prime paint capable of passing a 240 hour salt spray and a 1,000 hour humidity test, in accordance with Federal Standard 141A or ASTM, Specification B117 as certified by an independent laboratory. Painted finish shall be 2 coats of oil base exterior trim paint applied by brush. Color shall be selected by the Owner.

D. Exterior doors shall be equipped with door shoes, PEMKO No. 222AV, or equal, and shall be provided with a keyed lock, equal to SCHLAGE classroom lock, Series 4000, satin bronze fin-ish.

E. Shop drawings which clearly show details of construction and installation shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication. Thresholds For exterior doors shall be equal to PEMKO No. 170A.

2.2 METAL FRAMES

A. Metal frames for hollow metal doors shall be equal to F-16 series as manufactured by STEELCRAFT MANUFACTURING CO., Cincinnati, OH.. Frames shall be formed from 16 gage galvanized steel with 2 inch faces. Frames shall be set up and welded. Mitered corners shall have reinforcements with integral tabs for secure inter-locking of jambs to head. Strike jambs shall be supplied with three factory installed rubber bumpers and heads of pairs of doors with two rubber bumpers. Frames shall have 8 gage steel hinge reinforcing and shall be mortised for 4-1/2 inch by 4-1/2 inch standard weight template hinges, 1-1/2 pair per door. Strike reinforcing shall be 12 gage steel and mortised for ASA 115.1 Universal Strike. Provide metal plaster guard for all mortised cutouts. Reinforcing for surface closer shall be 12 gage steel. Adequate reinforc-ing shall be provided for all other hardware when required.

B. Frames shall be furnished with a minimum of 6 wall anchors and two adjustable base anchors of manufacturer's standard design. All frames shall be bonderized and finished as standard with one coat of baked-on prime paint. Painted finish shall be similar to doors.

C. Frames for exterior doors shall be weather stripped. D. Shop drawings which clearly show details of construction and installation shall be submitted for

approval before fabrication is begun. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Doors shall be accurately sized for proper clearance and shall be carefully set to insure proper door fit requiring no further cutting of any door, and shall be mortised, drilled and otherwise worked for finish hardware.

B. Installation shall be true, plumb and accurate. Doors and frames shall be installed in full compli-ance with manufacturer's printed instructions. All doors shall open and close smoothly and free of binding, interference and other defects or objectionable characteristics associated with poor installation or alignment, or improper adjustment.



WOOD DOORS 08 14 29 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 08 14 29 – WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 08100“Metal Doors and Frames” for frames for flush wood doors. 2. Section 08710 “Hardware” for hardware preparation requirements for flush wood doors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished door veneers. D. Samples for Verification:

1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work.

2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used. a. Provide samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. b. Finish veneer-faced door samples with same materials proposed for factory-finished

doors. 3. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches long, for each material and finish specified. 4. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, "Ar-

chitectural Wood Flush Doors." C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.




A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheet-

ing. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weather tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84- inch

(1067-by-2134-mm) section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a

3-inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span. 2. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol-lowing:

1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Ampco, Inc. 3. Buell Door Company Inc. 4. Chappell Door Co. 5. Eagle Plywood & Door Manufacturing, Inc. 6. Eggers Industries. 7. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company. 8. Haley Brothers, Inc. 9. Ideal Architectural Doors & Plywood. 10. Ipik Door Company. 11. Lambton Doors. 12. Marlite. 13. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 14. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company. 15. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company. 16. Poncraft Door Company. 17. Vancouver Door Company. 18. VT Industries Inc.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty. B. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:



1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10. a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N). b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf (1780 N).

C. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.

1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edg-es.

2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Solid-Core doors:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 2. Species: Red oak. 3. Cut: Rift cut. 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 7. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate

room or area of building. 8. Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as faces. 9. Core: Structural composite lumber. 10. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed

before veneering. 11. WDMA 1.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment

before factory machining. 2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for

hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors. 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrica-tion, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface ap-plied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be

omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Finish doors at factory. C. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors

indicated to receive opaque finish.



D. Finish doors at factory where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished. E. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range. 4. Effect: Open-grain finish.

5. Sheen: Satin. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing

characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08710. B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and

the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indi-cated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.

Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or cover-ing unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock edge; trim stiles and rails

only to extent permitted by labeling agency. D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is

required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.

Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.



FLOOR ACCESS DOORS 08 31 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 08 31 00 - FLOOR ACCESS DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Provide factory-fabricated floor access doors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including profiles, accessories, location, adjacent

construction interface, and dimensions. C. Warranty: Submit executed copy of manufacturer’s standard warranty.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: A minimum of 5 years’ experience manufacturing similar products. B. Installer: A minimum of 2 years experience installing similar products. C. Manufacturer’s Quality System: Registered to ISO 9001:2008 Quality Standards including in-

house engineering for product design activities.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer’s original packaging. Store materials in a dry, protected, well-

vented area. Inspect product upon receipt and report damaged material immediately to delivering carrier and note such damage on the carrier’s freight bill of lading.

1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty. Materials shall be free of

defects in material and workmanship for a period of twenty-five years from the date of purchase. Should a part fail to function in normal use within this period, manufacturer shall furnish a new part at no charge.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Type JD-AL H20 Channel Frame Loading Access Door by The

BILCO Company, P.O. Box 1203, New Haven, CT 06505, 1-800-366-6530, Fax: 1-203-535-1582, Web: www.bilco.com.

B. Pre-approved alternates will be considered.

2.2 ACCESS DOOR A. Furnish and install where indicated on plans a vault access door Type JD-AL H20, size 5 feet x 5

feet. Length denotes hinge side. The floor access door shall be double leaf and pre-assembled from the manufacturer.

B. Performance characteristics: 1. Covers: Shall be reinforced to support AASHTO H-20 wheel load with a maximum

deflection of 1/150th of the span. Manufacturer to provide structural calculations stamped by a registered professional engineer upon request. (Note: For installation in an off-street location where not subject to high density, fast moving traffic.)

2. Operation of the covers shall be smooth and easy with controlled operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing.

3. Operation of the covers shall not be affected by temperature. 4. Entire door, including all hardware components, shall be highly corrosion resistant.


http://www.bilco.com/

FLOOR ACCESS DOORS 08 31 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

C. Covers: Shall be 1/4” aluminum diamond pattern. D. Frame: Channel frame shall be extruded aluminum with bend down anchor tabs around the

perimeter. E. Hinges: Shall be specifically designed for horizontal installation and shall be through bolted to

the cover with tamperproof Type 316 stainless steel lock bolts and shall be through bolted to the frame with Type 316 stainless steel bolts and locknuts.

F. Drain Coupling: Provide a 1-1/2” drain coupling located in the right front corner of the channel frame [note: can be placed at a different location if specified].

G. Lifting mechanisms: Manufacturer shall provide the required number and size of compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes to provide, smooth, easy, and controlled cover operation throughout the entire arc of opening and to act as a check in retarding downward motion of the cover when closing. The upper tube shall be the outer tube to prevent accumulation of moisture, grit, and debris inside the lower tube assembly. The lower tube shall interlock with a flanged support shoe fastened to a formed 1/4” gusset support plate.

H. A removable exterior turn/lift handle with a spring loaded ball detent shall be provided to open the cover and the latch release shall be protected by a flush, gasketed, removable screw plug].

I. Hardware: 1. Hinges: Heavy forged Type 316 stainless steel hinges, each having a minimum 1/4”

diameter Type 316 stainless steel pin, shall be provided and shall pivot so the cover does not protrude into the channel frame.

2. Covers shall be equipped with a hold open arm which automatically lock each cover in the open position.

3. Covers shall be fitted with the required number and size of compression spring operators. Springs and spring tubs shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

4. A Type 316 stainless steel snap lock with fixed handle shall be mounted on the underside of the covers.

5. Hardware: Shall be Type 316 stainless steel throughout. J. Finishes: Factory finish shall be mill finish aluminum with bituminous coating applied to the

exterior of the frame.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and openings for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install products in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals.

Locate units level, plumb, and in proper alignment with adjacent work. 1. Test units for proper function and adjust until proper operation is achieved. 2. Repair finishes damaged during installation. 3. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces using methods acceptable to the manufacturer which will not damage

finish.



OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 08 33 23 – OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Overhead coiling doors. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Support framing and framed opening. B. Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry: Wood jamb and head trim. C. Section 09 90 00 - Painting: Field applied finish.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFRC 102 - Test Procedure for Measuring the Steady-State Thermal Transmittance of Fenestration Systems.

B. ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Element.

C. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

D. ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

E. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.

F. ASTM A 924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

G. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

H. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). I. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.

1.4 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Overhead coiling insulated doors: 1. Wind Loads: Design door assembly to withstand wind/suction load of 20 psf without

damage to door or assembly components in conformance with ASTM E 330. 2. Operation: Design door assembly, including operator, to operate for not less than 20,000

cycles. B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide doors, tracks, motors, and accessories from one

manufacturer for each type of door. Provide secondary components from source acceptable to manufacturer of primary components.

C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Details of construction and fabrication. 4. Installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings: Include detailed plans, elevations, details of framing members, anchoring methods, required clearances, hardware, and accessories. Include relationship with adjacent



construction. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips

representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches

(150 mm) long, representing actual product, color, and patterns. F. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit lubrication requirements and frequency, and periodic

adjustments required. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with a minimum of five years experience in the fabrication and installation of security closures.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years and approved by manufacturer.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Protect materials from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver until after wet work is complete

and dry. C. Store materials in a dry, warm, ventilated weather tight location.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work with other operations and installation of adjacent materials to avoid damage to installed materials.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer’s limited door and operator system, except the counterbalance spring and finish, to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for 3 years or 20,000 cycles, whichever occurs first.

B. Warranty: Manufacturer’s limited door warranty for 2 years for all parts and components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Overhead Door Corp., 2501 S. State Hwy. 121, Suite 200, Lewisville, TX 75067. ASD. Tel. Toll Free: (800) 275-3290. Phone: (469) 549-7100. Fax: (972) 906-1499. Web Site: www.overheaddoor.com. E-mail: [email protected].

B. Or Pre-Approved Equal.

2.2 INSULATED OVERHEAD COILING SERVICE DOORS A. Overhead Coiling Stormtite Advanced Performance Insulated Service Doors: Overhead Door

Corporation Stormtite AP Model 627. 1. Curtain: Interlocking roll-formed slats as specified following. Endlocks shall be attached to

each end of alternate slats to prevent lateral movement. a. Flat profile type FIT-265 for doors up to 40 feet (12.19 m) wide.


http://www.overheaddoor.com/

mailto:[email protected]


b. Front slat fabricated of: 1) 24 gauge galvanized steel.

c. Back slat fabricated of: 1) 24 gauge galvanized steel.

d. Slat cavity filled with CFC-free foamed-in-place, polyurethane insulation. 1) R-Value: 10.9, U-Value: 0.84.

2. Performance: a. Through Curtain Sound Rating: Sound Rating: STC-28 (STC-30+ with HZ noise

generator) as per ASTM E 90. b. Installed System Sound Rating: STC-21 as per ASTM E 90. c. U-factor: 0.84 NFRC test report, maximum U-factor of no higher than 1.00.

3. Finish: a. Galvanized Steel: Slats and hood galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653 and

receive rust-inhibitive, roll coating process, including 0.2 mils thick baked-on prime paint, and 0.6 mils thick baked-on polyester top coat. 1) Powder coat: 2 coats zinc rich finish:

(a) PowderGuard Premium: Weather resistant polyester powder coat color as selected by the Owner.

2) Non-galvanized exposed ferrous surfaces shall receive one coat of rust-inhibitive primer.

4. Weatherseals: a. Vinyl bottom seal and internal hood seals. b. Interior and exterior EPDM triple-seal finned guide weatherseal. c. Lintel weatherseal.

5. Bottom Bar: a. Two powder coated black steel angles minimum thickness 1/8 inch (3 mm) bolted back

to back to reinforce curtain in the guides. 6. Guides: Three structural steel angles.

a. Finish: PowderGuard Zinc Finish for guides, bottom bar and head plate. 7. Brackets:

a. Galvanized steel to support counterbalance, curtain and hood. 8. Counterbalance: Helical torsion spring type housed in a steel tube or pipe barrel, supporting

the curtain with deflection limited to 0.03 inch per foot of span. Counterbalance is adjustable by means of an adjusting tension wheel.

9. Hood: Provide with internal hood baffle weatherseal. a. 24 gauge galvanized steel with intermediate supports as required.

10. Manual Operation: a. Chain hoist.

11. Electric Motor Operation: Provide UL listed electric operator, size as recommended by manufacturer to move door in either direction at not less than 2/3 foot nor more than 1 foot per second. a. Sensing Edge Protection:

1) Pneumatic sensing edge. b. Operator Controls:

1) Interior: Push-button operated control station with open, close, and stop buttons. 2) Exterior: Key operated control station with open, close, and stop buttons. 3) Controls surface mounted on interior and flush mounted on exterior.

c. Motor Voltage: 115/230 single phase, 60 Hz. 12. Wind load Design:

a. Standard wind load shall be 20 PSF.



13. Locking: a. Chain keeper locks for chain hoist operation. b. Interior slide bolt lock for electric operation with interlock switch.

14. Wall Mounting Condition: a. Face-of-wall mounting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. B. Examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions under which this work is to be

performed. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Owner’s Authorized

Representative of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing

without distortion or stress. C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural

members only. D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. E. Coordinate installation of electrical service. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit

components. F. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in

Section 07 92 00. G. Install perimeter trim and closures. H. Instruct Owner’s personnel in proper operating procedures and maintenance schedule.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Test for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide proper operation without binding or distortion.

B. Adjust hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. 3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean curtain and components using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer.

B. Remove labels and visible markings. C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.



ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 43 13 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; 2015. B. AAMA 501.2 - Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of

Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems; 2015. C. AAMA 609 & 610 - Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished

Aluminum (Combined Document); 2015. D. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2013.

E. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.

F. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 2014.

G. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.

H. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2013.

I. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).

J. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014.

K. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2016).

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procetures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,

affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required.

C. Samples: Submit two samples 4x4 inches in size illustrating finished aluminum surface, glass, glazing materials.

D. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering calculations, and dimensional limitations.

E. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents.

F. Report of field testing for water leakage. G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's

name and registered with manufacturer.



1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct

supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least five years of documented experience.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed

coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this

minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.

1.8 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 70 00 – Project Closeout, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a one year period after the Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass

units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.

D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FRAMING FOR INSULATING GLAZING A. Center-Set Style, Thermally-Broken:

1. EFCO Corporation; Series 403, Thermal Storefront Framing. 2. Oldcastle Building Envelope 3000T. 3. Kawneer North America (an Alcoa company) 451/451T Framing System. 4. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep.

B. Substitutions: See Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. 1. For any product not identified as "Basis of Design", submit information as specified

for substitutions.

2.2 STOREFRONT A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing

members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Glazing Rabbet: For 1 inch insulating glazing. 2. Finish: Superior performing organic coatings.

a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. b. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible

in completed assemblies, including joint edges. c. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials

or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. 3. Finish Color: As selected from custom color selection. Color is intended to match

other window frame color. 4. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and



secured; prepared to receive anchors and hardware; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced as required for imposed loads.

5. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibration harmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces.

6. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system.

7. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements.

8. Movement: Allow for movement between storefront and adjacent construction, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.

9. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent construction while allowing expected movement.

B. Performance Requirements: 1. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements

without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. a. Positive Design Wind Load: 22.4 lbf/sq ft. b. Negative Design Wind Load: 30 lbf/sq ft. c. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any

direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. 2. Water Penetration Resistance: No uncontrolled water on interior face, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E331 at pressure differential of 8 psf. 3. Air Leakage: Maximum of 0.06 cu ft/min sq ft of wall area, when tested in accordance

with ASTM E283 at 6.27 psf pressure differential across assembly. 4. Overall U-value Including Glazing: 0.45 Btu/(hr sq ft deg F), maximum.

2.3 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior

section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 1. Glazing Stops: Flush. 2. Cross-Section: 2x4.5 inch nominal dimension. 4 inch profile at sill as shown on drawings.

B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00.

2.4 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). C. Fasteners: Stainless steel. D. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air

infiltration requirements.

2.5 FINISHES A. Superior Performing Organic Coatings: AAMA 2605 multiple coat, thermally

cured polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) system. B. Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's custom range.


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E283






















PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work

of this section.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances

and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly

dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads

to sill flashing. H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity

of thermal barrier. I. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot

be satisfactorily repaired.

3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10

ft, whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Control, for independent testing and inspection

requirements. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing. B. Test installed storefront for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 501.2 hose test.

3.5 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft,

clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean aluminum surfaces in accordance with

AAMA 609 & 610.

3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion.











































http://www.aamanet.org/general.asp?sect=2&id=45





FIBERGLASS WINDOWS 08 54 13 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 08 54 13 - FIBERGLASS WINDOWS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Section included: Fiberglass Reinforced Polymer (FRP) windows of the following type (s):

1. Casement windows

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07 26 00 - Weather Barriers. B. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealants and caulking. C. Section 08 80 00 – Glass and Glazing

1.3 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):

1. AAMA 502 - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Windows and Sliding Doors. 2. AAMA 613 - Voluntary Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Organic

Coatings on Plastic Profiles. 3. AAMA 623 07 – Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures

for Organic Coatings on Fiber Reinforced Thermoset Profiles 4. AAMA 624 07 – Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures

for High Performance Organic Coatings on Fiber Reinforced Thermoset Profiles 5. AAMA 625 07 – Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures

for Superior Performance Organic Coatings on Fiber Reinforced Thermoset Profiles B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C 1036 - Flat Glass. 2. ASTM C 1048 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 3. ASTM E 283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors

Under Specified Pressure Difference Across the Specimen. 4. ASTM E 547 - Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Cyclic

Static Air Pressure Differential.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Air, Water and Structural Performance

1. Windows shall meet Rating specifications in accordance with ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S..2-97, AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05, and AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08

2. Window Air Leakage, ASTM E 283: Window air leakage when tested at 1.57 psf (25 mph) shall be 0.02 cfm/ft2 of frame.

3. Window Water Penetration, ASTM E 547: No water penetration through window when tested under static pressure of 7.52 psf after 4 cycles of 5 minutes each, with water being applied at a rate of 8 gallons per hour per square foot.

4. Forced entry resistance not to exceed limits defined by the standard AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05. [Grade 10]

5. Field testing to verify compliance shall be performed on units of comparable size to gateway test sizes for designated Performance Classes as listed in Table 1 of Section 4.3 of AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05

B. Thermal Performance 1. Windows shall meet whole-unit U-Value and SHGC Performance determined in

accordance with NFRC 100.

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Reference Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures; submit following items:



1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including installation instructions. 2. Shop Drawings: Include window schedule, window elevations, section details, and

multiple window assembly details. Submit full shop drawings as required; include location floor plans or exterior wall elevations showing all window openings, typical unit elevations, and to scale detail sections of every typical composite member. Indicate the type of anchors, hardware, operators and other components not included in manufacturer's standard data. Include glazing details and standards for factory glazed units.

3. Samples: a. Color samples: Minimum 1 x 3 inch (25 mm x 76 mm) samples of Fiberglass with

coating or Metal with coating b. Glass, showing specified color.

4. Quality Assurance / Control Submittals: a. Qualifications: Proof of manufacturers qualifications. b. U-Factor and structural rating charts required for AAMA and NFRC labeling

requirements. c. Installation Instructions – ref. AAMA Installation Masters

B. Closeout Submittals: Reference Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents: submit following items: 1. Maintenance instructions. 2. Special Warranties.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Overall Standards: Comply with ANSI/AAMA 101.I.S.2, except as otherwise noted herein. B. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer Qualifications: a. Member American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and the National

Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC). b. IGCC Certified for fabrication of insulated glazing units with suspended film. c. Minimum 5 years experience fabricating insulated glazing units using suspended film.

2. Product Qualifications: Certifications for insulated glass windows: AAMA: Windows shall be Gold Label certified with label attached to frame per AAMA

requirements. NFRC: Windows shall be NFRC certified with temporary U-factor label applied to glass

and an NFRC tab added to permanent AAMA frame label.

3. Provide test reports from an AAMA accredited laboratory certifying the performance as specified in section 1.04 of this specification. Valid test reports shall be no more than four years old.

C. Regulatory Requirement: Provide Egress clearance per local code

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery:

1. Deliver materials to site undamaged in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying manufacturer and product name. Include installation instructions.

B. Storage: 1. Protect the windows and accessories from the elements, construction activities, and

other hazards until the project is complete. (a) Store materials in an upright position and in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. (b) Store materials off ground and under cover. (c) Protect materials from weather, direct sunlight, and construction activities.



C. Handling: Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent damage. 1. Handle all fiberglass window units with glass cups instead of by the frames whenever

possible and if unit is over 100 lbs. 2. Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent damage.

1.8 WARRANTY A. 10 year guarantee. B. Guarantee windows against defects in materials and workmanship.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Alpen High Performance Products 6268 Monarch Park Place, Niwot, CO 80503; Tel:

(303) 834-3600; Fax: (303) 834-3541; Website: www.ThinkAlpen.com a. Window Series: Zenith Series ZR-9/925 Fiberglass Windows

B. Pre-approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS A. Frame and Sash: Pultruded Fiberglass Reinforced Polymer, with color coating. B. Hardware: Hardware having component parts which are exposed shall be of brass, aluminum,

stainless steel or other non corrosive material(s) compatible with fiberglass and of sufficient strength to perform the functions for which they are used. Cadmium or zinc-plated steel, where used, shall be in accordance with ASTM A 165 or B 633. Nickel chrome-plated steel, where used, shall be in accordance with ASTM B 456.

C. Weather-strip: Weather-strip conforming to AAMA 701or 702. Weather-strip shall meet the requirements of the specifications as detailed in the appropriate test report. All weather-strip shall be installed in specially-extruded ports and secured to prevent movement, shrinkage, or loss when removing sash either for cleaning or repair. Adhered weather-stripping shall not be allowed.

D. Screens: Full screens supplied separately or delivered applied to windows as requested.

2.3 ASSEMBLY A. Fabricate frames and sash with mitered and mechanically joined corners. Mitered seams shall

be sealed thoroughly to prevent air or water penetration B. Provide metal or composite reinforcement in sash or frame for attaching operating or locking

mechanisms C. Factory glazed, inside, with snap on PVC or Fiberglass glazing stops. Insulating glass units

shall be reglazable without dismantling sash framing. D. The windows shall be assembled in a secure and professional manner to perform as herein

specified and to assure neat and weather tight construction. All main framing joints shall be sealed with sealants meeting the requirement of AAMA 803 or 809.

2.4 INSECT SCREENS A. Provide tight-fitting screen for operating sash with hardware to allow easy removal.

1. Screen Cloth: Charcoal colored fiberglass mesh 2. Frame: Roll formed or extruded aluminum. (Interior placement) Pull tabs for handling

2.5 GLASS AND GLAZING A. Overall IG thickness: nominally [1-3/8” ZR-5] [7/8” ZR-7] [1-3/8” ZR-9]

Insulated Glass Units: ASTM E774, Class A.


http://www.thinkalpen.com/


B. Construction: Individual components shall comply with criteria specified in following paragraphs. Units shall be hermetically sealed and shall comply with ASTME 2190, Class CBA.

C. Components 1. Exterior layer to be [clear] [low-e coated] float glass of nominal [1/8” (3mm)] [3/16”

(5mm)] [1/4” (6mm)] thickness; per ASTM C 1036: Type 1, Class 1, Quality q3; conforming to ASTM C 1376

2. Exterior glass to be [Kind annealed ] [Kind HS per ASTM C 1048] [Kind FT per ASTM C 1048, complying with CPSC 16CFR-1201; ANSI Z 97.1]

3. Suspended polymer film : [Single] [Double] Suspended Film 4. Interior layer to be [clear] [low-e coated] float glass of nominal [1/8” (3mm)] [3/16”

(5mm)] [1/4” (6mm)] thickness; per ASTM C 1036: Type 1, Class 1, Quality q3 5. Interior glass to be [Kind annealed ] [Kind HS per ASTM C 1048] [Kind FT per ASTM

C 1048, complying with CPSC 16CFR-1201; ANSI Z 97.1] 6. Gas Fill: Each cavity between glass and SCF shall be filled with an inert gas / air mixture

containing a minimum of 90% [Argon] [Krypton] gas; units shall be equipped with gas-retention device for shipping.

7. Spacers: shall maintain a nominal dimension of [3/8” (9.5mm)] [1/2” (14.2mm)] between glass and suspended film.

8. Edge Sealants: a. Primary: Polyisobutylene (PIB) sealant complying with ASTM E 774 for

glass-to-spacer seals b. Secondary: Polyurethane sealant for perimeter moisture barrier c. Seal durability: conformance to ASTM E 774; visible ALI certification for

CBA rating level. Perimeter seals shall maintain a hermetically-sealed, dehydrated condition for the duration of the product warranty.

2.6 FINISH (Exterior / Interior) A. Frame and Sash colors: [White] [Bronze] [Almond] [Sandstone] [Slate]

Split – one color inside; different color outside Custom – custom color requests require Pantone number and matching swatch.

B. Interior Wood Veneer [Oak Veneer] [Fir Veneer] C. Color match screen frame to window frame and sash color

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Windows inspected in accordance with manufacturers Quality Control Program.

2.8 WINDOW TYPES Casement Window [ZR-5 s], [ZR-6], [ZR-7], [ZR-9], [ZR-10]

A. Factory assembled and glazed outward opening fiberglass casement B. Frame:

1. Chambered, foam insulated, pultruded fiberglass 2. Interior Exposed Surfaces: [Factory applied coating - color] [Oak Veneer] [VG Fir

Veneer] 3. Overall Frame Depth: 3-1/4 inch (83 mm)

C. Sash: 1. Chambered, foam insulated, pultruded fiberglass 2. Interior Exposed Surfaces: Factory applied coating - color] [Oak Veneer] [VG Fir

Veneer] 3. Minimum 2-1/4 inch (57 mm) deep, chambered, pultruded fiberglass profile.

D. Sightlines: edge of frame to tip of glazing tower or glass line 2 13/16” (72mm) E. Weather-strip:

1. Triple weather-strip



a. Continuous, flexible PVC type around sash perimeter b. Foam with fabric skin around frames interior perimeter c. Neoprene around perimeter of frame at sash opening

F. Hardware: 1. Operator – steel worm-gear operator, zinc die cast base with painted finish 2. Crank Handle – integrated folding handle with painted finish [White] [Beige] [Coppertone]

[Chestnut] [Black] Optional: [ORB] [Pewter] [Brushed Nickel] [Antique Brass] 3. Locking System – Single handle multi-point with positive action (reaches out and pulls tight). 4. All exposed fasteners- stainless steel

G. Simulated-Divided-Lite (SDL) Grids 7/8” (Optional) 1. Interior (room side) grids: Solid [Oak] [VG Fir] 2. Exterior Grids: Extruded Aluminum

H. Performance Class Structural 1. Commercial CW-PG50

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings in which windows will be installed.

1. Field verify that the existing window openings are within tolerance, plumb, level, clean, and provide a solid anchoring surface and substrate. Also confirm that the openings and are in accordance with approved shop drawings.

2. Verify that framing complies with method of installation 3. Verify that fasteners in framed walls are fully driven and will not interfere with window

installation B. Coordinate with responsible entity to correct unsatisfactory conditions. Notify Owner’s

Authorized Representative of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptable of substrate conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install windows in framed walls in accordance with AAMA 2400, and manufacturer’s

instruction. B. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's guideline instructions. C. Install windows to be weather-tight and freely operating. D. Maintain alignment with adjacent work. E. Secure assembly to framed openings, plumb and square, without distortion. F. Integrate window system installation with exterior water-resistant barrier using flashing/sealant

tape. Apply and integrate flashing/sealant tape with water-resistant barrier using watershed principles in accordance with window manufacturer's instructions.

G. Place interior seal around window perimeter to maintain continuity of building thermal and air barrier using insulating-foam sealant.

H. Seal window to exterior wall cladding with sealant and related backing materials at perimeter of assembly. (Continuous at the head and jambs. Discontinuous at the sill.)

I. Leave windows closed and locked. J. Do not remove temporary labels. K. Install insect screens on operable windows.

3.3 CLEANING A. Clean window frames and glass in accordance with Division 1 requirements. B. Remove temporary labels and retain for Closeout Submittals. C. Clean soiled surfaces and glass using a mild detergent and warm water solution with soft, clean

cloths.



3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed windows to ensure that, except for normal weathering, windows will be

without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEBRIS A. Remove all garbage off site and legally dispose of existing windows and debris generated from

the installation of the new windows.



HARDWARE 08 70 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 08 70 00 – HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Door hardware.

1.2 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Include with requests: Specified Item, Design, Catalog Number, and Finish for each Item on

which Approval is being requested. Blanket approvals by Manufacturer's Name only will not be given.

1.3 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to Building Code requirements if more restrictive than those specified herein. B. Notify Owner’s Authorized Representative of differences prior to starting Work. C. Door Closer opening pressures are not to exceed 5 lbs at interior Doors and 8-1/2 lbs. at Exterior

Doors, other than at Mechanical Equipment Rooms.

1.4 SUPPLIER'S HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Indicate each Item, Opening, Door size, Door hand, Frame material, Fire-Resistance Label Rating,

Keying, Material, Finish, and Manufacturer's model number. Include Manufacturer's Catalogue data for each separate Hardware Item.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY A. Package each item separately, and identify with Hardware Schedule Number. B. Deliver to General Contractor for installation in original, unopened containers with legible labels

intact.

1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect against theft, damage, and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DOOR SILENCERS A. At Metal Frames: Glynn Johnson #64, or approved. B. Provide 3 Silencers for single Doors.

2.2 FASTENERS A. Provide required Screws, Bolts, and other Fasteners. B. Match Hardware Material and Finish.

2.3 HINGES A. Provide Non-Removable Pins on any out swinging, exterior Door Hinges.

2.4 LOCK CYLINDER CORES A. Provide cylinder cores at all exterior Doors and doors indicated in hardware schedule.



2.5 FABRICATION A. Make Hardware for prefitted Doors and Frames to Template. B. Send Templates, together with Hardware Schedule, to Door and Frame Manufacturer not later than

two weeks after Hardware Scheduled approval. C. Lock and Latch Components shall be manufactured by only one Manufacturer, and carry that

Manufacturer's warranty. D. Cut and fit Threshold and Floor Plates to Door Frame profile with mitered corner joints. E. Fabricate joints with smooth, hair-line seams. Fabricate Strikes with Extended Lip where

necessary to protect Trim against damage by Latch Bolt.

2.6 KEYS A. Provide (4) keys.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that surfaces to receive Finish Hardware are properly prepared, including necessary

Backing. B. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.

3.2 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Where necessary, verify Door openings and field measurements prior to fabrication. B. Modify Hardware where necessary to fit Door openings. C. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions, modify Work as required for

accurate fit. D. If measurements differ substantially, notify Owner’s Authorized Representative prior to

fabrication.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Accurately locate, fit, and install square, plumb, and secure in accordance with Manufacturer's

directions and Templates. B. Mount at the following approximate heights above Floor, unless otherwise shown on Drawings:

Top Butt: 7-3/8 inches from Door top to Butt top. 1. Intermediate Butt: Equal distance between top and bottom Butts. 2. Bottom Butt: Up to 8 inches to Butt bottom. 3. Knob Locks: 40-5/16 inches to Knob Center. 4. Pull Plates: 42 inches to Pull center. 5. Push Plates: 42 inches to Plate center. 6. All Others: Manufacturer's Standard.

C. After fitting Mortised Hardware to surfaces to be painted, remove and store Hardware in original package until painting completion, then permanently install.

3.4 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust moving parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Final Project Acceptance and during

Warranty Period.

3.5 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Doors shall be keyed to be compatible with current hatchery keying system.



B. The following hardware is designed around Steelcraft S-labeled and positive pressure doors. If any other hardware is required by another door manufacturer, that manufacturer will have to include necessary hardware.

1. GROUP #1: DOOR # 212 (DOUBLE) 6 EA BUTTS T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 613 MCKINNEY 2 EA PANIC 9927L x 996L 313 VON DUPRIN OR YALE 2 EA CYLINDER 20-057 613 SCHLAGE 1 EA CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 72MC 695 LCN OR NORTON 2 EA KICKPLATE K0050 10X2LDW 613 TRIMCO 1 EA THRESHOLD 2005D (VERIFY DETAIL) ALUM PEMKO 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 3452 DNB ALUM PEMKO 1 SET GASKET PS074 BLK STEELCRAFT 1 EA AUTO OPERATOR 4642 695 LCN 2 EA ACTUATOR 8310-856T LCN 2 EA TRANSMITTER 8310-844 LCN 1 EA RECEIVER 8310-865 LCN 1 EA WEATHER RING 8310-800 LCN 2 EA MOUNTING BOX 8310-868F LCN NOTE: PANICS TO BE DOGGED FOR AUTO OPERATOR USE.

2. GROUP #2: DOOR # 201 3 EA BUTTS T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 613 MCKINNEY 1 EA PANIC 99L x 996L 313 VON DUPRIN OR YALE 1 EA CYLINDER 20-057 613 SCHLAGE 1 EA CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 72MC 695 LCN OR NORTON 1 EA KICKPLATE K0050 10X2LDW 613 TRIMCO 1 EA THRESHOLD 272D (VERIFY DETAIL) ALUM PEMKO 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 3452 DNB ALUM PEMKO 1 SET GASKET PS074 BLK STEELCRAFT 1 EA AUTO OPERATOR 4642 695 LCN 2 EA ACTUATOR 8310-856T LCN 1 EA WEATHER RING 8310-800 LCN 2 EA MOUNTING BOX 8310-868F NOTE: PANICS TO BE DOGGED FOR AUTO OPERATOR USE

3. GROUP #3: DOOR # 209

3 EA BUTTS TA2714 4.5 X 4.5 613 MCKINNEY 1 EA PASSAGE L9010 06A 613 SCHLAGE 1 EA WALLSTOP WS407CCV 613 IVES 3 EA SILENCERS SR64 BLK IVES

4. GROUP #4: DOOR # 210, 211

3 EA BUTTS TA2714 4.5 X 4.5 613 MCKINNEY 1 EA LOCKSET L9050 06A 613 SCHLAGE 1 EA WALLSTOP WS407CCV 613 IVES 3 EA SILENCERS SR64 BLK IVES

REVISED: 04-16-2019

Content added in Bold underline



5. GROUP #5: DOOR # 102, 213 3 EA BUTTS TA2714 4.5 X 4.5 613 MCKINNEY 1 EA PRIVACY L9456 06AxL583-363xL283-722 613 SCHLAGE (NOTE: LOCATE THUMB LOCK ON RESTROOM SIDE) 1 EA WALLSTOP WS407CCV 613 IVES 3 EA SILENCERS SR64 BLK IVES

6. GROUP #6: DOOR # 203 – Fire Rated 3 EA BUTTS TA2714 4.5 X 4.5 613 MCKINNEY 1 EA PRIVACY L9456 06AxL583-363xL283-722 613 SCHLAGE (NOTE: LOCATE THUMB LOCK ON RESTROOM SIDE) 1 EA CLOSER 4011 72MC 695 LCN OR NORTON 1 EA WALLSTOP WS407CCV 613 IVES 1 SET GASKET PS074 BLK STEELCRAFT

7. GROUP #7: DOOR # 208 (DOUBLE) – Fire Rated

6 EA BUTTS T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 613 MCKINNEY 1 EA PANIC QEL9927L-BE-F LBR x 996L-BE 313 VON DUPRIN OR YALE 1 EA PANIC 9927L-BE-F LBR x 996L-BE 313 VON DUPRIN OR YALE 1 EA CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 72MC 695 LCN OR NORTON 2 EA KICKPLATE K0050 10X2LDW 613 TRIMCO 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 3452 DNB ALUM PEMKO 1 SET GASKET PS074 BLK STEELCRAFT 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT-10 DK BRZ VD 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902-2RS-FA VD 1 EA AUTO OPERATOR 4642 695 LCN 2 EA ACTUATOR 8310-856T LCN 2 EA MOUNTING BOX 8310-868F LCN NOTES: DUE TO FIRE RATING PANIC DEVICES CANNOT BE DOGGED AND WILL REQUIRE ELECTRIFIED HARDWARE TO WORK WITH AUTO OPERATOR.

8. GROUP #8: DOOR # 104A, 215B (DOUBLE) 6 EA BUTTS T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 613 MCKINNEY 2 EA PANIC 9927EO 313 VON DUPRIN OR YALE 2 EA CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 72MC 695 LCN OR NORTON 2 EA KICKPLATE K0050 10X2LDW 613 TRIMCO 1 EA THRESHOLD 2005D (VERIFY DETAIL) ALUM PEMKO 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 3452 DNB ALUM PEMKO 1 SET GASKET PS074 BLK STEELCRAFT

9. GROUP #9: DOOR #: 215A – Noise Control

3 EA BUTTS T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 613 MCKINNEY 1 EA PASSAGE L9010 06A 613 SCHLAGE 1 EA CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 72MC 695 LCN OR NORTON 1 EA KICKPLATE K0050 10X2LDW 613 TRIMCO 1 EA THRESHOLD 272D (VERIFY DETAIL) ALUM PEMKO 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 3452 DNB ALUM PEMKO

REVISED: 04-16-2019




1 EA AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 420APKL ALUM PEMKO 1 SET GASKET 332DR DUR PEMK0

10. GROUP #10: DOOR # 202, 204 – Fire Rated

3 EA BUTTS TA2714 4.5 X 4.5 613 MCKINNEY 1 EA LOCKSET L9060 06A 613 SCHLAGE 1 EA CLOSER 4011 72MC 695 LCN 1 EA WALLSTOP WS407CCV 613 IVES 1 SET GASKET PS074 BLK STEELCRAFT

11. GROUP #11: DOOR #: 100A, 101A (DOUBLE)

6 EA BUTTS T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 613 MCKINNEY 2 EA PANIC 9927L x 996L 313 VON DUPRIN OR YALE 2 EA CYLINDER 20-057 613 SCHLAGE 2 EA CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 72MC 695 LCN 2 EA KICKPLATE K0050 10X2LDW 613 TRIMCO 1 EA THRESHOLD 2005D (VERIFY DETAIL) ALUM PEMKO 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 3452 DNB ALUM PEMKO 1 SET GASKET PS074 BLK STEELCRAFT

12. GROUP #12: DOOR #: 101B (DOUBLE) 6 EA BUTTS T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 613 MCKINNEY 2 EA PANIC 9927L LBR x 996L 313 VON DUPRIN OR YALE 2 EA CYLINDER 20-057 613 SCHLAGE 2 EA CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 72MC 695 LCN OR NORTON 2 EA KICKPLATE K0050 10X2LDW 613 TRIMCO 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 3452 DNB ALUM PEMKO 1 SET GASKET PS074 BLK STEELCRAFT

13. GROUP #13: DOOR #: 205,206

3 EA BUTTS TA2714 4.5 X 4.5 613 MCKINNEY 1 EA PASSAGE ND10 613 SCHLAGE 1 EA WALLSTOP WS407CCV 613 IVES 3 EA SILENCERS SR65 BLK IVES

14. GROUP #14: DOOR #: 214 – Fire Rated

3 EA BUTTS TA2714 4.5 X 4.5 613 MCKINNEY 1 EA LOCKSET L9080 06A 613 SCHLAGE 1 EA CLOSER 4011 72MC 695 LCN OR NORTON 1 EA WALLSTOP WS407CCV 613 IVES 1 SET GASKET PS074 BLK STEELCRAFT

15. GROUP #15: DOOR #: 104B, 105, 107, 300B, 300C, 301C, 301D

3 EA BUTTS TA2714 4.5 X 4.5 613 MCKINNEY 1 EA LOCKSET L9080 06A (Verify Func) 613 SCHLAGE 1 EA WALLSTOP WS407CCV 613 IVES 1 SET GASKET PS074 BLK STEELCRAFT

REVISED: 04-16-2019




16. GROUP #16: DOOR #: 100B, 100D

3 EA BUTTS T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 613 MCKINNEY 1 EA PANIC 99L x 996L 313 VON DUPRIN OR YALE 1 EA CYLINDER 20-057 613 SCHLAGE 1 EA CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 72MC 695 LCN OR NORTON 1 EA KICKPLATE K0050 10X2LDW 613 TRIMCO 1 EA THRESHOLD 272D (VERIFY DETAIL) ALUM PEMKO 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 3452 DNB ALUM PEMKO 1 SET GASKET PS074 BLK STEELCRAFT

17. GROUP #18: DOOR #: 103 3 EA BUTTS T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 613 MCKINNEY 1 EA PANIC 99L x 996L 313 VON DUPRIN OR YALE 1 EA CYLINDER 20-057 613 SCHLAGE 1 EA CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 72MC 695 LCN OR NORTON 1 EA KICKPLATE K0050 10X2LDW 613 TRIMCO

18. GROUP #18: DOOR #: 106 – Fire Rated 3 EA BUTTS T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 613 MCKINNEY 1 EA PASSAGE L9010 06A 613 SCHLAGE 1 EA CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 72MC 695 LCN 1 EA KICKPLATE K0050 10X2LDW 613 TRIMCO

19. GROUP #19: DOOR #: 301A – Fire Rated 3 EA BUTTS T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 613 MCKINNEY 1 EA LOCKSET L9080 06A (Verify Func) 613 SCHLAGE 1 EA CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 72MC 695 LCN OR NORTON 1 EA KICKPLATE K0050 10X2LDW 613 TRIMCO 1 EA THRESHOLD 272D (VERIFY DETAIL) ALUM PEMKO 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 3452 DNB ALUM PEMKO 1 SET GASKET PS074 BLK STEELCRAFT

20. GROUP #20: DOOR #: 300A 3 EA BUTTS T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 613 MCKINNEY 1 EA LOCKSET L9080 06A (Verify Func) 613 SCHLAGE 1 EA CLOSER 4011 72MC 695 LCN OR NORTON 1 EA KICKPLATE K0050 10X2LDW 613 TRIMCO 1 EA THRESHOLD 272D (VERIFY DETAIL) ALUM PEMKO 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 3452 DNB ALUM PEMKO 1 SET GASKET PS074 BLK STEELCRAFT END OF SECTION 08 70 00

REVISED: 04-16-2019



GLAZING 08 80 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Insulating glass units. B. Glazing units. C. Glazing compounds and accessories.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 26 00 - Weather Barriers. B. Section 08 43 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS: Glazing furnished as

part of storefront assembly. C. Section 08 54 13 - Fiberglass Windows: Glazing furnished by window manufacturer.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in

Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2015. C. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal

Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2015). D. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014a. E. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2016. F. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat

Glass; 2012. G. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016. H. ASTM C1376 - Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings

on Flat Glass; 2015. I. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings;

2016. J. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and

Evaluation; 2010. K. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; 2008. L. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors; 2014. M. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient

and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence; 2014. N. NFRC 300 - Test Method for Determining the Solar Optical Properties of Glazing Materials

and Systems; 2014.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Insulating Glass Unit and Glazing Unit Glazing Types: Provide

structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling and installation requirements.

C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.

D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 by 12 inch in size of glass and plastic units, showing coloration.

E. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.



1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and

with at least five years documented experience.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of

glazing compounds.

1.7 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Insulating Glass Units: Provide a ten (10) year manufacturer warranty to include coverage

for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Float Glass Manufacturers:

1. Guardian Industries Corp: www.sunguardglass.com. 2. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com. 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS - EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A. Provide type and thickness of exterior glazing assemblies to support assembly dead loads,

and to withstand live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of glass. 1. Design Pressure:

a. Positive Design Pressure: 22.4 psf. b. Negative Design Pressure: 30 psf.

2. Comply with ASTM E1300 for design load resistance of glass type, thickness, dimensions, and maximum lateral deflection of supported glass.

3. Provide glass edge support system sufficiently stiff to limit the lateral deflection of supported glass edges to less than 1/175 of their lengths under specified design load.

4. Glass thicknesses listed are minimum. B. Vapor Retarder and Air Barrier Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain

continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier. 1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections.

a. Refer to Section 072500. C. Thermal and Optical Performance: Provide glass products with performance properties

as indicated. Performance properties are in accordance with manufacturer's published data as determined with the following procedures and/or test methods: 1. Center of Glass U-Value: Comply with NFRC 100 using Lawrence Berkeley

National Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 6.3 computer program. 2. Center of Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Comply with NFRC 200

using Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 6.3 computer program.

3. Solar Optical Properties: Comply with NFRC 300 test method.


http://www.sunguardglass.com/

http://www.ppgideascapes.com/


2.3 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless noted otherwise.

1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Flat, Class 1 - Clear, Quality-Q3. 2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048, Kind HS and FT. 3. Fully Tempered Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 and 16 CFR 1201 criteria. 4. Tinted Type: ASTM C1036, Class 2 - Tinted, Quality-Q3, color and

performance characteristics as indicated. 5. Thicknesses: As indicated; provide greater thickness as required for exterior glazing

wind load design.

2.4 INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Manufacturers:

1. Guardian Industries Corp: www.sunguardglass.com. 2. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com. 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 2. Coated Glass: Comply with requirements of ASTM C1376 for pyrolytic (hard-

coat) or magnetic sputter vapor deposition (soft-coat) type coatings on flat glass; coated vision glass, Kind CV; coated overhead glass, Kind CO; or coated spandrel glass, Kind CS.

3. Metal Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners. 4. Spacer Color: mill. 5. Edge Seal:

a. Dual-Sealed System: Provide polyisobutylene sealant as primary seal applied between spacer and glass panes, and silicone, polysulfide, or polyurethane sealant as secondary seal applied around perimeter.

6. Color: Black. 7. Purge interpane space with dry air, hermetically sealed.

C. Type 1 by Alum Storefront MFGR, Type 2 supplied by Vinyl Window MFGR Insulating Glass Units: Vision glass, double glazed. Tempered where noted on Type 3. 1. Applications: Exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Space between lites filled with argon. 3. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick. PPG Solarbronze, unless noted

as tempered then provide temered glass. a. Tint: Bronze.

4. Inboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick. PPG Solarbronze 60. Unless noted as tempered then provide temered glass. a. Tint: Clear. b. Coating: Solar control Low-E coating, on #3 surface.

5. Total Thickness: 1 inch. 6. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value), Summer - Center of Glass: 0.45, nominal. (0.35

at Type 5 Fiberglass windows). 7. Visible Light Transmittance (VLT): 35 percent, minimum. 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC):.29 percent, maximum.

2.5 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Butyl Sealant: Single component; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A,

Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color.

2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, with 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option

II. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing


http://www.sunguardglass.com/

http://www.ppgideascapes.com/


rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II.

Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face.

C. Glazing Tape, Back Bedding Mastic Type: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids compound; 5 to 30 cured Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color. 1. Width: As required for application. 2. Thickness: As required for application.

D. Glazing Splines: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C864 Option II; color black.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including

those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may

impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and support framing is ready to receive glazing system.

C. Verify that sealing between joints of glass framing members has been completed effectively. D. Proceed with glazing system installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have

been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry within maximum of 24

hours before glazing. Remove coatings that are not tightly bonded to substrates. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant where required for proper sealant adhesion.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass, gaskets, and other glazing

material manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in glazing referenced standards.

B. Install glazing sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193, GANA (SM), and manufacturer's instructions.

C. Do not exceed edge pressures around perimeter of glass lites as stipulated by glass manufacturer.

D. Set glass lites of system with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. E. Set glass lites in proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as indicated. F. Prevent glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result

of construction operations such as, and not limited to the following; weld splatter, fire-safing, plastering, mortar droppings, etc.

3.4 INSTALLATION - DRY GLAZING METHOD (GASKET GLAZING) A. Application - Exterior and/or Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from either the exterior

or the interior of the building. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket

to attain full contact. D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full

continuous contact.



3.5 CLEANING A. Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application

using solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers. B. Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured. D. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of

Substantial Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.6 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. B. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date

of Substantial Completion.







DIVISION 09 – FINISHES





GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 21 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 09 21 00 – GYPSUM WALLBOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Gypsum board. 2. Water-resistant board. 3. Metal z-furring. 5. Sound batt insulation. 6. Acoustical sealant.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Metal Doors and Frames, Section 08 11 00. B. Thermal Insulation, Section 07 21 00.

1.3 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Building Code requirements govern, if more stringent than those specified herein. Notify

Owner’s Authorized Representative of differences prior to starting Work. B. Where Fire-Rated partitions or Ceilings are noted, construct to obtain specified Rating.

1.4 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES A. Maximum deviation from true plan: 1/8 inch per 10 ft. and 1/16 inch in any running feet.

1.5 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS A. Conform to Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum

Board, GA-216-74, as modified and supplemented herein. B. Recommended materials and methods are mandatory; those proposed by Contractor as

equal or equivalent must be accepted by Owner’s Authorized Representative. C. Referenced Specifications may be obtained from Gypsum Association, 160320 Orrington

Ave., Evanston, IL 60201.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver Products to Site with Manufacturer's original labels intact and legible. B. Identify fire-rated materials with Testing Agency label. C. Protect Gypsum materials against moisture, and Metal materials against rust. Remove any

damaged or discolored materials from job site. D. Do not stack Gypsum Board with long lengths overhanging shorter lengths. E. Do not overload Floor System with stockpiled materials. F. Indicate Adhesive "open time" on Adhesive container label.

1.7 WORK SPACE TEMPERATURE A. Maintain between 55 degrees F and 75 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 24 hours

after Materials have dried.

1.8 VENTILATION A. Maintain sufficient ventilation for proper joint treatment drying and for safe and healthy

working environment for all Workers.



B. Prevent excessive drafts during hot, dry weather.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Accessories A. Standard with Manufacturer, as indicated or required for complete installation.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Board Manufacturer

1. Bestwall, Celotex, Kaiser, Pabco, National Gypsum, US Gypsum, Flintkote, or approved; types as follows:

B. Water-Resistant Panels 2. “Fiberock Aqua-Tough” interior panels, Type X, 5/8-inch thick, complying with

ASTM C 1278, ASTM C 630 and ASTM C1178. 3. Use for all wall surfaces in Bathrooms, Kitchenettes and elsewhere shown on the

Drawings and the Room Finish Schedule. C. All other Board

4. Tapered edge, 5/8 inch thick Type X.

2.3 FASTENERS A. Screws

1. ASTM C-1002, Type S, W, & G for Gypsum Board installation to Sheetmetal, Wood, and Gypsum Board respectively.

B. At single or base layer applications 2. Type W: 1-1/4 inch 3. Type S: 1 inch.

2.4 GYPSUM WALLBOARD TRIM A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Prefinished copolymer fully embedment tapered trims bonded to taping paper.

2. Basis of Design Product: No-coat drywall trims manufactured by Drywall Systems International, or approved equal.

3. Shapes:

a. Outside Corners: No-Coat “UltraCorner,” or approved equal. b. Inside Corners: No-Coat “UltraFlex,” or approved equal. c. No Coat “L-Trim,” or approved equal. d. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where required.

2.5 JOINT TAPE A. At Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C-475, perforated. B. At Water-Resistant Board: As recommended by board manufacturer.

2.6 JOINT COMPOUND A. For Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C-475. B. For Water-Resistant Panels: As recommended by board manufacturer.

2.7 SEALER A. As recommended by manufacturer. Apply at all walls prior to application of texture.



2.8 SPRAY TEXTURE A. USG, Kaiser, "Spray Texture", or approved. B. Provide at all exposed Gypsum Board surfaces.

2.9 SOUND INSULATION BATTS A. Lightweight, unfaced, 3-inch Fiber Glass cavity fill insulation for press-fit installation.

Similar to Sound-SHIELD by John Mansville.

2.10 ACOUSTIC SEALANT A. Percora #BA98, Tremco Miracle #21, USG, or approved. B. Provide at Party Walls between Apartments and at Sound Walls.

2.11 OTHER MATERIALS A. Made or recommended by Gypsum Board Manufacturer. B. Provide all indicated or required for complete installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that surfaces to receive Gypsum Board are accurately located, plumb, square, true,

secure, dry, and otherwise properly prepared. B. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.

3.2 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Follow Referenced Specifications and Manufacturer's directions as amplified hereunder. B. Extend Wallboard to within 1/4 inch of Floor. C. Loosely butt joints. D. Place tapered edges together, except at angles. E. Do not place butt ends against tapered edges. F. Where possible apply Boards without butt joints. G. Where butt joints are necessary, locate as far from Wall and Ceiling centers as possible and

stagger, including joints on opposite sides of Partitions. H. Support Board ends and edges on Framing Members, except for adhesive-applied face layer

of 2-ply assembly. I. At outside corners conceal cut edges with factory edges. J. Maintain 3/8-inch minimum distance between Fastener and Board edge. K. Dimple Board surface 1/32 inch with Fastener; do not fracture Face Paper. L. Secure single-ply Boards and base layer of 2-ply assemblies as follows:

1. Wood Wall Framing: Nail or screw at 7-inch o.c. 2. Wood Ceiling Framing: Nail or screw at 6-inch o.c. 3. Metal Ceiling Framing: Screw at 8 inch o.c. 4. Secure face layer of 2-ply assemblies to base layer as follows: 5. Screws long enough to penetrate Wood Framing at 5/8 inch and through Metal

Framing at least 1/4 inch and spaced 12 inches o.c. along each Supporting Member; or 6. Full Adhesive covering between plies. Until Adhesive develops full bond, temporarily

support Wall face plies in position with Fasteners or Shoring and permanently support Ceiling face plies with Fasteners.

3.3 JOINT, CORNER, AND EDGE TREATMENT A. Reinforce inside corners in accordance with Manufacturer's direction.



B. Treat filled Joints and Fastener holes in accordance with Referenced Specifications. C. Protect external corners and exposed edges with fully embedded copolymer trims, installed

per manufacturer’s directions.

3.4 SOUND INSULATION BATT INSTALLATION A. Cut batts to fit snugly around conduits, junction boxes, pipes, and other obstructions. Press

batts in place for friction fit.

3.5 ACOUSTIC SEALANT INSTALLATION A. Gun or butter Sealant around Electrical Boxes, Pipes, etc., located in or passing through

Party Walls, Sound Walls, and Party Ceilings. B. Provide around Wall perimeters at Party Walls and Sound Walls. C. Permit no voids for sound passage.

3.6 WATER RESISTANT SEALANT A. Provide at raw edges and around cutouts in Water Resistant Gypsum Board.

3.7 GROUTING HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Fill heads and jambs with fast setting Gypsum Compound, type recommended by Gypsum

Board Manufacturer. B. If grouted prior to Gypsum Board installation, leave groove inside to receive Board.

3.8 SURFACE TEXTURE A. At all Walls and Ceiling in restroom

1. Light orange peel texture. 2. Prime all gypsum wallboard and paint with two coats semi-gloss, or satin acrylic latex

paint. Color by Owner.

3.9 REPAIRS A. General

1. After installation and before finishing, correct surface damage and defects. B. Ridging

2. Sand ridges smooth without cutting Joint Tape. 3. Fill concave areas on both sides of ridge with Compound and finish flush and smooth.

C. Cracks 4. Fill with Compound and finish flush and smooth.

3.10 PRODUCT CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,

products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Leave surface ready for Finishing. C. Remove debris from Project Site upon Work completion or sooner, if directed.



TILE 09 30 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 09 30 00 – TILE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for wall applications. B. Cementitious backer board as tile substrate. C. Coated glass mat backer board as tile substrate. D. Ceramic accessories. E. Ceramic trim. F. Non-ceramic trim.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealers. B. Section 09 21 00 - Gypsum Wallboard: Installation of tile backer board.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in

the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2011. B. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile

on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 2011.

C. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 2011.

D. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2011.

E. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 2011.

F. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 2011.

G. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 2011.

H. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 2011.

I. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 2011.

J. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2011.

K. ANSI A118.3 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, WaterCleanable Tile Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2011.

L. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 2011.

M. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for Polymer Modified Cement Grouts for Tile Installation; 2011.

N. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 2011.

O. ANSI A118.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded,



Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation; 2011.

P. ANSI A136.1 - American National Standard for Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile; 2011.

Q. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 2008. R. ASTM C1178/C1178M - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant

Gypsum Backing Panel; 2008. S. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2011.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories.

Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions,

junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal

methods, and polishes and waxes. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. Extra Tile: 10 square feet of each size, color, and surface finish combination.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products

specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum

of 5 years of documented experience.

1.6 MOCK-UP A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up. B. Construct tile mock-up where indicated on the drawings, incorporating all components

specified for the location. 1. Minimum size of mock-up is indicated on the drawings. 2. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar

materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TILE A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.

1. American Olean: www.americanolean.com. 2. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Porcelain Wall Tile: 1. Porcelain Wall Tile Type 1: ANSI A137.1, and as follows:


http://www.americanolean.com/

http://www.daltile.com/


a. Veranda Tones manufactured by Dal-Tile Corporation or approved equivalent product. b. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent. c. Size and Shape: 6 1/2"x20". d. Edges: Square. e. Surface Finish: Unglazed. f. Colors: To be selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard range. g. Trim Units: Matching bead, cove, and surface bullnose shapes in sizes coordinated

with field tile. 2. Porcelain Wall Tile Type 2: ANSI A137.1, and as follows:

a. Cliff Pointe manufactured by Dal-Tile Corporation or approved equivalent product. b. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent. c. Size and Shape: 3 inch square. d. Edges: Square. e. Surface Finish: Unglazed. f. Colors: To be selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard range. g. Trim Units: Matching bead, cove, and surface bullnose shapes in sizes coordinated

with field tile.

2.2 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; same

manufacturer as tile. B. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in

sizes coordinated with field tile. 1. Applications: Use in the following locations:

a. Open Edges: Bullnose. b. Inside Corners: Jointed. c. Floor to Wall Joints: Cove base.

2. Manufacturer: Same as for tile. C. Non-Ceramic Trim: Satin brass anodized extruded aluminum, style and dimensions to suit

application, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive. 1. Applications: Use in the following locations:

a. Open edges of wall tile. b. Open edges of floor tile. c. Transition between floor finishes of different heights.

2. Manufacturer: a. Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com. b. Approved alternate.

2.3 SETTING MATERIALS A. Provide setting materials made by the same manufacturer as grout. B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.4. C. Epoxy Adhesive and Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.3. D. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, thinset mastic type.

2.4 GROUTS A. Manufacturers:

1. Ardex Engineered Cements: www.ardexamericas.com. 2. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 3. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. 4. LATICRETE International, Inc: www.laticrete.com.


http://www.schluter.com/

http://www.ardexamericas.com/

http://www.bostik-us.com/

http://www.custombuildingproducts.com/

http://www.laticrete.com/


5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout.

1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is indicated.

2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less than 1/8 inch wide.

3. Color(s): As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full line. C. Tile Sealant: Gunnable, silicone, siliconized acrylic, or urethane sealant; moisture and mildew

resistant type. 1. Applications: Between tile and plumbing fixtures. 2. Color(s): As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full line.

D. Grout Sealer: Liquid-applied, moisture and stain protection for existing or new Portland cement grout. 1. Composition: Water-based colorless silicone.

2.5 THIN-SET ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9; High density, cementitious, glass fiber

reinforced, 1/2 inch thick; 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners. B. Coated Glass Mat Backer Board: ASTM C1178/C1178M, with coated inorganic fiberglass

mat on both surfaces and integral acrylic coating vapor retarder. C. Mesh Tape: 2-inch wide self-adhesive fiberglass mesh tape.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of

work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that required wall-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable

flatness tolerances. D. Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions.

Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge. E. Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's

instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of dry-set mortar to a feather edge. F. Install tile backer board in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using galvanized

roofing nails or corrosion-resistant bugle head drywall screws. Bed fiberglass self-adhesive tape at all joints and corners with material used to set tiles.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of

ANSI A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and The Tile Council of North America Handbook recommendations.

B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases

neatly. Align floor joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size.

Make grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.



E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings. G. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. I. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. J. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours. K. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. L. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.

3.4 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE A. Over coated glass mat backer board on studs, install in accordance with The Tile Council of

North America Handbook Method W245.

3.5 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.

3.6 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.






RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient sheet flooring. B. Resilient tile flooring. C. Resilient base. D. Installation accessories.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete

slabs and floors.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems

Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2010e1. B. ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile; 2004

(Reapproved 2010)e1. C. ASTM F1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing;

2004 (Reapproved 2009). D. ASTM F1700 - Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Floor Tile; 2004 (reapproved 2010). E. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008. F. ASTM F1913 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing;

2004 (Reapproved 2010). G. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems

Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association; 2011.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance

characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan. D. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Owner's initial

selection. E. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring

manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-floor is acceptable. F. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,

and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a

temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F.

C. Maximum moisture vapor emission of slabs scheduled to receive resilient flooring shall not exceed 3 lbs./1,000 s.f./24 hours at time of application. Refer to Section 01400, Quality Control, for testing requirements.



1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

B. Provide 2 cartons of flooring, 200 lineal feet of base, of each type and color specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET FLOORING A. Slip-Resistent Vinyl Sheet Flooring: Homogeneous, without backing, with color and

pattern throughout full thickness, and: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1303, Type II, without backing, or

ASTM F1913. 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested

in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 3. VOC Content: As specified in Section 01616. 4. Total Thickness and Wear Layer Thickness: 0.080 inch nominal. 5. Sheet Width: 49 inch minimum. 6. Static Load Resistance: 750 psi minimum, when tested as specified in ASTM F1303. 7. Heat welded seams. 8. Integral coved base with cap strip. 9. Pattern: Assurance II. 10. Manufacturers:

a. Mannington Commercial. b. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Vinyl Welding Rod: Solid vinyl bead produced by manufacturer of vinyl flooring for heat welding seams, in color matching field color.

2.2 TILE FLOORING A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness, and:

1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1066, of Class corresponding to type specified.

2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253.

3. Size: 12 x 12 inch. 4. VOC Content: As specified in Section 01616. 5. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 6. Pattern: Cortina Colors. 7. Manufacturers:

a. Tarkett Inc: www.tarkett.com. b. Azrock, by Tarket. c. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Luxury Vinyl Tile: Surface-decorated, with wear layer, and: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F 1700, Class III, Type B -

Embossed Surface. 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested

in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 3. VOC Content: As specified in Section 01616. 4. Size: To be selected. 5. Total Thickness: 0.125 inch. 6. Color and Pattern: To be selected. 7. Manufacturers:

a. Natural Creations by Armstrong.


http://www.tarkett.com/


b. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. C. Static Dissipative Tile: Surface-decorated, with wear layer, and:

1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F 1700, Class III, Type B - Embossed Surface.

2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253.

3. VOC Content: As specified in Section 01616. 4. Size: 12x12 inch. 5. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch. 6. Color and Pattern: To be selected. 7. Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong World Industries b. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.3 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B,

Cove, and as follows: 1. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested

in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 2. Height: 4 inch, provide 6" as noted on drawings. 3. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 4. Finish: Satin. 5. Length: Roll. 6. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards. 7. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops. 8. Manufacturers:

a. Burke Flooring: www.burkemercer.com. b. Johnsonite, Inc: www.johnsonite.com. c. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by

flooring manufacturer. C. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Metal. D. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic. E. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks

that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.

B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive resilient flooring.

C. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.

D. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH.


http://www.burkemercer.com/

http://www.johnsonite.com/

http://www.roppe.com/


1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.

E. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances which would impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces.

F. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within the following limits: 1. Moisture emission rate: Not greater than 3 lb per 1000 sq ft per 24 hours when

tested using calcium chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours. 2. Alkalinity: pH range of 5-9.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and

other defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Clean substrate.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Fit joints tightly. E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door,

terminate flooring under centerline of door. G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and

where indicated. H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to

produce tight joints.

3.4 SHEET FLOORING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. C. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. D. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce

minimum number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns carefully at seams.

E. Seams are prohibited in kitchens, toilet rooms, and custodial closets. F. Double cut sheet at seams. G. Lay flooring with tightly butted seams, without any seam sealer unless otherwise indicated. H. Finish seams in sheet vinyl by heat welding. I. Double cut sheet; provide heat welded seams. J. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under

centerline of door. K. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where

indicated. After installation of flooring, secure metal strips with stainless steel screws. Secure resilient strips by adhesive.

L. Coved Base: Install as detailed on drawings, using coved base filler as backing at floor to wall junction. Extend sheet flooring vertically to height indicated, and cover top edge with metal cap strip.



M. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints.

3.5 TILE FLOORING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed,

unless manufacturer's instructions say otherwise. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. E. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile

pattern. F. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under

centerline of door. G. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to

produce tight joints.

3.6 RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between

joints. B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use

premolded units. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.

3.7 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Clean, seal, and wax resilient flooring products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.8 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.






PROTECTIVE COATINGS 09 80 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 09 80 00 - PROTECTIVE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide protective coatings, complete and in place, in accordance

with the Contract Documents B. Definitions

1. The term "paint," "coatings," or "finishes" as used herein, shall include surface treatments, emulsions, enamels, paints, epoxy resins, and other protective coatings, excepting galvanizing or anodizing, whether used as a pretreatment, primer, intermediate coat, or finish coat.

2. The term "DFT" means minimum dry film thickness, without any negative tolerance. C. The following surfaces shall not be coated, unless specifically noted otherwise in the Contract

Documents: 1. Fibrous Reinforced Plastic (FRP) / fiberglass surfaces 2. Stainless steel or aluminum surfaces 3. Bronze, brass, or copper surfaces 4. Concrete, unless required by items on the concrete coating schedule below or the Drawings 5. Electrical conduit 6. Machined surfaces 7. Grease fittings 8. Glass 9. Equipment nameplates 10. Platform gratings, stair treads, door thresholds, and other walk surfaces, unless specifically

indicated to be coated. D. The coating system schedules summarize the surfaces to be coated, the required surface

preparation, and the coating systems to be applied. Coating notes on the Drawings are used to show or extend the limits of coating schedules, to show exceptions to the schedules, or to clarify or show details for application of the coating systems.

E. Where protective coatings are to be performed by a Subcontractor, the Subcontractor shall possess a valid state license as required for performance of the painting and coating Work called for in this specification and if requested by Owner’s Authorized Representative, shall provide at least five (5) references which show that the Subcontractor has previous successful experience with the indicated or comparable coating systems. Include the name, address, and the telephone number for the Owner’s Authorized Representative of each installation for which the Subcontractor provided the protective coating.

1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.” B. Submittals shall include the following information and be submitted at least 30 Days prior to

commencing protective coating Work: 1. Materials List: Eight copies of a coating materials list showing the manufacturer and the

product number, keyed to the coating systems herein. The list shall be submitted prior to or at the time of submitting samples.

2. Manufacturer's Information: For each coating system to be used, the following data: a. Manufacturer's data sheet for each product proposed, including statements on the

suitability of the material for the intended use. b. Technical and performance information that demonstrates compliance with the

system performance and material requirements.



c. Paint manufacturer's instructions and recommendations on surface preparation and environmental conditions for application.

d. Colors available for each product (where applicable). e. Compatibility of shop and field applied coatings (where applicable). f. Material Safety Data Sheet for each product proposed.

C. Samples 1. Samples of paint, finishes, and other coating materials shall be submitted on 8-1/2 inch x 11

inch sheet metal pieces. Each sheet shall be completely coated over its entire surface with one protective coating material, type, and color.

2. Two sets of color samples to match each color selected by the Owner from the manufacturer's standard color sheets. If custom mixed colors are indicated, the color samples shall be made using color formulations prepared to match the color samples furnished by the Owner. The color formula shall be shown on the back of each color sample.

3. One 1-pound sample of each abrasive proposed to be used for surface preparation for submerged and severe service coating systems.

1.3 SPECIAL CORRECTION OF DEFECTS REQUIREMENTS Inspection: An inspection may be conducted by the Owner’s Authorized Representative during the tenth month following completion of coating Work. When specified for specific systems, the Contractor and a representative of the coating material manufacturer shall attend this inspection. Defective Work shall be repaired in accordance with these specifications and to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Authorized Representative. The Owner’s Authorized Representative may, by written notice to the Contractor, reschedule the inspection to another date within the one year warrantee period or may cancel the inspection altogether. The Contractor is not relieved of its responsibilities to correct defects, whether or not the inspection is conducted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL A. Suitability: The Contractor shall use suitable coating materials as recommended by the

manufacturer. Materials shall comply with Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits applicable at the Site.

B. Material Sources: Where manufacturers and product numbers are listed, it is to show the type and quality of coatings that are required. If a named product does not comply with VOC limits in effect at the time of Bid opening, that product will not be accepted, and the Contractor shall propose a substitution product of equal quality that does comply. Proposed substitute materials will be considered as indicated below. Coating materials shall be materials that have a record of satisfactory performance in industrial plants, manufacturing facilities, and water and wastewater treatment plants.

C. Compatibility: In any coating system only compatible materials from a single manufacturer shall be used in the Work. Particular attention shall be directed to compatibility of primers and finish coats. If necessary, a barrier coat shall be applied between existing prime coat and subsequent field coats to ensure compatibility.

D. Containers: Coating materials shall be sealed in containers that plainly show the designated name, formula or specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture, and name of manufacturer, all of which shall be plainly legible at the time of use.

E. Colors: Colors and shades of colors of coatings shall be as indicated or selected by the Owner. Each coat shall be of a slightly different shade to facilitate inspection of surface coverage of each coat. Finish colors shall be as selected from the manufacturer's standard color samples by the Owner.



F. Substitute or "Or-Equal" Products 1. To establish equality, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory documentation from the

manufacturer of the proposed substitute or "or-equal" product that the material meets the indicated requirements and is equivalent or better in the following properties:

a. Quality b. Durability c. Resistance to abrasion and physical damage d. Life expectancy e. Ability to recoat in future f. Solids content by volume g. Dry film thickness per coat h. Compatibility with other coatings i. Suitability for the intended service j. Resistance to chemical attack k. Temperature limitations during application and in service l. Type and quality of recommended undercoats and topcoats m. Ease of application n. Ease of repairing damaged areas o. Stability of colors

2. Protective coating materials shall be standard products produced by recognized manufacturers who are regularly engaged in production of such materials for essentially identical service conditions. When requested, the Contractor shall provide the Owner’s Authorized Representative with the names of not less than 10 successful applications of the proposed manufacturer's products that comply with these requirements.

3. If a proposed substitution requires changes in the Work, the Contractor shall bear such costs involved as part of the Work.

2.2 NON-SUBMERGED INDUSTRIAL COATING SYSTEMS

A. System 10 - Alkyd Enamel 1. Materials

Primer manufacturer's recommendation

Finish Coat

Type high quality alkyd, medium long enamel

Demonstrated suitable for ferrous, galvanized, and nonferrous surfaces in industrial exposure, producing high gloss surface that is resistant to mild corrosion and chemical fumes, has good color and gloss retention, good weathering, and sunlight resistance

VOC Content, max 428 grams per liter

2. Application and manufacturers

Surface Preparation

Prime Coat (DFT = 2 to 4 mils)

Finish Coat (DFT = 2 to 4 mils)

Total System DFT



SSPC SP-6

Ameron Amercoat 5105

Ameron Amercoat 5450

4 to 8 mils Tnemec Series N69 Tnemec Series 2H

Devoe Devguard 4120

Devoe Devguard 4308

B. System 20 - Acrylic Latex 1. Material

Primer Product, surface preparation, and DFT as recommended by manufacturer for the surface

Finish Type Single component, water based acrylic latex, with fungicide

VOC Content, max 180 grams per gallon

Demonstrated suitable for PVC piping, weather and mild chemical resistance, excellent color and gloss retention


Surface Preparation Finish (at least 2 coats required)

Total System DFT

SSPC SP1, min Ameron Amercoat 220 primer plus 6 mils Carboline Carbocrylic 3359

Tnemec Tneme-Cryl 6

2.3 SUBMERGED AND SEVERE SERVICE COATING SYSTEMS

A. System 50 - Amine Cure Epoxy 1. Material

Type high build, amine cure epoxy

VOC content, g/L max 220

Demonstrated suitable for steel, long term immersion in water and wastewater, resistant to corrosion, chemical fumes, good color retention

Certification NSF 61 if in contact with potable water




Surface Preparation Products (3 coats or more)

Total System DFT

SSPC SP10

Ameron Amercoat 395 FD 15 to 17 mils

For non-submerged valves and other equipment, DFT = 10 to 12 mils

Carboline Carboguard 891

Devoe Bar-Rust 233H

B. System 52- Epoxy, Immersion - Water Structures

1. Materials: In accordance with AWWA D102 - Coating Steel-Water Storage Tanks, System ICS-2.

Type 2 component epoxy, polyamide or amine-cure type

Demonstrated suitable for Steel, long term immersion in potable water

VOC content, g/L max 366

Certification required NSF 61


Surface Preparation

First Coat (2 - 4 mils)

Second Coat (3 - 5 mils)

Finish Coat (4 - 6 mils)

Total System DFT

SSPC SP10

Ameron Amercoat 395FD



9 - 15 mils




Tnemec Pota-Pox N140F

Tnemec N140F Tnemec N140F

2.4 SPECIAL COATING SYSTEMS A. System 108 - Aluminum Metal Isolation

1. Material Type high build polyamide epoxy with chemical and

abrasion resistance Demonstrated suitable for concrete and aluminum substrates, to isolate

aluminum from contact with concrete and the resulting chemical degradation

VOC content, max 250



2. Application and manufacturers Surface Preparation Coating

(DFT = 16 - 20 mils) SSPC SP1 Ameron Amercoat 351

Sherwin Wiliams Macropoxy 646 Tnemec Epoxoline 80

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. The Contractor shall require the protective coating manufacturer to furnish a qualified technical

representative to visit the Site for technical support as may be necessary to resolve field problems.

3.2 WORKMANSHIP A. Skilled craftsmen and experienced supervision shall be used on coating Work. B. Coating shall be done in a workmanlike manner so as to produce an even film of uniform

thickness. Edges, corners, crevices, and joints shall receive special attention to insure thorough surface preparation. The finished surfaces shall be free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and finish. The hiding shall be so complete that the addition of another coat would not increase the hiding. Special attention shall be given so that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and similar areas receive a film thickness equivalent to adjacent areas, and installations shall be protected by the use of drop cloths or other precautionary measures.

C. Damage to other surfaces resulting from the Work shall be cleaned, repaired, and refinished to original condition.

3.3 STORAGE, MIXING, AND THINNING OF MATERIALS

A. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Unless otherwise indicated, the coating manufacturer's printed recommendations and instructions for thinning, mixing, handling, applying, and protecting its coating materials, for preparation of surfaces for coating, and for other procedures relative to coating shall be strictly observed.

B. Coating materials shall be used within the manufacturer's recommended shelf life. C. Storage and Mixing: Coating materials shall be stored under the conditions recommended by

the Product Data Sheets, and shall be thoroughly stirred, strained, and kept at a uniform consistency during application. Coatings from different manufacturers shall not be mixed together.

3.4 PREPARATION FOR COATING A. General: Surfaces to receive protective coatings shall be prepared as indicated prior to

application of coatings. The Contractor shall examine surfaces to be coated and shall correct surface defects before application of any coating material. Marred or abraded spots on shop-primed and on factory-finished surfaces shall receive touch-up restoration prior to any field coating application. Surfaces to be coated shall be dry and free of visible dust.

B. Protection of Surfaces Not to be Coated: Surfaces that are not to receive protective coatings shall be protected during surface preparation, cleaning, and coating operations.

C. Hardware, lighting fixtures, switchplates, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not to be painted shall be removed, masked, or otherwise protected. Drop cloths shall be provided to prevent coating materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. The working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be



protected from damage during surface preparation and coating operations. Openings in motors shall be masked to prevent entry of coating or other materials.

D. Care shall be exercised not to damage adjacent Work during blasting operations. Spraying shall be conducted under carefully controlled conditions. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for and shall promptly repair any and all damage to adjacent Work or adjoining property occurring from blasting or coating operations.

E. Protection of Painted Surfaces: Cleaning and coating shall be coordinated so that dust and other contaminants from the preparation process will not fall on wet, newly-coated surfaces.

3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION STANDARDS A. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Standards. The following referenced standards for

surface preparation according to specifications of the SSPC shall form a part of this specification:

1. SSPC SP1 - Solvent Cleaning: Removal of oil, grease, soil, salts, and other soluble contaminants by cleaning with solvent, vapor, alkali, emulsion, or steam.

2. SSPC SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning: Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, by hand chipping, scraping, sanding, and wire brushing.

3. SSPC SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning: Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, by power tool chipping, descaling, sanding, wire brushing, and grinding.

4. SSPC SP5 - White Metal Blast Cleaning: Removal of all visible rust, oil, grease, soil, dust, mill scale, paint, oxides, corrosion products and foreign matter by blast cleaning.

5. SSPC SP6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning: Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except that staining shall be limited to no more than 33 percent of each square inch of surface area.

6. SSPC SP7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning: Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose paint.

7. SSPC SP10 Near-White Blast Cleaning : Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except that staining shall be limited to no more than 5 percent of each square inch of surface area.

8. SSPC-SP13 Surface Preparation of Concrete: Removal of protrusions, laitance and efflorescence, existing coatings, form-release agents, and surface contamination by detergent or steam cleaning, abrasive blasting, water jetting, or impact or power tool methods as appropriate for the condition of the surface and the requirements of the coating system.

3.6 FERROUS METAL SURFACE PREPARATION (UNGALVANIZED)

A. The minimum abrasive blasting surface preparation shall be as indicated in the coating system schedules included at the end of this Section. Where there is a conflict between these requirements and the coating manufacturer's printed recommendations for the intended service, the higher degree of cleaning shall apply.

B. Workmanship for metal surface preparation shall be in conformance with the current SSPC Standards and this Section. Blast-cleaned surfaces shall match the standard samples available from the National Association of Corrosion Engineers, NACE Standard TM-01-70 - Visual Standard for Surfaces of New Steel Airblast Cleaned with Sand Abrasive and TM-01-75 - Visual Standard for Surfaces of New Steel Centrifugally Blast Cleaned with Steel Grit.

C. Oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface contaminants shall be removed by solvent cleaning per SSPC SP1 - Solvent Cleaning prior to blast cleaning.



D. Sharp edges shall be rounded or chamfered, and burrs and surface defects and weld splatter shall be ground smooth prior to blast cleaning.

E. The type and size of abrasive shall be selected to produce a surface profile that meets the coating manufacturer's recommendation for the particular product and service conditions. Abrasives for submerged and severe service coating systems shall be clean, hard, sharp cutting crushed slag. Automated blasting systems shall not be used for surfaces that will be in submerged service. Metal shot or grit shall not be used for surfaces that will be in submerged service, even if subsequent abrasive blasting will use hard, sharp cutting crushed slag.

F. Abrasive shall not be reused unless an automated blasting system is used for surfaces that will be in non-submerged service. For automated blasting systems, clean oil-free abrasives shall be maintained. The abrasive mix shall include at least 50 percent grit.

G. The Contractor shall comply with the applicable federal, state, and local air pollution control regulations for blast cleaning.

H. Compressed air for air blast cleaning shall be supplied at adequate pressure from well-maintained compressors equipped with oil and moisture separators that remove at least 95 percent of the contaminants.

I. Surfaces shall be cleaned of dust and residual particles of the cleaning operation by dry air blast cleaning, vacuuming, or another approved method prior to painting.

J. Enclosed areas and other areas where dust settling is a problem shall be vacuum-cleaned and wiped with a tack cloth.

K. Damaged or defective coating shall be removed by the blast cleaning to meet the clean surface requirements before recoating.

L. If the required abrasive blast cleaning will damage adjacent WORK, the area to be cleaned is less than 100 square feet, and the coated surface will not be submerged in service, then SSPC SP2 or SSPC SP3 may be used.

M. Shop-applied coatings of unknown composition shall be completely removed before the indicated coatings are applied. Valves, castings, ductile or cast iron pipe, and fabricated pipe or equipment shall be examined for the presence of shop-applied temporary coatings. Temporary coatings shall be completely removed by solvent cleaning per SSPC SP1 before the abrasive blast cleaning has been started.

N. Shop primed equipment shall be solvent-cleaned in the field before finish coats are applied.

3.7 FERROUS METAL SURFACE PREPARATION (GALVANIZED) A. Galvanized ferrous metal shall be alkaline cleaned per SSPC SP1 to remove oil, grease, and

other contaminants detrimental to adhesion of the protective coating system, followed by brush off blast cleaning per SSPC SP7.

B. Pretreatment coatings of surfaces shall be in accordance with the printed recommendations of the coating manufacturer.

3.8 SURFACE PREPARATION OF FERROUS SURFACES WITH EXISTING COATINGS,

EXCLUDING STEEL RESERVOIR INTERIORS A. General: Grease, oil, heavy chalk, dirt, or other contaminants shall be removed by solvent or

detergent cleaning prior to abrasive blast cleaning. The generic type of the existing coatings shall be determined by laboratory testing.

B. Abrasive Blast Cleaning: The Contractor shall provide the degree of cleaning indicated in the coating system schedule for the entire surface to be coated. If the degree of cleaning is not indicated in the schedule, deteriorated coatings shall be removed by abrasive blast cleaning to SSPC SP6. Areas of tightly adhering coatings shall be cleaned to SSPC SP7, with the remaining thickness of existing coating not to exceed 3-mils.

C. Incompatible Coatings: If coatings to be applied are not compatible with existing coatings the Contractor shall apply intermediate coatings per the manufacturer's recommendation for the



indicated coating system or shall completely remove the existing coating prior to abrasive blast cleaning. A small trial application shall be conducted for compatibility prior to painting large areas.

D. Unknown Coatings: Coatings of unknown composition shall be completely removed prior to application of new coatings.

E. Water Abrasive or Wet Abrasive Blast Cleaning: Where indicated or where Site conditions do not permit dry abrasive blasting for industrial coating systems due to dust or air pollution considerations, water abrasive blasting or wet abrasive blasting may be used. In both methods, paint-compatible corrosion inhibitors shall be used, and coating application shall begin as soon as the surfaces are dry. Water abrasive blasting shall be done using high pressure water with sand injection. In both methods, the equipment used shall be commercially produced equipment with a successful service record. Wet blasting methods shall not be used for submerged or severe service coating systems unless indicated.

3.9 PLASTIC, FIBER GLASS AND NONFERROUS METALS SURFACE PREPARATION A. Plastic and fiber glass surfaces shall be sanded or brush off blast cleaned prior to solvent

cleaning with a chemical compatible with the coating system primer. B. Non-ferrous metal surfaces shall be solvent-cleaned SSPC SP1 followed by sanding or brush-off

blast cleaning SSPC SP7. C. Surfaces shall be clean and dry prior to coating application.

3.10 SHOP COATING REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise indicated, items of equipment or parts of equipment which are not submerged

in service shall be shop-primed and then finish-coated in the field after installation with the indicated or selected color. The methods, materials, application equipment, and other details of shop painting shall comply with this Section. If the shop primer requires topcoating within a specific period of time, the equipment shall be finish-coated in the shop and then be touched up after installation.

B. Items of equipment or parts and surfaces of equipment which are submerged or inside an enclosed hydraulic structure when in service, with the exception of pumps and valves, shall have surface preparation and coating performed in the field.

C. The interior surfaces of steel water reservoirs, except for Part A surfaces, shall have surface preparation and coating Work performed in the field.

D. For certain pieces of equipment it may be undesirable or impractical to apply finish coatings in the field. Such equipment may include engine generator sets, equipment such as electrical control panels, switchgear or main control boards, submerged parts of pumps, ferrous metal passages in valves, or other items where it is not possible to obtain the indicated quality in the field. Such equipment shall be primed and finish-coated in the shop and touched up in the field with the identical material after installation. The Contractor shall require the manufacturer of each such piece of equipment to certify as part of its Shop Drawings that the surface preparation is in accordance with these specifications. The coating material data sheet shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings for the equipment.

E. For certain small pieces of equipment the manufacturer may have a standard coating system that is suitable for the intended service conditions. In such cases, the final determination of suitability will be made during review of the Shop Drawing submittals. Equipment of this type generally includes only indoor equipment such as instruments, small compressors, and chemical metering pumps.

F. Shop-painted surfaces shall be protected during shipment and handling by suitable provisions including padding, blocking, and the use of canvas or nylon slings. Primed surfaces shall not be exposed to the weather for more than 2 months before being topcoated, or less time if recommended by the coating manufacturer.



G. Damage to shop-applied coatings shall be repaired in accordance with this Section and the coating manufacturer's printed instructions.

H. The Contractor shall make certain that the shop primers and field topcoats are compatible and meet the requirements of this Section. Copies of applicable coating manufacturer's data sheets shall be submitted with equipment Shop Drawings.

3.11 APPLICATION OF COATINGS A. The application of protective coatings to steel substrates shall be in accordance with SSPC PA1 -

Paint Application Specification No. 1. B. Cleaned surfaces and each coat shall be inspected prior to applying each succeeding coat. The

Contractor shall schedule such inspection with the Owner’s Authorized Representative in advance.

C. Blast cleaned ferrous metal surfaces shall be painted before any rusting or other deterioration of the surface occurs. Blast cleaning shall be limited to only those surfaces that can be coated in the same day.

D. Coatings shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and this Section, whichever has the most stringent requirements.

E. Special attention shall be given to edges, angles, weld seams, flanges, nuts and bolts, and other places where insufficient film thicknesses are likely to occur. Use stripe painting with a brush in these areas.

F. Special attention shall be given to materials that will be joined so closely that proper surface preparation and application are not possible. Such contact surfaces shall be coated prior to assembly or installation.

G. Finish coats, including touch-up and damage repair coats shall be applied in a manner that will present a uniform texture and color matched appearance.

H. Coatings shall not be applied under the following conditions: 1. Temperatures exceeding the manufacturer's recommended maximum and minimum

allowable. 2. Concrete surfaces will be in direct sunlight during application or within 3 hours after

application. 3. Dust or smoke laden atmosphere. 4. Damp or humid weather. 5. Substrate or air temperature is less than 5 degrees F above the dewpoint. 6. Air temperature is expected to drop below 40 degrees F or less than 5 degrees F above the

dewpoint within 8 hours after application of coating. 7. Wind conditions are not calm.

I. Dewpoint shall be determined by use of a sling psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Dept. of Commerce, Weather Bureau psychometric tables.

J. Unburied steel piping shall be abrasive blast cleaned and primed before installation. K. Finish coats shall be applied after concrete, masonry, and equipment installation is complete,

and the working areas are clean and dust free.

3.12 CURING OF COATINGS A. The Contractor shall maintain curing conditions in accordance with the conditions recommended

by the coating material manufacturer or by this Section, whichever is the most stringent, prior to placing the completed coating system into service.

B. In the case of enclosed areas, forced air ventilation, using heated air if necessary, may be required until the coatings have fully cured.



3.13 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING Unburied (exposed) pipes in structures and in chemical pipe trenches shall be color-code painted. Colors shall be as selected by the Owner or as indicated.

3.14 SHOP AND FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING A. General: The Contractor shall give the Owner’s Authorized Representative a minimum of 3

Days advance notice of the start of any field surface preparation or coating application, and a minimum of 7 Days advance notice of the start of any surface preparation activity in the shop.

B. Such Work shall be performed only in the presence of the Owner’s Authorized Representative, unless the Owner’s Authorized Representative has granted prior approval to perform such Work in its absence.

C. Inspection by the Owner’s Authorized Representative, or the waiver of inspection of any particular portion of the Work, shall not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with these Specifications.

D. Scaffolding shall be erected and moved to locations where requested by the Owner’s Authorized Representative to facilitate inspection. Additional illumination shall be furnished on areas to be inspected.

E. Inspection Devices: The Contractor shall furnish inspection devices in good working condition for the detection of holidays and measurement of dry film thicknesses of coatings. Dry-film thickness gauges shall be made available for the Owner’s Authorized Representative’s use while coating is being done, until final acceptance of such coatings. The Contractor shall furnish the services of a trained operator of the holiday detection devices until the final acceptance of such coatings. Holiday detection devices shall be operated only in the presence of the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

F. Holiday Testing: The CONTRACTOR shall test for continuity all coated ferrous surfaces inside a steel reservoir, other surfaces that will be submerged in water or other liquids, surfaces that are enclosed in a vapor space in such structures, and surfaces coated with any of the submerged and severe service coating systems. Areas that contain discontinuities shall be marked and repaired or recoated in accordance with the coating manufacturer's printed instructions and then be retested.

1. Coatings with thickness exceeding 20-mils total DFT: Pulse-type holiday detector such as Tinker & Rasor Model AP-W, D.E. Stearns Co. Model 14/20, or equal shall be used. The unit shall be adjusted to operate at the voltage required to cause a spark jump across an air gap equal to twice the required coating thickness.

2. Coatings with thickness of 20-mils or less total DFT: Tinker & Rasor Model M1 non-destructive type holiday detector, K-D Bird Dog, or equal shall be used. The unit shall operate at less than 75 volts. For thicknesses between 10- and 20-mils, a non-sudsing type wetting agent, such as Kodak Photo-Flo or equal, shall be added to the water prior to wetting the detector sponge.

G. Film Thickness Testing: On ferrous metals, the dry film coating thickness shall be measured in accordance with the SSPC Paint Application Specification No. 2 using a magnetic type dry film thickness gauge such as Mikrotest Model FM, Elcometer Model 111/1EZ, or equal. Each coat shall be tested for the correct thickness. No measurements shall be made until at least 8 hours after application of the coating. On non-ferrous metals and other substrates, the coating thicknesses shall be measured at the time of application using a wet film gauge.

H. Surface Preparation: Evaluation of blast cleaned surface preparation will be based upon comparison of the blasted surfaces with the standard samples available from NACE, using NACE standards TM-01-70 and TM-01-75.



3.15 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULE, FERROUS METAL - NOT GALVANIZED Surface Type

Surface / Equipment / Area Description

Surface Preparation Requirements

System No.

FM-1 All surfaces indoors and outdoors, exposed or covered, except those included below.

Commercial blast cleaning SSPC SP6

(10) Alkyd Enamel

FM-3 Surfaces of equipment and ferrous surfaces submerged or intermittently submerged in potable water, utility water, and wastewater including all surfaces lower than 2 feet above high water level in hydraulic structures, and all surfaces inside enclosed hydraulic structures and vents (excluding shop-coated valves, couplings, pumps). Any surface that regularly may come in contact with wash down water or raceway water shall be coated with this system.

White metal blast cleaning SSPC SP5

(50) Amine cure epoxy

FM-8 Where indicated, ferrous surfaces in water passages and submerged surfaces of all pumps which have discharge size of 4 inches or larger.

White metal blast cleaning SSPC SP5


FM-11 Buried surfaces that are not indicated to be coated elsewhere.

Near white metal blast cleaning SSPC SP10


.

3.16 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULE, NON-FERROUS METAL, PLASTIC, FIBER GLASS A. Where isolated non-ferrous parts are associated with equipment or piping, the CONTRACTOR

shall use the coating system for the adjacent connected surfaces. Do not coat handrails, gratings, frames or hatches. Only primers recommended by the coating manufacturer shall be used.

Surface Type

Surface / Equipment / Area Description

Surface Preparation Requirements

System No.

NFS-1 All exposed surfaces, indoors and outdoors, except those included below.

Solvent cleaned SSPC SP1

(10) Alkyd enamel

NFS-4 Polyvinyl chloride plastic piping, indoors and outdoors, or in structures, not submerged.

Solvent cleaned SSPC SP1

(20) Acrylic latex



PAINTING 09 90 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 09 90 00 – PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. Contractor to paint the interior and exterior of the new structures after satisfactory completion of siding installation with 2 coats 100% acrylic latex enamel 1 color (color to be selected by owner).

PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 PAINT

A. Paint to be Benjamin Moore collection 096 Exterior acrylic soft gloss enamel, Sherwin Williams A100 Semi Gloss enamel, Glidden endurance Semi Gloss enamel, (or approved Equal) 100% acrylic latex enamel exterior Semi Gloss

2.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver in original unopened containers B. Do not open containers or remove labels until Owner’s Authorized Representative inspects C. Store in suitable location where directed D. Protect against contamination by foreign matter E. Remove unacceptable material from project site

2.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Follow manufacturer’s directions. B. Minimum ambient air and surface temperature for 24 hours prior to and during application and

until film is dry hard thereafter 40 Deg F. C. Do not work where dust or insects are present. D. Do not work where inclement weather may damage surface.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean all surfaces prior to painting B. Existing wood surfaces shall be shall be scraped and sanded to remove all loose or scaling paint

and feathered smooth, remove sanding residue C. Fill holes, cracks and other defects

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Prime coat applied by fiber cement siding manufacturer B. Touch up all cut edges with primer and finish coats C. Prime all bare wood D. Apply 2 coats semi gloss 100% acrylic latex enamel exterior house paint E. Allow a minimum of 4 hours dry time between coats



PAINTING 09 90 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building



INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING 09 96 70 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 09 96 70 – INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Intumescent coating capable of providing a fire resistant barrier as shown on the Drawings.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel Framing 2. Section 05 31 13 – Steel Floor Decking 3. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications 4. Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping 5. Section 09 20 00 – Gypsum Wallboard 6. Section 09 90 00 – Painting

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Fire Resistance Directory B. Test Requirements, Reference Standards and Industry References:

1. ASTM E119,”Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials” 2. ASTM E84, “Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials” 3. ASTM D2240, “Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hardness” 4. ASTM D2794, “Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of

Rapid Deformation (Impact)” 5. ASTM D4060, “Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the

Taber Abraser” 6. ASTM D4541, “Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable

Adhesion Testers” 7. ASTM E329-09, “Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and

Testing” 8. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 251 9. Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry, AWCI Technical Manual 12-B, current edition. 10. Underwriters Laboratories (UL), www.ul.com; ANSI/UL263 11. National Fireproofing Contractors Association (NFCA), www.nfca-online.org/ 12. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC), www.sspc.org/


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company responsible for the manufacture of fire protection materials with local direct technical employee(s) (as distinct from distributors or authorized agents) readily available at the project site. Intumescent coatings shall be manufactured under the follow-up services program of Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) and bear the UL label (mark). Manufacturer’s technical representative to be on site during start of installation and be generally available on site as requested during the application process.

B. Installer Qualifications: Engage experienced Installer certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the intumescent coatings manufacturer as having the necessary training to install manufacturer's products, and otherwise have the experience and staff to properly perform the installation. Installer shall be trained by the intumescent coatings manufacturer’s direct employee(s) (as distinct from distributors or authorized agents).

C. Installation: Verify steel members have been properly prepared, including the use of a compatible primer, and install intumescent coatings in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations published in their product technical literature and/or provided by manufacturer.

D. Product Identification: Label packages (pail or bucket) with manufacturer name, product name, expiration date, freeze tag, UL label (mark).

E. Special Inspection: Contractor to employ a qualified independent inspection and testing agency to perform field quality control testing services in accordance with AWCI Technical Manual 12-B, local building code and Authority Having Jurisdiction requirements.

F. Inspection and Testing Agency Qualifications: ASTM E329-09, “Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and Testing” and AWCI Technical Manual 12-B.


http://www.ul.com/

http://www.nfca-online.org/

http://www.sspc.org/


G. Field Constructed Mockups: Prior to installing intumescent coatings, Installer shall apply products specified for exposed applications to demonstrate aesthetic qualities and workmanship. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1. Location: As determined in the field. 2. Extent of Mockups: Approximately 5 sq. ft. of surface for each product indicated. 3. Notify Owner’s Authorized Representative one week in advance of the dates and times when

mockups will be built. 4. Obtain Owner’s Authorized Representative's written acceptance of mockups before start of

actual unit of work. 5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging completed units of work. a. Accepted mockups in undisturbed condition at time of substantial completion may

become part of completed unit of work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each intumescent coating indicated on drawings and Finish Schedule. B. Product certificates from manufacturer documenting intumescent coatings comply with specified

requirements including those for fire test response characteristics and compatibility with adhesives, primers, and other surface coatings on substrates indicated to receive intumescent coatings.

C. Fire Resistance Rating Listings: UL, or other accredited testing agency indicating type and size of steel member to receive intumescent coatings and minimum dry thickness (mils) to achieve specified fire resistance rating.

D. Qualification Data: Installer to demonstrate capabilities and experience on completed projects, which are comparable in size and scope by providing the following information: 1. Project location: City, State, and Country 2. Scope of work: project type, contract valuation 3. Completion date 4. Architect: firm and contact information 5. Owner: name and contact information


A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with manufacturer’s labels intact and legible.

B. Install intumescent coatings prior to expiration date included on packaging. Properly discard expired product.

C. Store intumescent coatings protected from direct sunlight and maintained at a temperature and conditions as specified by the manufacturer.


A. Environmental Conditions: 1. Do not install Intumescent Coatings when ambient or substrate temperatures are, or prior to

full cure will be, outside the manufacturer’s recommended installation temperatures, unless temporary protection and heating/cooling is provided to maintain temperatures within the prescribed range for the period specified by the manufacturer.

2. Do not install intumescent coatings when relative humidity is outside the limits established by the manufacturer. Consult manufacturer to determine precautions that may be implemented to prevent condensation from forming on the steel during application of fireproofing.

3. Do not install intumescent coatings when relative humidity exceeds 80%. Consult manufacturer to determine precautions that may be implemented to prevent condensation from forming on the steel during application of fireproofing.

B. Ventilation: Ventilate areas where intumescent coatings will be installed by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation during and after application until fireproofing dries thoroughly.

1.7 SEQUENCING

A. Sequence and coordinate application of intumescent coatings with related work specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements:



1. Coordinate installation of intumescent coatings with other items of work that may interfere with proper installation of coatings.

2. Do not begin applying intumescent coatings until clips, hangers, supports, and other welded connections have been installed. Intumescent coatings manufacturer must approve in writing any clips, hangers, supports or connections that may installed over coating using mechanical or adhesive devices.

3. Provide temporary enclosures as necessary to prevent deterioration of intumescent coatings due to exposure to unfavorable environmental conditions.

4. Take appropriate steps to avoid abrasion and other damage to the applied intumescent coatings during construction operations.

5 Do not protect or conceal structural members to which intumescent coatings have been applied until each area has been inspected, tested, and corrections have been made to any deficient areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIREPROOFING

A. Intumescent coatings: Factory mixed formulation consisting of a modified heavy bodied coating, water based, with inorganic reinforcing fibers (non-asbestos, non fiber-glass) for spray application. 1. Products:

a. Hilti Fire Finish CFP-SP WB by Hilti, Inc., (800) 879-8000, www.us.hilti.com b. Or Approved Equal

B. Physical Characteristics: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials, ASTM E 84 (UL 723): Class A Rating.

a. Flame Spread: 0 b. Smoke Development 45

2. Durometer Hardness, ASTM D2240: 96 Shore A 3. Impact Resistance, ASTM D2794: 93 in-lb 4. Abrasion Resistance, ASTM D4060: 0.140 g/1000 cycles 5. Adhesion, ASTM D4541: 507 psi

2.2 AUXILIARY FIREPROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary fireproofing materials that are compatible with intumescent coating products and substrates and are approved by UL or other accredited testing agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in the fire resistive designs indicated.

B. Substrate Primers: For use on each different substrate, provide primer that complies with the following requirements: 1. Primer approved in writing by manufacturer of intumescent coatings, and applied in full

compliance with the primer manufacturer’s recommendations. Primer must be fully cured prior to installation of the intumescent coating.

C. Topcoats: Suitable for application over applied intumescent coatings; of type recommended in writing by intumescent coatings manufacturer for each fire resistance design. Color of topcoat shall be as selected by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Colors shall not be limited to manufacturer's standard colors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Cover other work subject to damage from fall out or overspray of intumescent coatings materials during application. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations, protect the environment, and ensure maintaining adequate ambient conditions for temperature and ventilation.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing, including oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers, and loose mill scale.

C. Prime substrates except where compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive intumescent coatings. Primer must be fully cured prior to applying intumescent coatings.


http://www.us.hilti.com/


D. Apply intumescent coatings: Protect intumescent coatings from rain, direct sunlight, high humidity, strong wind (with dirt, dust or sand) during the application and drying phases. Do not apply an additional coat of intumescent coating until previous layer has fully cured.

E. For applications visible upon completion of project, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of fireproofing. Remove minor projections that would telegraph through fire resistive products after application.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Coordinate application of intumescent coatings with other construction to allow for proper application and minimize need to repair damage.

B. Comply with intumescent coatings manufacturer's instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to convey and install products, as applicable to the particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire resistance ratings indicated.

C. Coat substrates with primer and allow proper cure time prior to applying intumescent coatings as recommended by intumescent coatings manufacturer for material and application indicated.

D. Apply intumescent coatings identical to mock-ups.

3.3 INSTALLING INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING A. Apply intumescent coatings in thicknesses required to achieve fire resistance ratings designated for

each condition. B. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for type of material and matching

finish approved for field erected mockup.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and Testing Agency: Coordinate installation of fireproofing with Contractor’s

independent inspection and testing agency. B. Inspection & testing shall be in accordance with AWCI Technical Manual 12-B. C. Testing agency will promptly report test results in writing to the installer and Owner’s Authorized

Representative. D. Remove and replace intumescent coatings where test results indicate that fireproofing does not

comply with specified requirements for adhesion. E. Apply additional intumescent coatings per manufacturer's directions where test results indicate that

the thickness does not comply with specified requirements. F. Additional Testing: Where intumescent coatings are removed and replaced or repaired,

Contractor’s inspection and testing agency shall perform additional testing to determine compliance with specified requirements.

3.5 CLEANING, REPAIR, AND PROTECTION

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove product over spray and fall out from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

B. Cure intumescent coatings according to manufacturer's recommendations. C. Protect intumescent coatings from damage during construction. D Repair or replace work that was not properly protected from damage during construction in

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. E. Ensure full curing of intumescent coating prior to application of top coat.




DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES





TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 13 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 10 28 13 – TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Toilet and bath accessories.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Rough Carpentry, Section 06 10 00.

1.3 Submittals A. Product data. B. Accessory schedule. C. Shop Drawings: Show rough opening and installation details.

1. Manufacturer's standard drawings may be used provided they indicate required information.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. B. Do not remove protective covers until Final Project Clean-up. Deliver Keys to Owner’s

Authorized Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL A. Verify type of Wall Construction prior to ordering. Provide all required Fasteners, Clamps,

Adapters, etc., necessary for conditions encountered.

2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Bobrick products are the basis of design. Alternate manufacturers may be considered.

2.3 TOWEL DISPENSER A. Paper towel dispenser / waste receptacle, Bobrick B-262 Classic Series.

2.4 SOAP DISPENSER A. Bobrick No. B-2111 Classic Series. Concealed wall fastening, 40 fl oz. capacity.

2.5 TOILET PAPER DISPENSER A. Bobrick No. B-2888 Classic Series toilet tissue dispenser

2.6 MIRROR UNITS A. Mirror with Shelf, Bobrick B-166, 18 inches wide x 36 inches high.

2.7 GRAB BARS A. Bobrick No. B-5897 Series two-wall grab bar.


TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 13 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

2.8 BLOCKING AND BACKING A. Provide all necessary blocking. B. Accessories are located on Drawings for Contractor's convenience. C. Verify location, type, and quantity with Owner’s Authorized Representative prior to

proceeding with Work.

2.9 FABRICATION A. Fabricate Units with welded corners, one piece seamless exposed flanges, and with no open

miters.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed until surfaces to receive Accessories are smooth, clean, dry, square, sound,

accurately sized and located, and otherwise properly prepared. B. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install Accessories in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions where indicated, or

directed. Mount plumb, level, true, and secure, with non-corrosive Fasteners. B. Install supports attached to building structure for equipment requiring supports. C. Grab Bars: Install grab bars to withstand downward force of not less than 250 lbf per

ASTM F 446.

3.3 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust moving parts to operate satisfactorily at time of final Project acceptance and during

Warranty Period.

3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Remove debris from Project Site upon Work completion or sooner, if directed. B. Including Work of other Sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,

products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section.



FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 10 44 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 10 44 00 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fire extinguishers. B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 09 90 00 - Paints and Coatings: Field paint finish. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2010. B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 10.

A. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories: 1. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com. 3. Potter-Roemer: www.potterroemer.com. 4. Or Pre-approved equal.

2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent.

B. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Stainless steel tank, with pressure gage. 1. Class ABC. 2. Size 10. 3. Finish: Polished chrome.

C. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers at Kitchen: Stainless steel tank, with pressure gage. 1. Class K. 2. Size 10. 3. Finish: Polished chrome.

2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

A. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal. B. Fire rated construction required for cabinets in fire walls. Confirm required rating per plans. C. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed type.

1. Sized to accommodate accessories. 2. Exterior nominal dimensions of 10 1/2 inch wide x 24 inch high x 6 inch deep. 3. Trim: Returned to wall surface, with 3 to 4 inch projection.


FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 10 44 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

D. Cabinet Configuration: Surface type. 1. Sized to accommodate accessories. 2. Exterior nominal dimensions of 13 inch wide x 26 1/2 inch high x 6 5/8 inch deep.

E. Door: 0.036 inch thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; lock with break glass access. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide nylon catch.

F. Door Glazing: Glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick tempered. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing. G. Handle: Recessed cup H. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth. I. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Baked enamel, color by owner. J. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 48 inches from finished floor to centerline of handle. C. Secure rigidly in place. D. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets.




DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT





MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 11 45 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 11 45 00 – MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Kitchen appliances. B. Water heaters

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters

Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of

each piece of equipment specified. C. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been

completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this

section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by UL and complying with NEMA standards.

1.5 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents Part 1.3 Closeout Submittals, for additional

warranty requirements. B. Provide minimum ten (10) year manufacturer warranty on tub and door liner of dishwashers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER HEATER A. Commercial electric water heater: Rheem ELD52-TB (3 locations)

1. Capacity: 50 gallon (listed) 2. Elements: 4500 Watt, upper and lower. 3. Voltage: 240 V, simultaneous wiring 4. Manufacturers:

a. Rheem: www.rheem.com b. Substitutions: Equivalent products will be considered

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify utility rough-ins are present and correctly located.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor built-in equipment in place.

3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating equipment to efficient operation.

3.4 CLEANING A. Remove packing materials from equipment. B. Wash and clean equipment.


REVISED: 04-10-2019 Residential equipment deleted


http://www.rheem.com/

MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 11 45 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building




DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS





HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12 21 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 12 21 00 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Horizontal slat louver blinds. B. Operating hardware.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking for attachment of headrail

brackets.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. WCMA A100.1 - Safety of Corded Window Covering Products; Window Covering

Manufacturers Association; 2010. (ANSI/WCMA A101.1)

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the placement of concealed blocking to support blinds.

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics and operating

features. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, tolerances required, method of attachment,

clearances, and operation. D. Samples: Submit two samples, 6 inch long illustrating slat materials and finish, color, cord

type and color. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 78 39 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Blind Assemblies: One of each size. 3. Extra Slats: 20 of each type and size. 4. Extra Lift Cords, Control Cords, and Wands: One of each type.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified

in this section with minimum five years documented experience.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to

support blinds. B. Take field measurements to determine sizes required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Horizontal Louver Blinds:

1. Hunter Douglas: www.hunterdouglas.com. 2. Levolor Contract: www.levolorcontract.com. 3. Graber, division of Springs Window Fashions: www.graberblinds.com. 4. Pre-approved substitutions will be considered.



2.2 BLINDS AND BLIND COMPONENTS A. Blinds: Horizontal slat louvers hung from full-width headrail with full-width bottom rail;

manual control of raising and lowering by cord with full range locking; blade angle adjustable by control wand; complying with WCMA A100.1.

B. Metal Slats: Spring tempered pre-finished aluminum; radiused slat corners, with manufacturing burrs removed. 1. Width: 2 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.006 inch. 3. Color: To be selected from manufacturer’s standard colors.

C. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene cord, ladder configuration. D. Head Rail: Pre-finished, formed aluminum box, with end caps; internally fitted with

hardware, pulleys, and bearings for operation; same depth as width of slats 1. Height: 1.5 inches. 2. Color: Same as slats

E. Bottom Rail: Pre-finished, formed steel with top side shaped to match slat curvature; with end caps. Color: Same as headrail.

F. Lift Cord: Braided polypropylene; continuous loop. 1. Free end weighted.

G. Control Wand: Extruded hollow plastic; hexagonal shape. 1. Removable type. 2. Length of window opening height less 3 inches. 3. Color: clear

H. Headrail Attachment: Wall brackets. I. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer.

2.3 FABRICATION A. Determine sizes by field measurement. B. Fabricate blinds to fit within openings with uniform edge clearance of 1/4 inch. C. At openings requiring multiple blind units, provide separate blind assemblies with space of

1/2 inch between blinds, located at window mullion centers. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work. B. Ensure structural blocking and supports are correctly placed.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners. C. Place intermediate head supports at 60 inch on center. D. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust blinds for smooth operation. B. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy.



3.5 CLEANING A. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy.

3.6 SCHEDULE A. All exterior and interior windows, sidelite and or re-lites to be provided with horizontal

window blinds.






COUNTERTOP COVERINGS 12 36 23 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 12 36 23 - COUNTERTOP COVERINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL A. This Section Includes:

1. Plastic Laminate Countertops.

1.1 SAMPLES A. Prior to application, submit samples of Plastic Laminate showing color and patterns.

1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration.

1.3 WORK SPACE TEMPERATURES A. 60-degrees F minimum.

1.4 WORK SPACE RELATIVE HUMIDITY A. 35% minimum. B. 80% maximum.

1.5 WORK SPACE ILLUMINATION A. Maintain 30 foot candles minimum measured 3 ft. above Floor during Covering installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Construction:

1. Shop post-formed. 2. Twelve-foot minimum lengths. 3. Applied end splashes with sealant cove.

B. Profile: 1. Integral, continuous, countertop and backsplash formed from full-width and height plastic

laminate without joints at countertop/backsplash intersection or countertop/front-edge intersection.

2. Similar to Contour Laminates & Stoneworks Inc., 888-763-0820, Profile “180 Modified Wrap”, with 24-inch counter width and 4-inch backsplash height.

C. Plastic Laminate Countertops in Non-Laboratory Rooms and Spaces 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Wilsonart Postforming (HGP) Type 350, or approved

equal. 2. Color: Selected by Owner. 3. Texture: Selected by Owner.

D. Countertop Substrate Material: 1. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no

urea formaldehyde. 2. 3/4 inch thick minimum.

2.2 PRIMERS, SEALERS, AND ADHESIVES A. Water-resistant type, made or recommended by Covering Manufacturer.


COUNTERTOP COVERINGS 12 36 23 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

2.3 JOINT SEALANT A. Clear, translucent, silicone type; GE, Dow, or approved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that surfaces to receive Covering are accurately sized and located, dry, clean, smooth,

sound, secure, free from conditions that would damage Covering or impair adhesive-bond, and otherwise properly prepared.

B. Do not start Work until conditions are Satisfactory.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install Countertop Covering of this Section. B. Follow Manufacturer's directions. Make necessary covering joints with tight, nearly invisible,

hairline cracks.

3.3 COUNTERTOPS A. No "L" shaped pieces at Countertop corners or longitudinal seams permitted; cross seams 12

ft. apart minimum and at least 24 inches away from any Counter Sinks. B. Provide Cut-Outs for Sinks and other openings; verify size and locations. Carefully scribe

edges to fit without Metal Edging.

3.4 PRODUCT CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Promptly remove any excess Adhesive or Sealant. B. Remove any stains or markings from Plastic Laminate surfaces. C. Including Work of other Sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,

products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. D. Remove debris from Project Site upon Work completion or sooner, if directed.



STONE COUNTERTOPS Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

12 36 40

SECTION 12 36 40 - STONE COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Stone countertops. 2. Stone side and backsplashes.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel countertop supports.

1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 119-04: Terminology Relating to Dimension Stone B. ASTM C 170-90 (1999): Test Method for Compressive Strength of Dimension Stone C. ASTM C 615-03: Specification for Granite Dimension Stone D. ASTM C 880-98: Test Method for Flexural Strength of Dimensional Stone

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each [stone type,] stone accessory, and other manufactured products. 1. Each stone type: Physical properties

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show fabrication and installation details for dimension stone cladding: 1. Include dimensions and profiles of stone units. 2. Show locations and details of joints. 3. Show locations and details of anchors and supports.

C. Stone Samples: (2) Sets for each stone required, exhibiting the full range of color characteristics expected; not less than 12 inches square. 1. Grout Samples: Full range of exposed color and texture. 2. Sealant Samples: For each type and color of joint sealant required.

D. Sealant Compatibility Test Report: Submit test report from sealant manufacturer, in accordance with Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" stating that sealants will not stain stone.

E. Maintenance Data: Provide maintenance manuals for stone countertops. Include stone-care products recommended by stone source.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Skilled workers who custom-fabricate stone countertops similar to work of this Project.

B. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone from a single quarry. 1. Obtain each variety of stone from a single quarry, whether specified in this Section or in

another Section of the Specifications. 2. Make stone slabs available for Architect to examine for appearance

characteristics. a. Architect will select aesthetically acceptable slabs and will indicate

aesthetically unacceptable portions of slabs. C. Mockup: Build mockup to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for

materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical countertop as shown on Drawings. 2. Approved mockup may become part of the completed Work.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive stone countertops by field

measurements before fabrication.



12 36 40

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STONE SOURCE

A. Varieties and Source: 1. Stone: Granite

2.2 STONE MATERIAL

A. Granite: ASTM C 615. B. Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which natural markings

occur. C. Match Architect's samples. D. Granite Type: Natural

1. Stone Variety: Selected by Owner. 2. Location: Countertop. 3. Finish:

a. Polished 4. Thickness: Not less than the following:

a. 1-15/16 inches (+1/8” -1/16”)

2.3 STONE ACCESSORIES A. General: Use only adhesives formulated for stone and recommended by manufacturer for the

application shown on Drawings. B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, chemical-resistant, water-cleanable, tile-

setting and -grouting epoxy, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

D. Stone Adhesive: 2-part epoxy or polyester adhesive, formulated specifically for bonding stone to stone, with an initial set time of not more than 2 hours at 70 deg F, and with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Color: Match stone.

E. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated below that comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and will not stain the stone it is applied to. 1. Single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant. 2. Color: As selected by Architect. 3. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). F. Stone Cleaner: Cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and

applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives.

G. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated.

2.4 STONE FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Fabricate stone per requirements, including Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Granite: NBGQA's "Specifications for Architectural Granite."

B. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that could impair structural integrity or function. 1. Repairs that are characteristic of the varieties specified are acceptable provided they

do not impair structural integrity or function and are not aesthetically unpleasing, as



12 36 40

judged by Architect. C. Grade and mark stone for final locations to produce assembled countertop units with an

overall uniform appearance. D. Fabricate stone countertops in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements

indicated, including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles. 2. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, supports, and attachments. 4. Provide openings, reveals, and similar features as needed to accommodate

adjacent work. 5. Fabricate molded edges with machines having abrasive shaping wheels made to

reverse contour of edge profile to produce uniform shape throughout entire length of edge and with precisely formed arris slightly eased to prevent snipping, and matched at joints between units. Form corners of molded edges as indicated with outside corners slightly eased, unless otherwise indicated.

6. Finish exposed faces of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish of each type of stone required and to match approved Samples and mockups. Provide matching finish on exposed edges of countertops, splashes, and cutouts.

E. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units.

2.5 STONE COUNTERTOPS

A. General: Comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design Manual." B. Nominal Thickness: Gage backs to provide units of identical thickness.

1. 1-15/16 inches (+1/8” -1/16”) C. Edge: Straight, slightly eased at top. D. Splashes: Provide 13/16 inch thick backsplashes and side splashes.

1. Height: 6”. 2. Top-Edge Detail: Bevel

E. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field, with joints at locations shown on Drawings and as follows: 1. Joints: 1/16 inch in width.

F. Cutouts and Holes: 1. Undercounter Fixtures: Make cutouts for undercounter fixtures in shop using

template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.

2. Counter-Mounted Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations.

3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, counter mounted soap dispensers, and similar items.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates indicated to receive stone countertops and conditions under which stone countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before

setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives. Allow stone to dry before installing.



12 36 40

3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/16 inch in 48 inches.

B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 96 inches, 1/4 inch maximum. C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/4 of nominal joint

width. D. Variation in Plane at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between

planes of adjacent units. E. Variation in Line of Edge at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference

between edges of adjacent units, where edge line continues across joint.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS A. Install countertops over plywood subtops with full spread of water-cleanable epoxy

adhesive. B. Do not cut stone in field. If stone countertops or splashes require additional fabrication not

specified to be performed at Project site, return to fabrication shop for adjustment. C. Set stone to comply with requirements shown on Drawings and Shop Drawings. Shim and

adjust stone to location shown. Install countertops with uniform joints of widths shown and with edges and faces aligned.

D. Bond joints with stone adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

E. Space joints with 1/16-inch gap for filling with sealant. Use temporary shims to ensure uniform spacing.

F. Install backsplash and end splash by adhering to wall with water-cleanable epoxy adhesive. Leave 1/16-inch gap between countertop and splash for filling with sealant. Use temporary shims to ensure uniform spacing.

G. Grout joints to comply with ANSI A108.10. Remove temporary shims before grouting. Tool grout uniformly and smoothly with plastic tool.

H. Apply sealant to joints; comply with Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." Remove temporary shims before applying sealant.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean countertops as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout,

mortar, and sealant smears immediately. B. Remove and replace stone countertops of the following description:

1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.

2. Defective countertops. 3. Defective joints, including misaligned joints. 4. Interior stone countertops and joints not matching approved Samples and

mockups. 5. Interior stone countertops not complying with other requirements indicated.

C. Replace in a manner that results in stone countertops matching approved Samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.

D. Following installation and after sealants are cured, clean stone countertops using clean water and soft rags.

E. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's instructions.




DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION





SEISMIC BRACING OF NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS 13 05 41 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 13 05 41 - SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide seismic restraint in accordance with the requirements of this section in order to maintain

the integrity of nonstructural components of the building so that they remain safe and functional in case of seismic event.

B. The design to resist seismic load shall be based on Seismic Design Categories per the OSSC. C. Work in this section includes furnishing and installing complete seismic restraint systems. Work

in this section may also include the seismic restraint design and/or equipment/product certifications to be submitted for review by the registered design professional.

D. Definitions: Non-structural building components are components or systems that are not part of the building’s structural system whether inside or outside, above or below grade. Non-structural components of buildings include: 1. Architectural Elements: Facades that are not part of the structural system and its shear

resistant elements; cornices and other architectural projections and parapets that do not function structurally; glazing; nonbearing partitions; suspended ceilings; stairs isolated from the basic structure; cabinets; bookshelves; medical equipment; and storage racks.

2. Electrical Elements: Power and lighting systems; substations; switchgear and switchboards; auxiliary engine-generator sets; transfer switches; motor control centers; motor generators; selector and controller panels; fire protection and alarm systems; special life support systems; and telephone and communication systems.

3. Mechanical Elements: Heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning systems; medical gas systems; plumbing systems; sprinkler systems; pneumatic systems; boiler equipment and components.

4. Transportation Elements: Mechanical, electrical and structural elements for transport systems, i.e., elevators and dumbwaiters, including hoisting equipment and counterweights.

1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Professional Engineer - A professional engineer is one who is legally qualified to practice in

the jurisdiction where the Project is located, who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated, and is registered with the state where the Project is located.

B. Seismic Forces: Forces acting in any direction on a nonstructural component and related system due to the action of an earthquake as defined in the Building Codes currently in effect where the Project is located.

C. Seismic Deformations: Drifts, deflections and seismic relative displacements determined in accordance with the applicable seismic requirements of the Building Codes currently in effect where the Project is located.

D. Restraint/Bracing: Bracing or anchorage used to limit movement under seismic forces. Cables or rigid elements (strut, pipe, angles, etc.) used to resist forces by uniaxial tension or compression. The term “bracing” may also be used to describe design to resist lateral forces through the use of wall or frame elements.

E. Support: Elements used to support the weight (gravity load) of an item. Where the support is located at a seismic brace, the element may also resist tension/compression reactions from the restraint system.

F. Anchorage: Connection to structure typically through the use of welding, bolts, screws, post-installed anchors or other fasteners selected to meet the Building Codes currently in effect where the Project is located.



G. Designated Seismic System: Those architectural, electrical and mechanical systems and their components that require seismic design in accordance with ASCE 7 and for which the component importance factor, Ip, is 1.5 according to ASCE 7 or listed as 1.5 in Section 13 05 41.1.2.

H. Inspection Body: Organization or individual accredited to ISO 17020 and regularly engaged in factory inspection services for seismic restraint of non-structural components and equipment.

I. Special Inspector: An IAS accredited IBC special inspection agency or qualified professional engineer who demonstrates competence, to the satisfaction of the building official (or Authority Having Jurisdiction [AHJ]), for inspection of the designated seismic systems. The Contractor shall employ one or more special inspectors to provide periodic inspections during installation of designated seismic systems.

J. AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction – The governmental agency or sub-agency that regulates the construction process. This may be a local building department, state agency, federal entity or other body or bodies having statutory authority.

K. ICC-ES: International Code Council Evaluation Service L. IAS: International Accreditation Service, Inc. M. IBC: International Building Code N. VISCMA Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control Manufacturers Association

1.2 QUALITY CONTROL: A. Shop-Drawing Preparation:

1. Have seismic-force-restraint shop drawings and calculations prepared and stamped by a professional structural engineer experienced in the area of seismic force restraints. The professional structural engineer shall be registered in the state where the project is located.

2. Submit design tables and information used for the design-force levels, stamped and signed by a professional structural engineer registered in the State where project is located.

B. Coordination: 1. Do not install seismic restraints until seismic restraint submittals are approved by the

Owner’s Authorized Representative. 2. Coordinate and install trapezes or other multi-pipe hanger systems prior to pipe installation.

C. Seismic Certification: 1. In structures assigned to IBC Seismic Design Category C, D, E, or F, permanent equipments

and components are to have Special Seismic Certification in accordance with requirements of Section 13.2.2 of ASCE 7 except for equipment that are considered rugged as listed in section 2.2 OSHPD code application notice CAN No. 2-1708A.5, and shall comply with section 13.2.6 of ASCE 7.

1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit a coordinated set of equipment anchorage drawings prior to installation including:

1. Description, layout, and location of items to be anchored or braced with anchorage or brace points noted and dimensioned.

2. Details of anchorage or bracing at large scale with all members, parts brackets shown, together with all connections, bolts, welds etc. clearly identified and specified.

3. Numerical value of design seismic brace loads. 4. For expansion bolts, include design load and capacity if different from those specified.

B. Submit prior to installation, a coordinated set of bracing drawings for seismic protection of piping, with data identifying the various support-to-structure connections and seismic bracing structural connections, include: 1. Single-line piping diagrams on a floor-by-floor basis. Show all suspended piping for a given

floor on the same plain. 2. Type of pipe (Copper, steel, cast iron, insulated, non-insulated, etc.).



3. Pipe contents. 4. Structural framing. 5. Location of all gravity load pipe supports and spacing requirements. 6. Numerical value of gravity load reactions. 7. Location of all seismic bracing. 8. Numerical value of applied seismic brace loads. 9. Type of connection (Vertical support, vertical support with seismic brace etc.).

10. Seismic brace reaction type (tension or compression): Details illustrating all support and bracing components, methods of connections, and specific anchors to be used.

C. Submit prior to installation, bracing drawings for seismic protection of suspended ductwork and suspended electrical and communication cables, include: 1. Details illustrating all support and bracing components, methods of connection, and specific

anchors to be used. 2. Numerical value of applied gravity and seismic loads and seismic loads acting on support and

bracing components. 3. Maximum spacing of hangers and bracing. 4. Seal of registered structural engineer responsible for design.

D. Submit design calculations prepared and sealed by the registered structural engineer specified above in paragraph 1.3A.

E. Submit for concrete anchors, the appropriate ICBC evaluation reports, OSHPD pre-approvals, or lab test reports verifying compliance with OSHPD Interpretation of Regulations 28-6.

1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: A. The most recent edition of publications listed below (including amendments, addenda revisions,

supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced unless otherwise noted. The publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. 355.2; Qualification for Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete and Commentary 2. 318 Appendix D; Anchoring to Concrete

C. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): Load and Resistance Factor Design American Society of Civil Engineers Minimum Design Loads for Building and Other Structures

D. Load and Resistance Factor Design, Volume 1, Second Edition E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2. A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded

and Seamless 3. A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs; 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. 4. A325 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum

Tensile Strength 5. A490 Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Minimum

Tensile Strength 6. A500 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural

Tubing in Rounds and Shapes 7. A501 Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing 8. A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement 9. A992 Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing 10. A996 Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axel-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement 11. E488 Standard Test Method for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Element

F. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE 7)



G. International Building Code (IBC) H. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association I. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Steel 2. AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Sheet Steel

J. International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES): Index of Reports can be found at http://www.icc-es.org/reports/index.cfm

K. Oregon Structural Specialty Code (OSSC) L. (SMACNA): Seismic Restraint Manual - Guidelines for Mechanical Systems, 1998 Edition and

Addendum

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENT: A. ICB and OSSC Latest Edition. B. Exceptions: The seismic restraint of the following items may be omitted:

1. Equipment weighing less than 400 pounds, which is supported directly on the floor or roof. 2. Equipment weighing less than 20 pounds, which is suspended from the roof or floor or hung

from a wall. 3. Gas and medical piping less than 2 ½ inches inside diameter. 4. Piping in boiler plants and equipment rooms less than 1 ¼ inches inside diameter. 5. All other piping less than 2 ½ inches inside diameter, except for automatic fire suppression

systems. 6. All piping suspended by individual hangers, 12 inches or less in length from the top of pipe

to the bottom of the support for the hanger. 7. All electrical conduits, less than 2 ½ inches inside diameter. 8. All rectangular air handling ducts less than six square feet in cross sectional area. 9. All round air handling ducts less than 28 inches in diameter. 10. All ducts suspended by hangers 12 inches or less in length from the top of the duct to the

bottom of support for the hanger.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL: A. Structural steel: ASTM A36, A36M, A992 B. Structural tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B C. Steel pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B D. Bolts and nuts: ASTM, A307, A325, A325M, A490, A490M, ASTM A563 E. Lag bolts and screws: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M), ASTM A563 F. Powder driven anchors: NES NER-272 G. Nails: ASTM F1667

2.2 WELDING A. Welding filler metal: AWS A5.1

2.3 POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS

A. Expansion or sleeve anchors: Pre-qualified for use in seismic applications per ASTM E488 B. Adhesive anchors: Pre-qualified for use in seismic applications per ASTM E488

2.4 SEISMIC RESTRAINT CABLES

A. Prestretched galvanized carbon steel cable 7x19 strand core, ASCE-19, ASTM A-1023 1A, ASTM A-603 or stainless steel


http://www.icc-es.org/reports/index.cfm


2.5 CHANNEL STRUT AND FITTINGS A. Strut: ASTM A 1011SS Gr 33 or ASTM A 653 Gr 33 B. Fittings: ASTM A 575, A 576, A36 or A 635

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL: A. Provide equipment supports and anchoring devices to withstand the seismic design forces, so that

when seismic design forces are applied, the equipment cannot displace, overturn, or become inoperable.

B. Provide anchorages in conformance with recommendations of the equipment manufacturer and as shown on approved shop drawings and calculations.

C. Construct seismic restraints and anchorage to allow for thermal expansion. D. Testing Before Final Inspection:

1. Test 10-percent of anchors in masonry and concrete per ASTM E488, and ACI 355.2 to determine that they meet the required load capacity. If any anchor fails to meet the required load, test the next 20 consecutive anchors, which are required to have zero failure, before resuming the 10-percent testing frequency.

2. Before scheduling Final Inspection, submit a report on this testing indicating the number and location of testing, and what anchor-loads were obtained.

3.2 EQUIPMENT RESTRAINT AND BRACING: A. See construction documents for equipment to be restrained or braced.

3.3 MECHANICAL DUCTWORK AND PIPING; BOILER PLANT STACKS AND BREACHING; ELECTRICAL BUSWAYS, CONDUITS, AND CABLE TRAYS; AND TELECOMMUNICATION WIRES AND CABLE TRAYS A. Support and brace mechanical ductwork and piping; electrical busways, conduits and cable trays;

and telecommunication wires and cable trays including boiler plant stacks and breeching to resist directional forces (lateral, longitudinal and vertical).

B. Brace duct and breeching branches with a minimum of 1 brace per branch. C. Provide supports and anchoring so that, upon application of seismic forces, piping remains fully

connected as operable systems which will not displace sufficiently to damage adjacent or connecting equipment, or building members.

D. Seismic Restraint of Piping: 1. Design criteria:

a. Piping resiliently supported: Restrain to support 120 percent of the weight of the systems and components and contents.

b. Piping not resiliently supported: Restrain to support 60 percent of the weight of the system components and contents.

2. Provide seismic restraints according to one of the following options: E. Piping Connections: Provide flexible connections where pipes connect to equipment. Make the

connections capable of accommodating relative differential movements between the pipe and equipment under conditions of earthquake shaking.

3.4 PARTITIONS A. In buildings with flexible structural frames, anchor partitions to only structural element, such as a

floor slab, and separate such partition by a physical gap from all other structural elements. B. Light partitions (metal stud or wood stud):

1. Design partitions to resist out-of-plane seismic design force. Design force shall be based on the weight of the partition framing, finishes, soffits, connected casework or equipment, and



ceilings for which it provides bracing. Out-of-plane design force shall not be less than 5 psf. 2. Design partitions to accommodate interstory drift. 3. Fasten veneer to partition framing to resist code required forces and deformation of studs. 4. Where partition does not extend to the structure, the partition height does not exceed 9 feet,

the linear weight of the partition does not exceed the product of 10 pounds times the height in feet of the partition and the partition horizontal load does not exceed 5 psf, lateral bracing to the building structural is not required. For all other conditions, provide supplemental bracing or framing to resist out-of-plane seismic design force. Such bracing or framing shall be independent of splayed wire ceiling bracing. Design wall bracing or framing for compatibility with ceiling deflection requirements, fire ratings and architectural treatments.

3.5 CEILINGS AND LIGHTING FIXTURES A. At regular intervals, laterally brace suspended ceilings against lateral and vertical movements,

and provide with a physical separation at the walls. B. Independently support and laterally brace all lighting fixtures.

3.6 FACADES AND GLAZING A. Fasten veneer to substrate to accommodate out-of-plane seismic design force and deformation

of supporting framing. B. Anchored veneer shall be detailed to prevent moisture penetration from weather that could

corrode anchors. C. Install attachments to structure for all façade materials as shown on construction drawings to

ensure strength against applicable seismic forces at the project location.

3.7 STORAGE RACKS, CABINETS, AND BOOKCASES A. Install storage racks to withstand earthquake forces and anchored to the floor or laterally braced

from the top to the structural elements. B. Anchor medical supply cabinets to the floor or walls and equip them with properly engaged,

lockable latches. C. Anchor filing cabinets that are more than 2 drawers high to the floor or walls, and equip all

drawers with properly engaged, lockable latches. D. Anchor bookcases that are more than 30 inches high to the floor or walls, and equip any doors

with properly engaged, lockable latches.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide a quality assurance plan as required by ASCE 7, Appendix 11A for installation of the

following per IBC Chapter 17. Reference 130541.1.3 for the definition of special inspector. A minimum of 3 special inspections shall be performed (pre-construction, mid-construction, and final inspection): 1. Seismic Design Category C

a. Heating, ventilating and air-conditioning (HVAC) ductwork containing hazardous materials or smoke control and anchorage of such ductwork.

b. Anchorage of electrical equipment used for emergency or standby power systems. c. Vibration-isolated systems and associated seismic restraints where indicated on the

construction documents or submittals. All restraints require a nominal clearance of 0.25” or less between the equipment support frame and restraint.

2. Seismic Design Category D a. All systems required for Seismic Design Category C b. Exterior wall panels and their anchorage c. Suspended ceiling system and their anchorage

1) Verify member type and size, verify that bracing elements such as splayed wires



and compression struts are installed as detailed; test anchorage to structure







DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING





VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 22 05 48 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Isolation pads. 2. Isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Restrained spring isolators. 5. Housed spring mounts. 6. Elastomeric hangers. 7. Spring hangers. 8. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops. 9. Pipe riser resilient supports. 10. Resilient pipe guides. 11. Seismic snubbers. 12. Restraining braces and cables.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ASCE: American Society of Civil Engineers. B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service. C. OSSC: Oregon Structural Specialty Code.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the OSSC & ASCE 7: D. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: II.

a. Component Importance Factor: 1.0 b. Component Response Modification Factor: 2.5 c. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 0.842 4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: 0.631


1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used. a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and

rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by [an evaluation service member of ICC-ES] [OSHPD] [an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction].

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.



B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and

operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases.

2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads.

4. Seismic-Restraint Details: a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints.

Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to

the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By [an evaluation service member of ICC-ES] [OSHPD] [an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction], showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).

C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for plumbing piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.

D. Welding certificates. E. Field quality-control test reports. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-mounting systems to include in operation and

maintenance manuals.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to

conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the OSSC & ASCE 7 unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproved by ICC-ES, or preapproved by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product

indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 3. California Dynamics Corporation. 4. Isolation Technology, Inc. 5. Kinetics Noise Control. 6. Mason Industries. 7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 8. Vibration Isolation. 9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 10. Approved Equal.

D. Pads <Insert drawing designation>: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant [neoprene] [rubber] [hermetically sealed

compressed fiberglass]. E. Mounts <Insert drawing designation>: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber,

hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. 1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing,

oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.

F. Restrained Mounts <Insert drawing designation>: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint. 1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing,

oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.

G. Spring Isolators <Insert drawing designation>: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators. 1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring

at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch thick, rubber

isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to

fasten and level equipment.



H. Restrained Spring Isolators <Insert drawing designation>: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint. 1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight

being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit-stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. I. Housed Spring Mounts <Insert drawing designation>: Housed spring isolator with integral

seismic snubbers. 1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint. 2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure. 3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel up or down before

contacting a resilient collar. J. Elastomeric Hangers <Insert drawing designation>: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with

molded, oil-resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

K. Spring Hangers <Insert drawing designation>: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a

maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.



deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil. L. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop <Insert drawing designation>: Combination coil-spring

and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a

maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.



deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded

rod.



8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil.

M. Pipe Riser Resilient Support <Insert drawing designation>: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.

N. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering



indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corporation. 3. Isolation Technology, Inc. 4. Kinetics Noise Control. 5. Mason Industries. 6. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 7. Vibration Isolation. 8. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 9. Approved equal.

D. Steel Base <Insert drawing designation>: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails. 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch

clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

E. Inertia Base <Insert drawing designation>: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for placement of cast-in-place concrete. 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch

clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported equipment manufacturer.



2.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering



indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corporation. 3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Hilti, Inc. 5. Kinetics Noise Control. 6. Loos & Co.; Cableware Division. 7. Mason Industries. 8. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC. 9. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 10. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

D. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by [an evaluation service member of ICC-ES] [OSHPD] [an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction]. 1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of

components shall be at least [four] <Insert number> times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

E. Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings. 1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or

female-wedge type. 2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. 3. Maximum 1/4-inch air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch thick resilient cushion.

F. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

G. Restraint Cables: [ASTM A 603 galvanized] [ASTM A 492 stainless]-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

H. Hanger Rod Stiffener: [Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections] [Reinforcing steel angle clamped] to hanger rod.

I. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

J. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

K. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

L. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

M. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide



anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

2.4 FACTORY FINISHES A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before

shipping. 1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate

capacity range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application

by [an evaluation service member of ICC-ES] [OSHPD] [an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction].

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install seismic snubbers on plumbing equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.

2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inches.

3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by [an evaluation service member of ICC-ES] [OSHPD] [an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction] providing required submittals for component.

B. Piping Restraints: 1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of [40 feet] <Insert dimension> o.c., and longitudinal

supports a maximum of [80 feet] <Insert dimension> o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. D. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by [an evaluation service member of

ICC-ES] [OSHPD] [an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction] providing required submittals for component.



E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

F. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

G. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

H. Drilled-in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for

anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the Owner’s Authorized Representative if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or

branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for piping flexible connections.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and

inspections. B. Perform tests and inspections. C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Owner’s Authorized Representative, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Owner’s Authorized Representative's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least [four] <Insert number> of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Owner’s Authorized Representative.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. Verify snubber minimum clearances. 9. Air-Mounting System Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks.

Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 10. Air-Mounting System Operational Test: Test the compressed-air leveling system.



11. Test and adjust air-mounting system controls and safeties. 12. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results

are achieved. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight. B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.

After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of sprint isolators. D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

3.7 PLUMBING VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE SCHEDULE A. Supported or Suspended Equipment: <Insert name and drawing designation>.

1. Equipment Location: <Insert room number>. 2. Pads:

a. Material: Neoprene. b. Thickness: <Insert inches>. c. Number of Pads: <Insert number> thick.

3. Isolator Type: <Insert generic name or designation used in Part 2>. 4. Base Type: <Insert generic name or designation used in Part 2>. 5. Minimum Deflection: <Insert inches>. 6. Component Importance Factor: [1.0]. 7. Component Response Modification Factor: [1.5] [2.5] [3.5] [5.0]. 8. Component Amplification Factor: [1.0] [2.5].






FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22 11 13 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 22 11 13 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for

water serviceDEFINITIONS A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same

area, drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations, and elevations.

C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water valves and specialties to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention.

2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.

B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. C. Comply with ASTM F 645 for selection, design, and installation of thermoplastic water piping. D. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic potable-water-service piping. 2. Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic

water.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, according to the following:

1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, according to the following: 1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-

point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.

C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside.

F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.



G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner’s Authorized Representative no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot

end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard

pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. 2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets,

and steel bolts. B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end

unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard

pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. 2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

C. Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125, cast iron.

2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC, Schedule 40 Pipe: ASTM D 1785.

1. PVC, Schedule 40 Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466. B. PVC, Schedule 80 Pipe: ASTM D 1785.

1. PVC, Schedule 80 Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467. 2. PVC, Schedule 80 Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464.

C. PVC, AWWA Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 150, with bell end with gasket, and with spigot end. 1. Comply with UL 1285 for fire-service mains if indicated. 2. PVC Fabricated Fittings: AWWA C900, [Class 150], with bell-and-spigot or double-bell

ends. Include elastomeric gasket in each bell. 3. PVC Molded Fittings: AWWA C907, Class 150, with bell-and-spigot or double-bell

ends. Include elastomeric gasket in each bell. 4. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard

pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

5. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber

gaskets, and steel bolts.

2.3 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS A. Ductile-Iron Rigid Expansion Joints:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:



2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. EBAA Iron, Inc. b. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.

3. Description: Three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. a. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum.

B. Ductile-Iron Flexible Expansion Joints: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. EBAA Iron, Inc. b. Hays Fluid Controls; a division of ROMAC Industries Inc. c. Star Pipe Products.

3. Description: Compound, ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include two gasketed ball-joint sections and one or more gasketed sleeve sections. Assemble components for offset and expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. a. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.

C. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. EBAA Iron, Inc.

3. Description: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and 1 or 2 flexing sections for up to 15-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. a. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.

2.4 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for commonly used

joining materials. B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series. C. Bonding Adhesive for Fiberglass Piping: As recommended by fiberglass piping manufacturer. D. Plastic Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system

manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

B. Tubular-Sleeve Pipe Couplings: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing.



b. Dresser, Inc.; Dresser Piping Specialties. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div. d. Hays Fluid Controls; a division of ROMAC Industries Inc. e. JCM Industries. f. Smith-Blair, Inc. g. Viking Johnson.

2. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners and with ends of same sizes as piping to be joined. a. Standard: AWWA C219. b. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. c. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum. d. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

C. Split-Sleeve Pipe Couplings: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Victaulic Depend-O-Lok.

2. Description: Metal, bolted, split-sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling with sealing pad and closure plates, O-ring gaskets, and bolt fasteners. a. Standard: AWWA C219. b. Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard c. Sleeve Dimensions: Of thickness and width required to provide pressure rating. d. Gasket Material: O-rings made of EPDM rubber, unless otherwise indicated. e. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum. f. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

D. Flexible Connectors: 1. Nonferrous-Metal Piping: Bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid; with copper-

tube, pressure-type, solder-joint ends or bronze flanged ends brazed to hose. 2. Ferrous-Metal Piping: Stainless-steel hose covered with stainless-steel wire braid; with

ASME B1.20.1, threaded steel pipe nipples or ASME B16.5, steel pipe flanges welded to hose.

E. Dielectric Fittings: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, or plain end types; and matching piping system materials.

1. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated union assembly, designed for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C). Include insulating material that isolates dissimilar metals and ends with inside threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

2. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure to suit system pressures.

3. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled companion-flange assembly, full-face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300-psig

(1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure to suit system pressures. 4. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel couplings with inert and noncorrosive

thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).

5. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipples with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types, and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).



2.6 GATE VALVES A. AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American AVK Co.; Valves & Fittings Div. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. c. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. f. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). g. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. h. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. i. McWane, Inc.; Tyler Pipe Div.; Utilities Div. j. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. k. NIBCO INC. l. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.

2. Nonrising-Stem, Metal-Seated Gate Valves: a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with cast-iron or bronze

double-disc gate, bronze gate rings, bronze stem, and stem nut. 1) Standard: AWWA C500. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 3) End Connections: Mechanical joint. 4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.

3. OS&Y, Rising-Stem, Metal-Seated Gate Valves: a. Description: Cast- or ductile-iron body and bonnet, with cast-iron double disc,

bronze disc and seat rings, and bronze stem. 1) Standard: AWWA C500. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 3) End Connections: Flanged.

B. UL/FMG, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. d. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). e. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. f. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. g. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. h. NIBCO INC. i. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.

2. UL/FMG, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves: a. Description: Iron body and bonnet with flange for indicator post, bronze seating

material, and inside screw. 1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). 3) End Connections: Flanged.

3. OS&Y, Rising-Stem Gate Valves: a. Description: Iron body and bonnet and bronze seating material.



1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). 3) End Connections: Flanged.

2.7 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES A. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. b. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. c. Flowserve. d. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). e. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. f. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. g. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. h. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.

2. Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine. a. Standard: MSS SP-60. b. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron or stainless-steel, two-piece bolted sleeve

with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve.

c. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient-seated gate valve with one raised face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.

B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately 5 inches (125 mm) in diameter.

1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.

C. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FMG-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench, extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of burial of valve.

2.8 CHECK VALVES A. AWWA Check Valves:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American AVK Co.; Valves & Fittings Div. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. c. APCO Williamette; Valve and Primer Corporation. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. f. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). g. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. h. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. i. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. j. NIBCO INC. k. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: Swing-check type with resilient seat. Include interior coating according to AWWA C550 and ends to match piping. a. Standard: AWWA C508.



b. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). B. UL/FMG, Check Valves:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. c. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. d. Kidde Fire Fighting. e. MATCO-NORCA, Inc. f. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). g. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. h. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. i. NIBCO INC. j. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. k. Tyco Fire & Building Products. l. United Brass Works, Inc. m. Victaulic Company of America. n. Viking Corporation. o. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: Swing-check type with pressure rating; rubber-face checks, unless otherwise indicated; and ends matching piping. a. Standards: UL 312 and FMG approved. b. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa)

2.9 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. AWWA Butterfly Valves:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. DeZURIK/Copes-Vulcan; a unit of SPX Corporation. b. Milliken Valve Company. c. Mosser Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. d. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. e. Pratt, Henry Company. f. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.

2. Description: Rubber seated. a. Standard: AWWA C504. b. Body: Cast or ductile iron. c. Body Type: Wafer or flanged d. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).

2.10 RELIEF VALVES A. Air-Release Valves:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Crispin-Multiplex Manufacturing Co. b. GA Industries, Inc. c. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.

B. Air/Vacuum Valves:



1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Crispin-Multiplex Manufacturing Co. b. GA Industries, Inc. c. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.

C. Combination Air Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. GA Industries, Inc. b. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.

2.11 VACUUM BREAKERS A. Pressure Vacuum Breaker Assembly:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Regulator Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Toro Co. (The); Irrigation Division. f. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1020. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.

2.12 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Regulator Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div.

2. Standard: AWWA C511. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 5. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; OS&Y gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow preventer connection. B. Double-Check, Backflow-Prevention Assemblies:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:



a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Regulator Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div.

2. Standard: AWWA C510. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 5. Accessories: Ball valves with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 (DN 50) and

smaller; OS&Y gate valves with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

C. Double-Check, Detector-Assembly Backflow Preventers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Regulator Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div. f. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2.13 CONCRETE VAULTS A. Description: Precast, reinforced-concrete vault, designed for A-16 load designation according

to ASTM C 857 and made according to ASTM C 858. 1. Ladder: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel or polyethylene-encased steel steps. 2. Manhole: ASTM A 48/A 48M Class No. 35A minimum tensile strength, gray-iron traffic

frame and cover. a. Dimension: 24-inch (610-mm) minimum diameter, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Drain: ASME A112.6.3, cast-iron floor drain with outlet of size indicated. Include body anchor flange, light-duty cast-iron grate, bottom outlet, and integral or field-installed bronze ball or clapper-type backwater valve.

2.14 PROTECTIVE ENCLOSURES A. Freeze-Protection Enclosures:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Aqua Shield. b. BF Products, Inc. c. DekoRRa Products. d. Dunco Manufacturing, Inc. e. G&C Enclosures. f. Hot Box, Inc. g. HydroCowl, Inc. h. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: Insulated enclosure designed to protect aboveground water piping, equipment, or specialties from freezing and damage, with heat source to maintain minimum internal temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) when external temperatures reach as low as minus 34 deg F (minus 36 deg C). a. Standard: ASSE 1060.



b. Class I: For equipment or devices other than pressure or atmospheric vacuum breakers. 1) Housing: Reinforced[-aluminum] [or] [-fiberglass] <Insert housing>

construction. a) Size: Of dimensions indicated, but not less than those required for

access and service of protected unit. b) Drain opening for units with drain connection. c) Access doors with locking devices. d) Insulation inside housing. e) Anchoring devices for attaching housing to concrete base.

2) Electric heating cable or heater with self-limiting temperature control. B. Weather-Resistant Enclosures:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Aqua Shield. b. BF Products, Inc. c. DekoRRa Products. d. Dunco Manufacturing, Inc. e. G&C Enclosures. f. Hot Box, Inc. g. HydroCowl, Inc. h. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: Uninsulated enclosure designed to protect aboveground water piping, equipment, or specialties from weather and damage. a. Standard: ASSE 1060. b. Class III: For equipment or devices other than pressure or atmospheric vacuum

breakers. 1) Housing: Reinforced fiberglass construction.

a) Size: Of dimensions indicated, but not less than those required for access and service of protected unit.

b) Drain opening for units with drain connection. c) Access doors with locking devices. d) Anchoring devices for attaching housing to concrete base.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following

applications. B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure

rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated. C. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping. D. Flanges, unions, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints

indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults. E. Underground water-service piping NPS 3/4 to NPS 4 shall be any of the following:

1. PVC, Schedule 40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. F. Underground water-service piping [NPS 4 to NPS 8 (DN 100 to DN 200)] shall be any of the

following:



1. Ductile-iron, 2. PE, AWWA pipe; PE, AWWA fittings; and heat-fusion joints. 3. PVC, Schedule 40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. 4. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150): NPS 6 (DN 150) PVC, AWWA Class 150

pipe; PVC, AWWA Class 150 fittings; and gasketed joints. 5. NPS 8 (DN 200): PVC, AWWA Class 200 pipe; PVC, AWWA Class 200 fabricated

push-on-joint, ductile-iron fittings; and gasketed joints. G. Underground Fire-Service-Main Piping [NPS 4 to NPS 12 (DN 100 to DN 300)] <Insert pipe

size range> shall be[ any of] the following: 1. Ductile-iron, joints. 2. PE, Class [150], fire-service pipe; molded PE fittings; and heat-fusion joints. 3. PVC, AWWA Class 150 pipe listed for fire-protection service; PVC Class 150 fabricated

or molded fittings; and gasketed joints. 4. PVC, AWWA Class 200 pipe listed for fire-protection service; PVC Class 200 fabricated

fittings; and gasketed joints. 5. Fiberglass, AWWA, FMG-approved RTRP, Class [150] [200]; RTRF; and gasketed

joints. 6. Fiberglass, UL RTRP, Class [150] [200] [250]; RTRF; and gasketed joints.

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for NPS 3 (DN 80) and larger

underground installation. Use threaded- or flanged-end valves for installation in vaults. Use UL/FMG, nonrising-stem gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use corporation valves and curb valves with ends compatible with piping, for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller installation.

B. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Underground Valves, NPS 3 (DN 80) and Larger: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient-seated gate valves with valve box.

2. Use the following for valves in vaults and aboveground: a. Gate Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze, nonrising stem. b. Gate Valves, NPS 3 (DN 80) and Larger: AWWA, cast iron c. Check Valves: AWWA C508, swing type.

3. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Use for water-service piping in vaults and aboveground to control water pressure.

4. Relief Valves: Use for water-service piping in vaults and aboveground. a. Air-Release Valves: To release accumulated air. b. Air/Vacuum Valves: To release or admit large volume of air during filling of

piping. c. Combination Air Valves: To release or admit air.

5. Detector Check Valves: Use for water-service piping in vaults and aboveground to detect unauthorized use of water.

3.4 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping-system common

requirements.

3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. B. Install PE pipe according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 645. C. Install PVC, AWWA pipe according to ASTM F 645 and AWWA M23.



D. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 30 inches (750 mm), with top at least 12 inches (300 mm below level of maximum frost penetration, and according to the following:

1. Under Driveways: With at least 36 inches (910 mm) cover over top. 2. Under Railroad Tracks: With at least 48 inches (1220 mm) > cover over top. 3. In Loose Gravelly Soil and Rock: With at least 12 inches (300 mm) additional cover.

E. Install piping by tunneling or jacking, or combination of both, under streets and other obstructions that cannot be disturbed.

F. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building-water-piping systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.

1. Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building-water-piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building-water-piping systems when those systems are installed.

G. Sleeves are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." H. Mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for

Plumbing." I. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction.

Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports. J. See Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for fire-suppression-water

piping inside the building. K. See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for potable-water piping inside the building.

3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint

construction. B. Make pipe joints according to the following:

1. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water-Service Piping: AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

2. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194. 3. Ductile-Iron Piping, Grooved Joints: Cut-groove pipe. Assemble joints with grooved-

end, ductile-iron-piping couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling manufacturer's written instructions.

4. PE Piping Insert-Fitting Joints: Use plastic insert fittings and fasteners according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

5. PVC Piping Gasketed Joints: Use joining materials according to AWWA C900. Construct joints with elastomeric seals and lubricant according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM D 3139 and pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Fiberglass Piping Bonded Joints: Use adhesive and procedure recommended by piping manufacturer.

7. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, with OD, and with system working pressure. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for joining piping of dissimilar metals.

3.7 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION A. Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and

restrained-joint types that may be used include the following: 1. Concrete thrust blocks. 2. Locking mechanical joints. 3. Set-screw mechanical retainer glands. 4. Bolted flanged joints. 5. Heat-fused joints. 6. Pipe clamps and tie rods.



B. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems:

1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA C600. 2. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M23. 3. Bonded-Joint Fiberglass, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M45. 4. Fire-Service-Main Piping: According to NFPA 24.

C. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices.

3.8 VALVE INSTALLATION A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each

underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box. B. AWWA Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. C. UL/FMG, Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in

vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post. D. UL/FMG, Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. E. MSS Valves: Install as component of connected piping system. F. Corporation Valves and Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed

up and with service box. G. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Install in vault or aboveground between shutoff valves H. Relief Valves: Comply with AWWA C512. Install aboveground with shutoff valve on inlet.

3.9 DETECTOR-CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install in vault or aboveground. B. Install for proper direction of flow. Install bypass with water meter, gate valves on each side of

meter, and check valve downstream from meter. C. Support detector check valves, meters, shutoff valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.

3.10 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS A. Rough-in piping and specialties for water meter installation according to utility company's

written instructions.

3.11 VACUUM BREAKER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION A. Install pressure vacuum breaker assemblies of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves

and test cocks. Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Do not install pressure vacuum breaker assemblies in vault or other space subject to flooding.

3.12 BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION A. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks.

Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Do not install backflow preventers that have relief drain in vault or in other spaces subject to flooding.

C. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. D. Support NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger backflow preventers, valves, and piping near floor and

on brick or concrete piers.

3.13 CONCRETE VAULT INSTALLATION A. Install precast concrete vaults according to ASTM C 891.



3.14 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping connections to

valves and equipment. C. Connect water-distribution piping to existing water main. Use tapping sleeve and tapping

valve D. Connect water-distribution piping to interior domestic water and fire-suppression piping. E. Connect waste piping from concrete vault drains to sanitary sewerage system. See

Division 22 Section "Facility Sanitary Sewers" for connection to sanitary-sewer piping.

F. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

G. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks

have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.

B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours. 1. Increase pressure in 50-psig (350-kPa) increments and inspect each joint between

increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig (0 kPa). Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts (1.89 L) per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits.

C. Prepare reports of testing activities.

3.16 IDENTIFICATION A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for

underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

3.17 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows:

1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows: a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50

ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours. b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine

solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.

c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.

B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.








DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 22 11 16 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building.

2. Encasement for piping. 3. Specialty valves. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Escutcheons. 6. Sleeves and sleeve seals. 7. Wall penetration systems.

B. Related Section: 1. Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water-service piping and

water metersoutside the building from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand

effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7 – Chapter 13.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following products:

1. Specialty valves. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Backflow preventers 6. Escutcheons. 7. Sleeves and sleeve seals. 8. Water penetration systems.

B. Coordination Drawings: For piping in equipment rooms and other congested areas, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved: 1. Domestic water piping. 2. HVAC hydronic piping.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components C. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:



1. Notify Owner’s Authorized Representative no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

2.2 PEX TUBE AND FITTINGS A. PEX Distribution System: ASTM F 877, SDR 9 tubing.

1. Fittings for PEX Tube: ASTM F 1807, metal-insert type with copper or stainless-steel crimp rings and matching PEX tube dimensions.

2. Manifold: Multiple-outlet, plastic or corrosion-resistant-metal assembly complying with ASTM F 877; with plastic or corrosion-resistant-metal valve for each outlet.

2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40

2.4 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or

ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-

duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. E. Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Piping and Tubing: ASTM F 493. F. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to

ASTM F 656. G. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping

system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping"

for general-duty metal valves. B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for

balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers. C. PVC Union Ball Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Asahi/America, Inc. c. Colonial Engineering, Inc. d. Fischer, George Inc.



e. Hayward Flow Control Systems; Hayward Industrial Products, Inc. f. IPEX Inc. g. Jomar International, LTD. h. King Bros. Industries. i. Legend Valve. j. McDonald, A.Y. Mfg. Co. k. NIBCO INC. l. Sloane, George Fischer, Inc. m. Spears Manufacturing Company. n. Thermoplastic Valves Inc.

D. PVC Non-Union Ball Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Asahi/America, Inc. c. Colonial Engineering, Inc. d. Hayward Flow Control Systems; Hayward Industrial Products, Inc. e. IPEX Inc. f. Jomar International, LTD. g. King Bros. Industries. h. Legend Valve. i. McDonald, A.Y. Mfg. Co. j. NIBCO INC. k. Sloane, George Fischer, Inc. l. Spears Manufacturing Company. m. Thermoplastic Valves Inc.

E. PVC Butterfly Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Asahi/America, Inc. c. Colonial Engineering, Inc. d. Fischer, George Inc. e. Hayward Flow Control Systems; Hayward Industrial Products, Inc. f. IPEX Inc. g. Legend Valve. h. NIBCO INC. i. Sloane, George Fischer, Inc. j. Spears Manufacturing Company. k. Thermoplastic Valves Inc.

F. PVC Ball Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Asahi/America, Inc. c. Colonial Engineering, Inc. d. Fischer, George Inc. e. Hayward Flow Control Systems; Hayward Industrial Products, Inc. f. IPEX Inc.



g. Legend Valve. h. NIBCO INC. i. Sloane, George Fischer, Inc. j. Spears Manufacturing Company. k. Thermoplastic Valves Inc.

G. PVC Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Asahi/America, Inc. b. King Bros. Industries. c. Sloane, George Fischer, Inc. d. Spears Manufacturing Company.

2.7 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements Subject to compliance with

requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing. b. Dresser, Inc.; Dresser Piping Specialties. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The). d. JCM Industries. e. Romac Industries, Inc. f. Smith-Blair, Inc; a Sensus company. g. Viking Johnson; c/o Mueller Co.

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company. b. Harvel Plastics, Inc. c. Spears Manufacturing Company.

2. Description: PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert and one solvent-cement-socket or threaded end.

E. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Colonial Engineering, Inc. b. NIBCO INC. c. Spears Manufacturing Company.

2. Description: PVC four-part union. Include brass or stainless-steel threaded end, solvent-cement-joint[or threaded plastic end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.



2.8 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material

body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. EPCO Sales, Inc. d. Hart Industries International, Inc. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Description: a. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. EPCO Sales, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-

joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. D. Dielectric-Flange Kits:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Description: a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corporation.

F. Dielectric Nipples:



2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 2. Flexicraft Industries. 3. Flex Pression, Ltd. 4. Flex-Weld, Inc. 5. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 6. Mercer Rubber Co. 7. Metraflex, Inc. 8. Proco Products, Inc. 9. Tozen Corporation. 10. Unaflex, Inc. 11. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company

B. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing. 1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.

C. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing. 1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum [200 psig 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.

2.10 WALL PENETRATION SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. SIGMA.

B. Description: Wall-sleeve assembly, consisting of housing and gland, gaskets, and pipe sleeve. 1. Carrier-Pipe Deflection: Up to 5 percent without leakage. 2. Housing: Ductile-iron casting with hub, waterstop, anchor ring, and locking devices.

Include gland, bolts, and nuts. 3. Housing-to-Sleeve Gasket: 4. Housing-to-Carrier-Pipe Gasket: AWWA C111, 5. Pipe Sleeve: AWWA C151, ductile-iron pipe or ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, zinc-

coated steel pipe.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching,

and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic

water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.



C. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. D. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with

requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure-reducing valves.

E. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb. F. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.

G. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

H. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

I. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

J. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance. K. Install piping to permit valve servicing. L. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher

than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. M. Install piping free of sags and bends. N. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. O. Install PEX piping with loop at each change of direction of more than 90 degrees. P. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and

specialty. Q. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump and packaged

booster pump. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages.

R. .

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before

assembly. C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"

"Brazed Joints" Chapter. E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and

fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." F. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by

fitting manufacturer. G. Copper-Tubing, Push-on Joints: Clean end of tube. Measure insertion depth with

manufacturer's depth gage. Join copper tube and push-on-joint fittings by inserting tube to measured depth.

H. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.



I. Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll groove end of tube. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join copper tube and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for roll-grooved joints.

J. Ductile-Iron-Piping Grooved Joints: Cut groove end of pipe. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join ductile-iron pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for ductile-iron-pipe, cut-grooved joints.

K. Steel-Piping Grooved Joints: Cut or roll groove end of pipe. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

L. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

M. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements. Apply primer. 2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

N. PEX Piping Joints: Join according to ASTM F 1807. O. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both

piping systems.

3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves

for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations. B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or

equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." 1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.

D. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for calibrated balancing valves.

3.5 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping. B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings or unions.

3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples. C. Dielectric Fittings for [NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges flange kits nipples. D. Dielectric Fittings for [NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.



3.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION A. Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each domestic water

pump and in suction and discharge manifold connections to each domestic water booster pump. B. Install bronze-hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing. C. Install stainless-steel-hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping.

3.8 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for

Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices. B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping

and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation. 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet If Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch E. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Smaller: 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2 (DN 50): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2 (DN 80 and DN 90): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 7. NPS 6 (DN 150): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod. 8. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.

F. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m). G. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PEX piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing

and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: 32 inches (815 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.

H. Install hangers for vertical PEX piping every 48 inches (1200 mm). I. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing

and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm)

rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm)

rod. 4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod. 5. NPS 8 (DN 200): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.

J. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm). K. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's

written instructions.

3.9 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.



C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping. 2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes.

4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

3.10 SLEEVE INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in

floors, partitions, roofs, and walls. B. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. C. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves. D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated. E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built. F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation

using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.

G. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.

H. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using sleeve seals specified in this Section.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout. J. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide [1/4-inch (6.4-mm)] annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated. K. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:

1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Molded PVC or Steel pipe 2. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical Equipment Areas

or Other Wet Areas: Steel pipe or Stack sleeve fittings . a. Extend sleeves [2 inches (50 mm)] above finished floor level. b. For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing, extend cast-iron sleeve

fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to [2 inches (50 mm)] above finished floor level. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

3. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Roof Slabs: Molded PVC or Steel pipe Sleeves for Piping Passing through Exterior Concrete Walls: a. Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150). b. Cast-iron wall pipe sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger. c. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation when sleeve seals are used. d. Do not use sleeves when wall penetration systems are used.

4. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Interior Concrete Walls: a. PVC pipe or Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).



L. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestop materials and installations.

3.11 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water-service piping entries into

building. B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in

center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.12 WALL PENETRATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install wall penetration systems in new, exterior concrete walls. B. Assemble wall penetration system components with sleeve pipe. Install so that end of sleeve

pipe and face of housing are flush with wall. Adjust locking devices to secure sleeve pipe in housing.

3.13 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification

for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation. B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.

3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Piping Inspections:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or

inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction. C. Piping Tests:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.



5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.15 ADJUSTING A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide flow of hot water in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated. 5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during

installation. 6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.16 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable and non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using. 2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are

not prescribed, follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets. b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat

procedures if biological examination shows contamination. C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.



3.17 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used

in applications below unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building service piping, [NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller],

shall be the following: 1. PVC, Schedule 80 pipe socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.

D. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 4 to NPS 8 (DN 100 to DN 200) and larger, shall be one of the following: 1. Mechanical-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard- or compact- pattern mechanical-joint

fittings; and mechanical joints. 2. Push-on-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard- or compact- pattern push-on-joint fittings;

and gasketed joints. 3. PVC, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.

E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be one of the following: 1. PEX Tube, NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller; fittings for PEX tube; and crimped joints. 2. PVC, Schedule 40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.

F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100), shall be the following: 1. PVC, Schedule 40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.

3.18 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the

following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use

butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use

butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: [Calibrated] [Memory-stop] balancing

valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment. C. PVC valves matching piping materials may be used.






FACILITY SEPTIC TANKS 22 13 53 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 22 13 53 - FACILITY SEPTIC TANKS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Septic tanks. 2. Dosing tanks and effluent pumps. 3. Distribution boxes. 4. Pipe and fittings, including cleanouts.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 22 11 13 "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for sanitary sewer piping from

building to septic tank.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic. C. HDPE: High-density-polyethylene plastic. D. PE: Polyethylene plastic. E. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


1. Septic tanks. 2. Effluent pumps. 3. Distribution boxes. 4. Leaching chambers. 5. Pipe and fittings, including cleanouts.

B. Shop Drawings: Include manhole openings, covers, pipe connections, and accessories for the following precast concrete structures: 1. Septic tanks. 2. Dosing tanks. 3. Distribution boxes. 4. Wiring diagram for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Show piping, underground structures, and other utilities. Indicate size and invert elevations of piping and structures.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For effluent pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of septic tank

system and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.



1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Septic Tank System Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner’s Authorized Representative no fewer than two days in advance of proposed

interruption of service.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to

product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.2 SEPTIC TANKS A. Precast Concrete Septic Tanks: ASTM C 1227, two-chamber, precast, reinforced-concrete tank

and covers. 1. Design: For A-16 (HS20-44) traffic loading according to ASTM C 890. 2. Manholes: 24-inch- (610-mm-)] minimum diameter opening with reinforced-concrete

risers to grade and access lid with steel lift rings. Include manhole in center of each septic tank compartment top.

3. Inlet and Outlet Access: 12-inch- (300-mm-) minimum diameter, reinforced-concrete access lids with steel lift rings. Include access centered over inlet and outlet.

4. Resilient Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), of size required for piping, fitted into inlet and outlet openings.

B. Capacity and Characteristics: 1. Capacity: 1500 gal.

2.3 EFFLUENT PUMPS A. Description: Single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction, submersible, direct-connected effluent pump

complying with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3 for submersible sewage pumps. 1. Available Manufacturers:

a. ABS Pumps, Inc. b. Aermotor Pumps, Inc. c. Barnes; Crane Pump and Systems. d. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Industries. e. Federal Pump Corp. f. Flygt; ITT Industries. g. Goulds Pumps; ITT Industries. h. Grundfos Pumps Corporation U.S.A. i. HOMA Pump Technology. j. Hydromatic Pumps; Pentair Pump Group (The). k. KSB Inc. l. Liberty Pumps. m. Little Giant Pump Co. n. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. o. Metropolitan Industries, Inc. p. Orenco Systems Inc. q. Stancor, Inc. r. Sta-Rite Industries, Inc. s. Zoeller Company.



t. Or Approved Equal 2. Pumps: Duplex arrangement.

a. Casing: Cast iron, with open inlet and legs or base that elevate pump to permit flow into impeller, and discharge companion flange arranged for vertical discharge.

b. Impeller: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron; statically and dynamically balanced, closed or semi open design, overhung, single suction, and keyed and secured to shaft.

c. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory-sealed, grease-lubricated ball bearings and mechanical seals.

3. General requirements for motor: a. Motors: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in overload protection;

lifting eye or lug; and three-conductor waterproof power cable of length required, with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.

b. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor, moisture alarm, and waterproof cable of length required, with cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.

c. Motor Housing Fluid: Air d. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven

load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. e. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are

specified in Division 26 Sections. 4. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 4X wall-mounting enclosure with three mechanical- or

mercury-float or micropressure switches in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump cannot handle load.

B. Capacity and Characteristics: 1. Each Pump:

a. Capacity: 55 gpm. b. Total Dynamic Head: 40 feet of head c. Discharge Pipe Size: 2” d. Motor Horsepower: 3 hp e. Electrical Characteristics:

1) Volts: 240 V. 2) Phases: three phase. 3) Hertz: 60 Hz.

f. Provide VFD to convert 1-phase to 3-phase.

2.4 NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS A. Description: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition

coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Sleeve Materials:

a. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. b. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. c. For Vitrified-Clay Pipes: ASTM C 425, rubber. d. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe

materials being joined.

2.5 CLEANOUTS A. PVC Cleanouts: PVC pipe fitting for solvent-cement or elastomeric gasket joint with PE or PVC

threaded cleanout plug.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting

performance of septic tank systems. B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of soil structure and materials. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling for piping are specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earthwork &

Trenching." 1. Stockpile topsoil for reuse in finish grading without intermixing with other excavated

material. Stockpile materials away from edge of excavation and do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

2. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

B. Excavating and Backfilling for Septic Tanks: 1. Excavate sufficient width and length for tanks to depth determined by tank inlet elevation.

Provide level bottom. 2. Backfill with suitable excavated soil, bring grade and compact for surface restoration.

3.3 SEPTIC TANK INSTALLATION A. Install precast concrete septic tanks level according to ASTM C 891. B. Install septic tanks level.

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install distribution piping according to the following:

1. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2321. 2. ABS Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2321.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction is specified in Section 22 11 13 "Facility Water Distribution

Piping" Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Join distribution piping according to or with the following: 1. Install distribution pipe and fittings to connect septic tank distribution box, and headers for

absorption fields with closed joints. 2. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 402 and ASTM D 2855 for solvent-cemented

joints, or ASTM D 3212 and ASTM D 3034 for gasketed joints. 3. ABS Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 402 and ASTM D 2751 for solvent-cemented

joints, or ASTM D 2751 and ASTM D 3212 for gasketed joints. 4. Nonreinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation

Manual" for gasketed joints.

3.6 CLEANOUT APPLICATIONS A. Use cleanouts according to the following:

1. Inlet and Outlet of Septic Tanks: Cast-iron cleanouts.

3.7 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Cast-Iron Cleanouts: Install with PVC fitting riser from distribution and leaching piping to cast-

iron cleanout housing at grade. Use NPS 4 (DN 100) PVC sewer pipe and fittings with solvent-cemented joints for risers. Attach riser to cleanout housing with rubber gasket or coupling.



B. Cleanout Support: Set cleanouts in concrete blocks 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450 by 300 mm deep, unless location is in concrete pavement. Formwork, reinforcement, and concrete are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete

3.8 IDENTIFICATION A. Identification materials and their installation are specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earthwork &

Trenching." Arrange for installation of green warning tape directly over piping (including absorption-field piping), at outside edges of underground structures, and at outside edges of absorption fields.

B. Use detectable warning tape over piping, over edges of underground structures, and over edges of absorption fields.

3.9 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Section 22 11 13 "Facility Water

Distribution Piping". Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Ground effluent pumps according to Section 26 05 00 "Electrical General Requirements."

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. System Tests: Perform testing of completed septic tank system piping and structures according

to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Additional Tests: Fill underground structures with water and let stand overnight. If water level

recedes, locate and repair leaks and retest. Repeat tests and repairs until no leaks exist.

3.11 CLEANING A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. B. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends

of uncompleted pipe at end of workday or when work stops.






EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 45 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 22 45 00 - EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following emergency plumbing fixtures:

1. Pedestal-Mount Eye/face wash equipment. 2. Self-contained eyewash equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible Fixture: Emergency plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by

people with disabilities. B. Plumbed Emergency Plumbing Fixture: Fixture with fixed, potable-water supply. C. Self-Contained Emergency Plumbing Fixture: Fixture with flushing-fluid-solution supply. D. Tepid: Moderately warm.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include flow rates and capacities, furnished

specialties, and accessories. B. Product Certificates: Submit certificates of performance testing specified in "Source Quality

Control" Article.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z358.1, "Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment." C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable

Buildings and Facilities” Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act" for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

D. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EYE/FACE WASH EQUIPMENT A. Eye/Face wash Equipment,

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bradley Corporation. b. Chicago Faucets. c. Encon Safety Products. d. Guardian Equipment Co. e. Haws Corporation. f. Lab Safety Supply Inc. g. Murdock, Inc. h. Sellstrom Manufacturing Co. i. Speakman Company.



j. WaterSaver Faucet Co. k. Western Emergency Equipment l. Approved Equal.

2. Description: Plumbed, pedestal-mount eye/face wash equipment. a. Capacity: Deliver potable water at rate not less than 3.0 gpm at 30 psi for at least

15 minutes. b. Supply Piping: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) chrome-plated brass or stainless steel with flow

regulator and stay-open control valve. c. Control-Valve Actuator: Type 304 Stainless Steel Paddle or Push bar d. Receptor: Type 304 Stainless Steel bowl. e. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/4 minimum, f. Pedestal: 1-1/4” galvanized pipe assembly with safety yellow epoxy coating. g. Accessible

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for water piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections

before plumbed emergency plumbing fixture installation. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. Assemble emergency plumbing fixture piping, fittings, control valves, and other components. B. Install fixtures level and plumb. C. Fasten fixtures to substrate. D. Install shutoff valves in water-supply piping to fixtures. Use ball, gate, or globe valve if specific

type valve is not indicated. Install valves chained or locked in open position if permitted. Install valves in locations where they can easily be reached for operation. 1. Exception: Omit shutoff valve on supply to group of plumbing fixtures that includes

emergency plumbing fixture. E. Install shutoff valve and strainer in steam piping and shutoff valve in condensate return piping. F. Install dielectric fitting in supply piping to fixture if piping and fixture connections are made of

different metals. G. Install trap and waste to wall on drain outlet of fixture receptors that are indicated to be directly

connected to drainage system. H. Install indirect waste piping to wall on drain outlet of fixture receptors that are indicated to be

indirectly connected to drainage system. Drainage piping is specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

I. Install escutcheons on piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations. J. Fill self-contained fixtures with flushing fluid. K. Install equipment nameplates or equipment markers on fixtures and equipment signs on water-

tempering equipment.

3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect cold-water-supply piping to plumbed emergency plumbing fixtures not having water-

tempering equipment. C. Connect hot- and cold-water-supply piping to hot- and cold-water-tempering equipment. Connect

output from water-tempering equipment to emergency plumbing fixtures. D. Connect cold-water and steam supply and condensate return piping to steam and cold-water-

tempering equipment. Connect output from water-tempering equipment to emergency plumbing fixtures.



E. Connect cold water and electrical power to electric heating water-tempering equipment. F. Directly connect emergency plumbing fixture receptors with trapped drain outlet to sanitary

drainage and vent piping. G. Indirectly connect emergency plumbing fixture receptors without trapped drain outlet to sanitary

or storm drainage piping.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Mechanical-Component Testing: After plumbing connections have been made, test for

compliance with requirements. Verify ability to achieve indicated capacities and temperatures. B. Electrical-Component Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance

with requirements. 1. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

C. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made.

D. Report test results in writing.

3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace fixture flow regulators for proper flow. B. Adjust equipment temperature settings.







DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTIALTING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)





HVAC SYSTEMS 23 00 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 23 00 00 – HVAC SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section Includes: 1. Heating, cooling and ventilation systems for zones within the building. Contractor to size all ducting for the specified equipment.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Not Applicable

1.3 EXTENT OF WORK A. Heating/Cooling: Provide duct designs, ducting and refrigerant connections and required

bifurcations for equipment and zoning shown in the Drawings. 1. First Floor

a. Zone 1: Trough Room, O2 Room, Mechanical Room and Vault 1) None b. Zone 2: Chemical Room

1) Provide a Cadet Wall Heater w/ built in thermostat, Model #: SL152TW, 240V or equal

c. Zone 3: Mud/Utility Room 1) Provide a Cadet Wall Heater w/ built in thermostat, Model #: SL152TW, 240V or equal

2. Second Floor: a. Zone 1: (2) Apartments, Northwest Hallway

1) Provide a Fujitsu Medium Static Pressure Duct, Model #: ARUM24TLAV, or equal.

b. Zone 2: Common Area 1) Provide a Fujitsu Wall Mount, Model #: ARUM24TLAV, or equal c. Zone 3: (2) Offices, east Hallway,

1) Provide a Fujitsu Medium Static Pressure Duct, Model #: ARUM24TLAV, or equal.

d. Zone 4: Filter Room. 1) None

B. Ventilation: Provide duct designs, air ducting connections and possible bifurcations, and intake/exhaust grilles for equipment and zoning shown in the Drawings.

1. First Floor a. Zone 1A: Trough Room

1) Supply: Fantech FADE 16-4 Axial Fan with a Fantech WC 15 speed control, or equal

2) Exhaust: (2) Fantech FADE 12-4 Axial Fan each with a Fantech WC 15 speed control, or equal

b. Zone 1B: Chemical Room/O2 Room 1) Supply: None

2) Exhaust: Fantech FG 4 Centrifugal Inline Fan with a Fantech WC 15 speed control, or equal

c. Zone 1C: Mud/Utility Room 1) Supply: None 2) Exhaust: None d. Zone 1D: Mechanical Room and Vault 1) Supply: None



2) Exhaust: Fantech FG 4 Centrifugal Inline Fan with a Fantech WC 15 speed control, or equal

2. Second Floor a. Zone 2: Apartment x2, Common Area, Bathroom x2, misc spaces 1) Supply & Exhaust: Ventacity VS1000 or equal

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For all equipment, parts and accessories being provided for each of the heating,

cooling, and ventilation systems. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and weight all equipment used in the HVAC

systems. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of support points for equipment. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations for ducting cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for electrical service.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.5 APPLICATOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator shall have at least three years’ experience in installing products specified in the

Contract Documents on similar sized projects.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect against damage. B. Store in original, tightly sealed containers, and with original legible labels thereon. C. Do not open containers or remove labels until Owner’s Authorized Representative reviews.

1.7 WEATHER DURING WORK A. Perform no Work when weather exceeds manufacturer's specified limits.

1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide 10-year warranty for HVAC equipment. B. Provide a 2-year warranty for parts & labor.

1.9 TESTING A. A duct leakage test will be performed to verify there are no leaks present in the duct system(s).

This test shall seal off supply and return location for the system(s), leaving one open for the test. A calibrated fan shall be attached to the open supply/return and deliver air to the duct work. A pressure monitor shall be installed to measure pressure levels at the farthest end away from the calibrated fan. The test shall introduce air into the duct system to determine how much air is required to create a pressure change at the far end. Air flows above .1 cfm to create a pressure change will constitute failure and the duct system will need to be resealed at the leak locations.

B. HVAC systems shall be tested after commissioning to measure and confirm flows rates match the design rates shown in the Plans.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Heating/Cooling Unit A. Product: Fujitsu Airstage J-II heat Pump: Model #: AOU60RLAVM, or equal. B. The cooling/heating performance shall meet the following standards:

1. SEER (Non Ducted): 18.5 or higher 2. HSPF (Non Ducted): 11.3 or higher

C. Refrigerant: R410A



2.2 VRF System Indoor Unit A. Product: Fujitsu Airstage MSPD Indoor Unit: Model #: ARUM24TLAV, or equal.

B. Cooling Capacity: 24,000 Btu/h C. Heating Capacity: 27,000 Btu/h D. Airflow: 859 cfm max, 589 cfm min. E. Weight: 110 lbs (Max)

2.3 VRF System Wall Unit A. Product: Fujitsu Airstage Wall Unit: Model #: ASUB24TLAV, or equal.

B. Cooling Capacity: 24,000 Btu/h C. Heating Capacity: 27,000 Btu/h D. Airflow: 647 cfm max, 430 cfm min. E. Weight: 50 lbs (Max)

2.4 Dedicated Outside Air System (DOAS) Heat Recovery Unit (HRV) A. Product: Ventacity VS1000, or equal.

B. Heat Recovery Efficiency:

1. Heat Recovery Efficiency: 82% a. Rating certified by Passive House Institute

C. Ventilation Flow (Max) = 1000 cfm D. Air Filters must meet the following values

1. Intake Air Filter: MERV13

2. Return Air Filter: MERV8

2.5 Piping, Ducting and Fittings A. All duct work shall be insulated to an R value of 8.

B. All duct work joints shall be connected with #8 sheet-metal screws and sealed with mastic. Manufacturer’s installation requirements shall be followed during application of mastic to joints. All surfaces that shall be sealed with mastic shall be properly cleaned with soap and water and sufficiently dried before application. C. Duct corners shall be mitered elbows with vanes. Duct bifurcations shall be 45 degree conical wye connections. D. Ducts shall have a round cross section.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify prior to installation that adequate floor space is available for all equipment to be

housed/mounted in the mechanical attic space room.

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All holes made in the interior surfaces will be neat and tidy and sufficiently sealed to prevent air

leaks. No gaps will be visible around the wall/ceiling/floor penetrations. B. All ducting, piping and electrical will be placed in raceways and conduit and located to prevent

tripping hazards in the mechanical room. Refrigerant piping in the Common Space shall be placed within a mechanical chase.

C. System shall be tested to ensure all HVAC systems are operating as appropriate for the specified area in the building.



3.3 TRAINING & SPARE PARTS A. Upon completion and commissioning of the HVAC system, Contractor to provide a training

session for facility staff within 15 days of Substantial Completion. This training shall instruct the staff on the proper operation, maintenance, and basic service tasks that need to be performed on the system.

B. Contractor to provide a three copies of a three ring notebook containing all product manuals, warranties, FAQ, Troubleshooting guides, Manufacturer Contact Information to the Owner during the training session.

C. Contractor to provide one spare filter of all filters used in the HVAC systems. If multiple systems use the same filter, one spare shall be provided for each filter used in the system.




DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL





ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 26 05 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 26 05 00 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE A. The following supplements all sections of this specification and applies to all work specified,

shown on the drawings, or required to provide a complete installation of approved electrical systems.

B. Furnish all labor, equipment, appliances, materials, transportation, facilities, services, and skilled supervision necessary for the construction, erection, installation, connection, testing, and adjustment of all circuits and electrical equipment specified herein, shown, or noted on the drawings; specified or required in other portions of this specification; and its delivery to the Owner complete in all respects and ready for use.

1.2 INTENT OF DRAWINGS

A. Electrical drawings show only general locations of equipment, devices, and raceway, unless specifically dimensioned. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper routing of raceway, subject to the approval of the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

B. Riser and other diagrams are schematic only and shall not be used for obtaining quantities. C. The electrical drawings do not show complete details of the site conditions. The Contractor

shall check actual conditions.

1.3 DEPARTURES FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Submit to the Owner’s Authorized Representative, in writing, details of any proposed

departures from these Contract Documents, and the reasons the departures are necessary. Submit such requests as soon as practicable and within 30 days after award of the Contract. Make no such departures without written approval of the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

1.4 COORDINATION OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall plan his work in coordination with the power and telephone utility authorities and Owner operations.

B. The Contractor shall field verify all dimensions of equipment to be installed or provided by others or by this contract so that correct clearances and connections may be made between the work installed by the Contractor and equipment installed or provided by others.

C. The Contractor shall arrange all conduit runs so that they do not interfere with duct work, structural members, etc.

D. All working measurements shall be taken from the sites, checked with those shown on the drawings, and if they conflict, reported to the Owner’s Authorized Representative at once, and before proceeding with the work. Should the Contractor fail to comply with this procedure, he shall alter his work at his own expense as directed by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

E. No extra payments will be allowed where obstructions in the work of other trades, or work under this contract requires offsets to conduit runs.

F. The Contractor is responsible for all alterations in the work to accommodate equipment differing in dimensions or other characteristics from that shown or specified.

1.5 SUPERVISION

The Contractor shall maintain adequate supervision of the work and shall have a responsible person in charge at the site during all times that work under this contract is in progress, or when necessary for coordination with other work.



1.6 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work and materials shall conform to the applicable current standards (standard rules,

regulations, and specifications) of the National Electrical Code (NEC), National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA), Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards (OSHA), State and local electrical codes, and other specifically cited standards, as applicable. All materials unless otherwise approved by local government authorities shall bear the label of, or be listed by, a Nationally Recognized Testing laboratory (NRTL); the Underwriters' Laboratory, Inc. (UL) is one such NRTL. Where conflicts exist between any of the above standards, the standard which is most stringent shall take precedence. Where the contract documents exceed minimum requirements, the contract documents take precedence.

B. Observe where applicable the prevailing rules and requirements of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), the State and local fire marshals' regulations, and standards pertaining to adequate protection and/or guarding of any moving parts or otherwise hazardous conditions.

C. Resolve, at the Contractor's expense, all conflicts with applicable standards and provide a complete installation of Electrical Work, approved in all respects. Certain methods and materials for the project will require special approval and it is the Contractor's responsibility to prepare and submit to all approving authorities additional clarifying details, test data, methods and materials as needed to secure the required approval and resolve conflicts.

1.7 WORKMANSHIP

A. All Work shall be performed by personnel skilled in the particular trade. Workmanship shall conform to the standards of the NEC and the installation standards of NECA.

B. The Owner’s Authorized Representative shall be the sole judge as to whether or not the finished work is satisfactory; if, in his judgment, any material or equipment has not been properly installed or finished, the Contractor shall replace the material or equipment whenever required, and reinstall it in a manner entirely satisfactory to the Owner’s Authorized Representative without any increase in cost to the Owner.

1.8 PERMITS, FEES, AND SERVICE CHARGES

The Contractor shall obtain all permits and pay all fees.

1.9 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. In accordance with provisions elsewhere in these Contract Documents, manufacturers' names

and catalog numbers stated herein are intended to indicate the type and quality of equipment or materials desired.

B. Make requests for approval of alternates in writing to the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Provide sufficient material or data to allow evaluation of the proposed alternatives and determination of compliance with these Contract Documents. List any proposed deviations from these Contract Documents.

1.10 SUBMITTALS AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT

A. The Contractor shall provide complete manufacturer's descriptive information and shop drawings for all equipment, material, and devices furnished under this Division, including certified outline drawings, arrangement drawings, elementary (schematic) diagrams, interconnection diagrams, and connection diagrams, in accordance with provisions in Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” of these Contract Documents. Provide the number of copies specified therein for the Owner’s Authorized Representative, Contractor, and Operation and Maintenance Manuals.



B. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the schedule listed hereinafter. Provide certified shop drawings, literature, and requested samples showing items proposed for use, size, dimensions, capacity, special features required, schematic (elementary) control diagrams, equipment schedules, rough-in, etc., as required by the Owner’s Authorized Representative for complete review and for installation. Use NEMA device designations and symbols for all electric circuit diagrams submitted. Make content of schematic (elementary) connection of interconnection diagrams in accordance with the latest edition of NEMA ICS.

C. Contractor shall check submittals for proper number of copies, adequate identification, correctness and compliance with Drawings and Specifications, and initial all copies indicating this has been done. Revise, change, and/or resubmit all submittal information until acceptable to the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Obtain Owner’s Authorized Representative's acceptance before commencing fabrication or installation of any materials or equipment.

D. Review of submittal information by the Owner’s Authorized Representative shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from Drawings and Specifications, unless he has requested and received written approval from the Owner’s Authorized Representative for specific deviations at time of submission. Review of submittal information shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors and omissions in shop drawings or literature.

E. Manufacturer's standardized elementary diagrams shall not be acceptable unless applicable portions of the diagram have been clearly identified and non-applicable portions deleted or crossed out.

F. Submittals shall be made on, but not limited to, the following items: 1. Switchgear, Switchboards, and/or Motor Control Centers 2. Circuit breakers and enclosures 3. Panelboards and circuit breakers 4. Motor Controls 5. Special control panels - outline and schematic drawings, descriptive information,

component schedules 6. Wiring Devices, including Receptacles (120v duplex outlets), switches, boxes, etc. 7. All conduit types used in project 8. Special pull boxes and junction boxes 9. All conductor/wire types used in project

G. Submit a listing of all nameplate data from actual motors provided after delivery to site.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT, COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide all first-quality, new materials and equipment, free from any defects, in first-class condition, and suitable for the space provided. Provide materials and equipment listed by a NRTL (such as UL) wherever standards have been established by such agencies.

B. Where two or more units of the same class of material or equipment are required, provide products of a single manufacturer. Component parts of materials or equipment need not be products of the same manufacturer.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such materials and equipment. Provide the manufacturers' latest standard design that conforms to these Specifications.

2.2 EQUIPMENT FINISHES

Provide materials and equipment with manufacturers' standard finish system. Provide manufacturers' standard finish color, except where specific color is indicated.



2.3 PORTABLE OR DETACHABLE PARTS A. The Contractor shall retain in his possession and shall be responsible for all portable and

detachable parts or portions of installations such as fuses, key locks, adapters, blocking chips, and inserts until completion of his work.

B. These parts shall be delivered to the Owner’s Authorized Representative and an itemized receipt obtained. This receipt, together with 2 copies of the final inspection certificate, shall be attached to the Contractor's request for final payment.

C. All equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of this specification and the manufacturer's recommendations.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install materials and equipment in a workmanlike manner utilizing craftsmen skilled in the particular trade. Provide work which has a neat and finished appearance.

B. Coordinate electrical work with work of other trades to avoid conflicts, errors, delays, and unnecessary interference with Hatchery operations during construction.

C. Provide any necessary backing required to properly support all fixtures and equipment installed under this contract.

3.2 PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Throughout this Contract, provide protection for materials and equipment against loss or damage in accordance with provisions elsewhere in these Contract Documents. Protect everything from the effects of weather.

B. Prior to installation, store items in clean, dry, indoor locations. Store in clean, dry, indoor, heated locations items subject to corrosion under damp conditions, and items containing electrical insulation, such as transformers, conductors, motors, and controls. Energize all space heaters furnished with equipment.

C. Following installation, protect materials and equipment from corrosion, physical damage, and the effects of moisture on insulation. Cap conduit runs during construction with manufactured seals. Keep openings in boxes or equipment closed during construction. Energize all space heaters furnished with equipment.

3.3 LOAD BALANCE The Drawings and Specifications indicate connection of electrical loads and distribution

equipment; however, after installation, if necessary, certain electrical loads may require re-connection to achieve a more equal current balance.

3.4 MOTOR ROTATION

After final service connections are made, check and correct if necessary the rotation of all motors. Coordinate rotation with the Owner’s Authorized Representative and the Contractor responsible for the driven equipment. Submit a written report to the Owner’s Authorized Representative for each motor, verifying that rotation has been checked and corrected.

3.5 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish. Upon completion of

work, remove materials, scraps, and debris from premises and from interior and exterior of all devices and equipment. Touch up scratches, scrapes, or chips in interior and exterior surfaces of devices and equipment with finishes matching as nearly as possible the type, color, consistency, and type of surface of the original finish.



3.6 CUTTING, PATCHING, AND FRAMING A. The Contractor shall determine in advance the locations and sizes of all sleeves, chases, and

openings necessary for the proper installation of his work. B. Whenever practical, inserts or sleeves shall be installed prior to covering work. Cutting and

patching shall be held to a minimum. All required holes in concrete construction shall be made with a core drill and patched with non-shrink grout.

C. Cutting, fitting, repairing, and finishing of carpentry work, metal work, or concrete work, and the like, which may be required for this work shall be done by craftsmen skilled in their respective trades. When cutting is required, it shall be done in such a manner as not to weaken walls, partitions, or floors; and holes required to be cut in floors must be drilled without breaking out around the holes.

3.7 INSPECTION

All materials, equipment, and workmanship shall be subject to inspection at any time by the Owner’s Authorized Representative, or his representatives. Correct work, materials, or equipment not in accordance with these Contract Documents or found to be deficient or defective in a manner satisfactory to the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

3.8 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Provide operations and maintenance manuals in accordance with provisions of Section 01 73 00

“Operating and Maintenance Data”, in these Contract Documents.

3.9 RECORD DRAWINGS The Contractor shall maintain a neatly marked set of record drawings. Record Drawings shall

be marked with red indelible pencil to show all departures from original Drawings, underground cable, conduit, or duct runs dimensioned from established building lines, and all electrical work revisions. In addition, the locations of panels, field mounted instruments and panels, terminal boxes, junction boxes and any other materials included in this contract shall be shown. "As built" drawings shall be kept current with the work as it progresses and shall be subject to inspection by the Owner’s Authorized Representative at any time.

3.10 TESTS

Carry out tests specified hereinafter and as indicated under individual items of materials and equipment specified in other sections.

3.11 OPERATIONS

A. After the electrical system installation is completed and at such time as the Owner’s Authorized Representative may indicate, conduct an operating test for approval. Demonstrate that the equipment operates in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications and Drawings.

B. Perform the test in the presence of the Owner’s Authorized Representative or his authorized representative. Furnish all instruments and personnel required for the tests. The Owner will furnish the necessary electric power. System performance shall conform to the following criteria. Deviations, if any, shall be noted on the test reports with indication of corrective action taken or proposed. 1. Plus or minus 2 percent maximum variation between nominal system

voltage and average system voltage. 2. Plus or minus 5 percent maximum variation from nominal system voltage for all load

conditions. 3. Actual motor current on each ungrounded conductor at prevailing conditions shall be

equal to or less than nameplate rated full load motor current at a service factor of 1.0.



4. One percent maximum voltage unbalance at full load defined as 100 times the maximum deviation from average voltage divided by the average voltage. (Balance system loads and cooperate with the serving utility company to achieve a balanced condition which is within the indicated limits.)

5. Plus or minus 10 percent maximum variation between average phase current and individual phase current. Balance system loads to achieve a balanced condition which is within the indicated limits.

6. Insulation resistance shall be tested under normal climatic conditions and shall conform to the following:

a. Circuits of 600 volts or less shall have conductor insulation resistance as installed of not less than 10,000,000 ohms to ground.

3.12 TEST REPORTS

Submit dated "Electrical System Test Reports" indicating all tests performed and demonstrating conformance with the required system performance criteria. This test report shall include all voltage, current and resistance test data of the electrical service, main feeders, panelboards, power transformers and ground systems as applicable.

3.13 FINAL CORRECTION Promptly correct any failures or defects revealed by these tests as determined by the Owner’s

Authorized Representative. Re-conduct tests on these corrected items as directed by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

3.14 GUARANTEE

Materials, equipment, and workmanship shall be guaranteed in accordance with provisions of Division 01 “General Requirements”, in these Contract Documents.



BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 10 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 26 05 10 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE A. The following supplements all sections of this specification and applies to all work specified,

shown on the drawings, or required to provide a complete installation of approved electrical systems.

B. The work consists of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment required for electrical work shown on the drawings and as further described in these specifications.

1.2 GENERAL

See General Conditions of the Contract and Section 26 05 00 “Electrical General Requirements”, which contain information and requirements that apply to the work specified herein and are necessary for this project.

1.3 REGULATIONS AND PERMITS

A. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable codes, ordinances, and regulations, including the National Electrical Code, National Electrical Safety Codes, and State and local codes.

B. The Contractor shall obtain a Certificate of Electrical Inspection from the local inspecting authority and submit to the Owner’s Authorized Representative upon completion of the project.


Submittals after award of Contract shall be made in accordance with Division 01, “General Requirements,” and Section 26 05 00 “Electrical General Requirements”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES Provide boxes not less than 2 inches deep, unless shallower boxes are required by structural

conditions and are specifically accepted by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Use box extensions, where required, to provide wiring space required by the NEC. For hollow masonry construction, provide boxes of sufficient depth so that conduit knockouts or hubs are in the masonry void space. Pressed steel boxes are acceptable for concealed box locations.

2.2 CAST STEEL (CS) BOXES

For exposed box locations, provide boxes of cast ferrous metal with gasketed, cast ferrous metal covers and stainless steel screws. Where indicated, provide covers which are weatherproof. Provide boxes with threaded conduit hubs and cast mounting lugs where lugs are required. Use Crouse-Hinds or Appleton Type FS or FD boxes, or approved equal.

2.3 LARGE CAST METAL BOXES

Where larger cast metal boxes are required, use neoprene gasketed, watertight boxes with hinged, cast metal full-access covers, stainless steel cover hardware, and drilled and tapped conduit entrances. Use Crouse-Hinds Series W, O.Z./Gedney Series Y boxes, or approved equal. For conduit below grade, use Crouse-Hinds Type WJBF, O.Z./Gedney Series YR, or approved equal, minimum size 8 inches by 8 inches by 6 inches. For hazardous areas, use boxes applicable for the location and hazardous atmosphere present. Use special boxes where indicated on the Drawings.



2.4 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. Provide code gage galvanized sheet steel pull boxes as required or shown on the drawings.

Provide removable screw cover on the largest access side of the box unless otherwise detailed. Where cast boxes are indicated or specified, provide conduit entrances with threaded hubs. Provide stainless steel screws at all exterior and damp locations. Where pull boxes are required but not shown, provide pull boxes as specified above sized per NEC requirements.

B. Outdoor or Wet Locations: Utilize NEMA 4 watertight enclosures for outdoor or wet locations and where subscript WP is indicated at the box location on the Drawings.

C. Where outlet boxes are used as junction or pull boxes, use materials as specified under OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES.

2.5 WIRING DEVICES

A. Switches: 1. Provide flush switches, AC-type, single-pole, gray colored, rated 20 amp or higher

suitable for the type load to be controlled. Manufacturers: General Electric, Bryant, Hubbell, Sierra, Pass and Seymour, or approved equal.

2. Weatherproof Switches: Use switches as specified mounted in a cast metal box with gasketed, weatherproof device plate as specified.

B. Receptacles: 1. Single and Duplex: Provide UL listed, specification grade receptacles meeting NEMA

WD 1 performance standards and Federal Specification W-C-596 and having a contact arrangement such that contact is made on two sides of each inserted blade without detent. Use two-pole, three-wire grounding type receptacles rated 20 amps, 125 volts, NEMA Configuration 5-20R and with screw type wire terminals suitable for No. 10 AWG. Provide phenolic composition bases colored gray. Manufacturers: General Electric, Bryant, Hubbell, Sierra, Pass and Seymour, or approved equal.

2. Where indicated, provide receptacles with ground fault interrupter. Unit shall be furnished with internal, solid state, ground fault current sensing and tripping. The receptacles shall include built-in "TEST" and "RESET" switches and "TRIPPED" indicator and shall be rated 20-amp, 120-volt, and of the “feed-thru” type. The receptacles shall be UL approved. They shall be as manufactured by Pass and Seymour, 3M, Square D, or equal.

3. Weatherproof Receptacles: Use receptacles as specified mounted in a cast metal box with gasketed, weatherproof device plate as specified.

4. Special Purpose Receptacles: Provide receptacles of the type, rating, and number of poles indicated or required for the anticipated purpose. Furnish a matching plug with cord-grip features for each special purpose receptacle.

2.6 CONDUIT BODIES

Provide Crouse-Hinds Form 7, Appleton FM7, (or approved equal) conduit bodies. Covers shall be gasketed.

2.7 DEVICE PLATES

Provide plates for all wiring devices. Where devices are installed in exposed fittings or boxes, use "FSK" covers by Appleton, Pyle-National, Crouse-Hinds, or equal. Where weatherproof devices are specified on exterior or damp locations, use weatherproof covers as specified. Provide stainless-steel plates in all other finished areas.

2.8 ENGRAVED PLATES

Where device titles are indicated, provide black device plates engraved with the designated titles. Provide engraved letters, numbers, or characters 1/8-inch high with filler of white color.

2.9 CAST METAL (CM) PLATES



Provide cast metal device plates of malleable ferrous metal with gaskets and stainless steel screws with oval heads.

2.10 WEATHERPROOF (WP) PLATES

A. Where weatherproof switches are designated, the switch shall be installed in the specified box with a gasketed, weatherproof, cast-metal cover plate incorporating an external operator for the internal switch and with stainless steel mounting screws. Manufacturers and types: Crouse-Hinds DS 181 or DS-185, Appleton FSK-IVTS or FSK-IVS, or approved equal.

B. Where weatherproof receptacles are designated, the receptacle shall be installed in the specified box with a gasketed, metallic, die-cast Alloy 360 copper-free aluminum, “in-use” weatherproof rated (“bubble type”) cover plate with stainless steel mounting screws and padlock provision, unless otherwise shown. Manufacturers: Hubbell #WP8M, #WP8MH (Horizontal mount), #WP26M (for GFI type receptacles), or #WP26MH (for Horizontal mount GFI type receptacles); Intermatic #WP1010MC, or #WP1010HMC (Horizontal mount); or approved equal.

C. Where weatherproof devices are specified in above ground, interior, damp locations, cast malleable covers with gasket and stainless steel screws (“Bell type”) are acceptable, unless otherwise shown.

D. All receptacles shall be mounted with the hinge of the cover at the top; mount all “Bell type” receptacles horizontally.

2.11 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES

A. Provide precast concrete manhole and handhole units of the size and configuration indicated. Precast units shall be capable of supporting all in-plate external loads plus an H-20-44 truck loading. Concrete in the precast unit shall develop a minimum compressive strength of 4,500 psi in 28 days. Cover units and frames shall be the type as specified as to size, appearance, and mechanical strength. Covers shall seat properly to prevent rocking. Provide racks for all cables. Provide pulling irons. Manholes and handholes shall be Utility Vault Company with hinged and spring locked steel cover, similar by Brooks Products, or equal.

B. Provide extensions sections as required to accommodate duct bank burials and to bring cover flush with finished grade.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Boxes and cabinets shall be installed on the surface level and plumb and affixed to the surface

with expansion inserts in concrete and machine screws to tapped holes in metal surfaces. B. Interconnections between equipment shall be made per manufacturer's wiring diagram. All

wiring shall be clearly labeled and external connections in control panels and remote cabinets brought out to terminal blocks. All equipment connected to telephone lines shall be protected against voltage transients.

3.2 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES

A. Provide a box suitable for the conditions encountered at each outlet in the wiring or raceway system and sized in accordance with the NEC. Use the listed types unless otherwise indicated or accepted.

B. Types to be Provided, Metal Raceway System: Locations Box Type All Cast Steel

C. Mount receptacle boxes at 36-inches, AFF and light switch boxes at 48-inches, AFF, unless otherwise shown.

D. Where above heights do not suit the building construction or finish, locate boxes as indicated by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.



E. Locations indicated are approximate. Study the Drawings in relation to spaces and equipment surrounding each outlet. When necessary, relocate outlets to avoid interference.

F. Mount all boxes plumb and level. G. Install boxes in a secure, substantial manner supported independently of conduit by attachment

to the building structure or a structural member.

3.3 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. Where indicated on the Drawings, and where necessary to terminate, tap-off, or re-direct

multiple conduit runs, provide and install appropriately designed junction boxes. Furnish and install pull boxes where necessary in the raceway system to facilitate conductor installation. Provide pull boxes to limit conduit runs to less than 150 feet and to contain no more than the equivalent of three right-angle bends. 1. Types to be Provided: Use boxes of the types listed for specific locations under

OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES. Use outlet boxes as junction boxes and pull boxes wherever possible and allowed by applicable codes.

2. Installation: Make all boxes accessible. Do not install boxes in finished areas unless accepted by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Mount all boxes plumb and level.

3. Install boxes in a secure, substantial manner, supported independently of conduit by attachment to the structural member.

3.4 WIRING DEVICES

A. Receptacles: Mount receptacles with grounding slot down except where horizontal mounting is indicated, in which case mount with neutral slot down. Ground receptacles to boxes with grounding wire, not by yoke or screw contact. Mount weatherproof receptacles with the hinge for the protective cover above (not at side, or below) the receptacle opening.

B. Special Purpose Receptacles: Locate special purpose receptacles where shown. Install and mount the receptacles in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the applicable codes.

C. Label all receptacles with panel and circuit information indicating its power source.

3.5 DEVICE PLATES A. Types to be Provided:

Locations Plate Type All Cast Metal WP Designation Weatherproof

B. Installation: Securely fasten device plates to the receptacle boxes or the wiring device contained therein. Install device plates vertically or horizontally with an alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. Do not use sectional type device plates.

3.6 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES

A. Inspect actual field conditions at the proposed location for each manhole and handhole and verify that it is free from interference with other utilities and free of flooding due to the characteristic flow of surface water. Make minor relocations as required to clear obstructions and minimize flooding. Set all manholes and handholes on a 12 inch deep rock bed. Provide a 2 inch (minimum) round opening in the bottom of each manhole and handhole for drainage to the rock bed. Provide a ball-check valve (sized to match the opening) in the drain line extension to prevent groundwater from entering the manhole. Provide a gasket and grout between all extension sections to seal manholes watertight.



B. Conduits generally shall enter the handhole or manhole at approximate right angles to the wall and as near as possible to one end of the wall, unless otherwise indicated. Grout around all conduits and duct banks entering the manhole or handhole. Each manhole or handhole shall be provided with a minimum of one driven ground rod. The rod shall be copper clad, having a diameter of not less than 3/4 inch. The upper end of the rod shall terminate 6 inches above the manhole or handhole floor. The length of the rod shall be ten feet. All noncurrent carrying metal parts in the manhole or handhole shall be connected to the ground rod with a minimum of No. 6 AWG bare copper.






RACEWAYS 26 05 33 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE A. The following supplements all sections of this Specification and applies to all work specified,

shown on the Drawings, or required to provide a complete installation of approved electrical systems.

B. Work included: This section covers the work necessary to furnish and install complete electrical raceway systems.

1.2 GENERAL

See General Conditions of the Contract and General Requirements, and Section 26 05 00 “Electrical General Requirements” which contain information and requirements that apply to the work specified herein and are necessary for this project.

1.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. Perform all necessary excavation and backfilling for buried conduits and conductors as specified in Division 31 “Earthwork” of specifications, as applicable.

B. No backfilling shall be done until all direct burial cables, conduits, and penetrations to be covered have been inspected and approved.


Submittals after award of Contract shall be made in accordance with Division 01, “General Requirements”, and Section 26 05 00 “Electrical General Requirements”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL All raceway shall be NRTL (such as UL) approved for the application.

2.2 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT Use only hot dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit, including bushings, couplings, elbows,

nipples, and other fittings, and meeting the requirements of ANSI C80.1, ANSI C80.4, UL, the NEC, and Federal Specification WW-C-581. Use only threaded (do not use setscrew or compression type) couplings, bushings, elbows, nipples, and other fittings unless approved in writing by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. All threads shall be coated after cutting.

2.3 RIGID INTERMEDIATE STEEL CONDUIT (IMC)

. Use rigid intermediate steel conduit conforming to UL 1242 and Federal Specification WW-C-581. Use compression type (do not use setscrew type) couplings, bushings, elbows, nipples, and other fittings.

2.4 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

Use steel electrical metallic tubing conforming to Federal Specification WW-C-563. Use compression type (do not use setscrew type) couplings, bushings, elbows, nipples, and other fittings.



2.5 FLEXIBLE NON-METALLIC CONDUIT, LIQUID-TIGHT Use UL listed, liquid-tight, flexible non-metallic conduit conforming to NEC Article 356. Use

liquid-tight flexible non-metallic conduit suitable for conductors with 75 degree C insulation. Provide conduit labeled sunlight resistant where exposed or otherwise required by local codes. Conduit connectors shall be UL listed, Appleton type STNM, or equal.

2.6 PVC SCHEDULE 40 CONDUIT

Use rigid PVC Schedule 40 conduit, UL listed for concrete encasement, underground direct burial, concealed, direct sunlight exposed use, and marked for use with conductors having 90 degrees C insulation. Use conduits, couplings, bushings, elbows, nipples, and other fittings meeting the requirements of NEMA TC 2 and TC 3, Federal Specification WW-C-1094, UL, NEC, and ASTM specified tests for the intended use.

2.7 WARNING TAPE

Provide heavy-gauge, yellow plastic tape of 3-inch minimum width for use in trenches containing electric circuits. Utilize tape made of material resistant to corrosive soil. Use tape with printed warning that an electric circuit is located below the tape. Manufacturers and types: ITT Blackburn Type YT, Griffolyn Co., Terra-Tape, or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL A. No raceway shall be installed until work which might cause damage to wires, conduit boxes, or

fittings has been completed; conduit, boxes, fittings, and wires which become damaged in any way shall be removed from the job and replaced at expense of the Contractor.

B. Conduit buried in earth: Install raceways to provide not less than 30 inches cover to finished grade. Pitch to drain away from buildings; avoid trapped runs. Grade trenches and place pipe bedding material to provide uniform trench bottom for raceway support. Buried raceway shall not be smaller than 1 inch and shall be Schedule 40 PVC as specified, unless otherwise shown.

C. Provide rigid steel conduit for raceways embedded in structural reinforced concrete, below floor slabs-on-grade, in damp or corrosive locations, in hazardous areas, for exposed installations where subject to damage, for sizes 1-1/4 inch and larger, and at all locations not otherwise specified.

D. Provide steel electric metallic tubing or rigid conduit at the Contractor's option in furred spaces and above dropped ceilings. Provide rigid intermediate steel or rigid steel conduit at the Contractor's option in exposed interior locations, in masonry walls above grade, and in cement fill on roofs.

E. Provide flexible metallic conduit connections at all motors and transformers plus other equipment connections subject to vibration. Utilize suitable fittings, keep route neat, at nominal right angles, and in conformance with equipment lines.

F. Exposed conduit shall be run in straight lines parallel to column lines, walls, or beams. Where conduit is grouped, the bends and fittings shall be installed to present an orderly appearance. Unnecessary bending or crossing shall be avoided.

G. Supports for exposed conduit runs shall be furnished and installed within 3 feet of each box. Supports shall be secured by means of expansion inserts in concrete.

H. Conduit and fittings shall be properly protected during the construction period against mechanical injury from any cause. Conduit which extends out of floors, walls, or slabs shall be boxed or otherwise protected and ends shall be capped with metal pipe plugs.

3.2 SIZE

Use raceways no smaller than 3/4 inch except that 1/2 inch or larger may be used for switch legs and control circuit wiring specified to be No. 14 AWG wire.



3.3 RACEWAY INSTALLATION

A. Rigid conduit joints and connections shall be made thoroughly watertight and rustproof by means of thread compound which will not insulate the joint. Each threaded joint shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all the cutting oil before the compound is applied. Running threads will not be allowed. Erickson couplings may be used in dry and exposed locations provided that they are installed with fixed threaded connection at the top of vertical runs.

B. Raceways in Plain Concrete: Do not place raceways in cement toppings on structural floors without special approval. Install, however, in non-reinforced concrete headers and similar locations provided for their installation.

C. Raceways in reinforced concrete: Do not displace reinforcing steel to accommodate the installation of raceways and outlet boxes. In general, locate all embedded conduits in the physical center of the particular section of concrete. Wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry are not acceptable as a base for raceway fastenings. Provide raceways embedded in reinforced concrete in conformance with the following usual types of conditions unless otherwise instructed by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Particular attention is called to the fact that there are many extenuating conditions where the Contractor may be instructed during the course of the project not to place embedded conduits in certain areas, generally due to the possibility of unsightly cracking or for structural reasons. This instruction does not entitle the Contractor to extra compensation. Special approval will be required for any condition not covered by the following usual conditions. Location Maximum Allowance Columns Displacement of 4 percent of plan area of column Floors and walls Displacement of 1/3 of thickness of concrete, spaced not less than three

diameters o.c. Beams and joists Displacement of 1/3 of least dimension, spaced not less than three

diameters o.c. Sleeves through Two-inch maximum pipe size, not less floors and walls than three diameters o.c.

D. Raceways Penetrating a Roof Seal: Provide suitable lead flashing with shrink tubing. Submit shop drawings of method to be used for approval.

3.4 RACEWAY FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS

A. Coupling and Connections: Make all connections in threaded conduit watertight. B. On rigid conduit system, use threaded connections at all locations. Conduits and threaded hubs

shall have no less than five (5) threads engaged. Long threads known as "running threads" shall not be used. Erickson couplings or unions shall be used only in places where continuous conduit runs cannot be made satisfactorily. Regular cutting oil is suitable for threading steel conduit.

C. Make all box connections with two locknuts and one insulated steel, plastic, or fiber bushing. On all conduit and tubing systems, provide grounding locknuts or grounding bushings where required.

D. On non-metallic conduit systems, utilize solvent welded joints specifically recommended by the manufacturer; except at connections to metallic conduit systems, utilize threaded connections. Provide expansion fittings where required to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction. Utilize factory made long sweep ells throughout, except where space or similar restrictions dictate the use of minimum or special field bends.

E. Stub Outs: Extend conduit stubs at least one foot outside slab or fill, before connections are made.

F. Protection: Cap raceways immediately upon rough-in. Utilize temporary plastic caps designed for the purpose. The use of paper or rag wads will not be permitted.



G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joint fittings in all raceways crossing expansion joints or because of the length of the conduit run and temperature variations. Where differential settlement may occur, use deflection fitting.

H. Equipment Connections: Equipment connection indicated in plan are diagrammatic unless detailed. In general, a single stub up is indicated to serve the equipment and controls. Conform to the actual equipment connection requirements.



SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION 26 27 13 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 26 27 13 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE A. The following supplements all sections of this Specification and applies to all work specified,

shown on the Drawings, or required to provide a complete installation of approved electrical systems.

B. This section covers the Work necessary to furnish and install a complete electrical service and distribution system.

1.2 GENERAL

See General Conditions of the Contract and Division 01, “General Requirements”, and Section 26 05 00, “Electrical General Requirements,” which contain information and requirements that apply to the work specified herein and are necessary for this project.

1.3 SUBMITTALS AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT Submittals after award of Contract shall be made in accordance with Division 01, “General

Requirements”, and Section 26 05 00, “Electrical General Requirements,”

1.4 ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. The utility company rendering electrical service to this project is Tillamook People’s Utility

District (TPUD). Furnish all labor and install all material not furnished by the utility company, including stainless steel meter bases, stainless steel CT cans, transformer pads, and vaults, or poles as shown, or as required by utility company to render service to the project from utility service point. Verify service point metering requirements, vault and pad construction details, service charges, etc., and include all costs in bid proposal.

B. Provide ground services as required to satisfy utility company and code requirements. C. Provide trenching and backfill at locations shown on the plans and as required by the utility

company for service cable to the project site. D. For utility service conduit, provide sweeps per utility company standards. E. Verify all pull boxes, transformer details, and cable details with the utility company and observe

utility company standards throughout. 1.5 SYSTEM VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS

Provide electrical system nominal utilization voltage characteristics as follows: Typical Voltage Nominal Utilization Description Herein Voltage 480/277 460/265 120/208 115/200 120/240 115/230

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MAIN FUSED SWITCH A. Furnish and install Main Fused Switch where indicated. Main fused switch shall be enclosed in

a NEMA 1 general purpose enclosure unless otherwise noted, with a front cover mounted metal nameplate that contains a permanent record of catalog number and maximum ratings, and a handle that is lockable in the "OFF" position. Enclosed Main Fused Switch shall be rated for "service entrance".

B. Main Fused Switch shall meet the specification requirements listed under "Safety Switches and Disconnecting Means", below.

REVISED: 01-15-2019



C. The interrupting capacity of the Main Fused Switch shall be at least 100 kAIC at 480 volts.

2.2 SAFETY SWITCHES AND DISCONNECTING MEANS A. Furnish safety switches as shown or required. All equipment shall conform to NEMA standards

latest revision as applicable. B. Switches shall be heavy-duty class, quick-make, quick-break, safety-type, externally operable,

with bypassable interlock to prevent opening of cover in "ON" position. Switch shall have positive indication of "OFF" and "ON" position. Devices shall have visible blades unless molded-case breaker mechanism is used. Switches shall be so constructed as to preclude single phasing of switch blades due to mechanical failure. Switches shall be padlockable in the "OFF" position.

C. Switches shall be of the proper horsepower, ampere, and voltage rating with number of poles required to open all ungrounded conductors and with solid neutral bar where required. Provide auxiliary switch contacts in all disconnect switches.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, individually-mounted switches shall be in NEMA type 1 enclosure except in wet locations or where indicated as weatherproof, in which case a NEMA type 4 stainless steel enclosure shall be provided.

2.3 PANELBOARDS A. Provide circuit breaker panelboards meeting standards established by UL, NEMA PB-1, and the

NEC. B. Utilize panelboard interiors that are factory assembled complete with circuit breakers as

indicated. Furnish circuit breakers in positions where diagram or schedule indicates SPARE. Furnish only complete provisions for future circuit breakers where diagram or schedule indicates SPACE, and cover with a removable cover. Utilize panelboards with interiors designed so that circuit breakers can be replaced without disturbing adjacent breakers or without removing the main bus.

C. Panelboards shall be dead-front, surface mounted, flush mounted, or mounted inside of Motor Control Centers (as indicated) with subbreakers, main lugs, double lugs, or main breakers as shown on the drawings. Lugs shall be sized for feeders and shall conform to the specification for splicing and terminations. Buses shall be copper, full panel length. Buses shall be identified. Minimum bus rating shall not be smaller than the setting of the feeder protective device. Provide full panel length copper ground bus in all panelboards. 1. Special features: Provide split-bus, subfeed lugs, subfeed protective device, and

contactors as indicated on the drawings or specified in this or other sections of these specifications.

2. Lighting and appliance panelboards (240 V class): Minimum breaker interrupting rating shall be 10,000 amps, symmetrical. Provide breakers and panel of higher interrupting rating where indicated. Provide minimum box dimensions per NEC.

3. Furnish an insulated neutral bus bar rated the same as the phase bus bars (unless otherwise noted) and having at least one terminal screw for each branch circuit. Furnish a copper ground bus bar installed on the panel board frame, bonded to the box, and containing at least one terminal screw for each circuit. Provide solderless main lugs for main, neutral, and ground bus bars. Provide lugs and connection points on phase, neutral, and ground bus suitable for either copper or aluminum 75 degree C conductors.

D. Circuit breakers: Provide circuit breakers meeting requirements of NEMA AB-1. 1. Provide molded case bolt-on circuit breakers with thermal magnetic trip units, and a

common trip bar for two or three-pole breakers, connected internally to each pole so that the tripping on one pole will automatically trip all poles of each breaker. Handle bales or clips will not be acceptable. Provide single, two, or three pole breaker interchangeability.

2. Provide breakers of the trip-free and trip-indicating type, with quick-make, quick-break contacts. Breakers shall have terminals rated for 75 degrees C (minimum).



3. Provide circuit breaker with handle padlocking provisions where indicated or required. 4. Where ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) circuit breakers are indicated or required

by the NEC, provide a unit containing a conventional thermal magnetic trip and a ground fault sensor rated to trip the circuit breaker in approximately 0.025 seconds for a 5- milliampere ground fault (UL Class A sensitivity). Utilize a ground fault sensor having the same rating as the circuit breaker and having a push-to-test button.

5. Where arc fault circuit interrupter (AFCI) circuit breakers are indicated or required by the NEC, provide a unit containing a conventional thermal magnetic trip and an arc fault sensor to trip the circuit breaker. Utilize an arc fault sensor having the same rating as the circuit breaker and having a push-to-test button.

6. Tandem, duplex, or half-sized circuit breakers: Do not use this type of equipment unless specifically noted.

E. Provide a printed (computer-printed or typewritten), clearly legible circuit directory under a metal framed transparent plastic cover inside each panelboard. Provide an engraved, laminated plastic nameplate on the outside of the panelboard showing the panelboard designation, voltage, and phases.

2.4 FUSES, 600-VOLT AND LESS

A. Provide fuses as manufactured by Bussmann Manufacturing Company, Chase-Shawmut Company, or equal. 1. Fuses protecting control circuits shall be Bussman "Fusetron", Chase-Shawmut "Trionic,"

or equal, dual-element type having an interrupting rating of at least 100,000 Amps RMS unless otherwise noted.

2. The following general requirements shall apply to all fuses: a. Fuses shall be coordinated with each other and with circuit breakers in the circuit. b. Make adjustments in the specified fuse sizes and provide substitute fuses as

required to achieve reliable trouble-free operation of all fused circuits. c. Provide a fuse in each fuse holder. d. Provide a label inside each cover or adjacent to each fuse holder indicating specific

type of fuse required for replacement. e. Provide six spare fuses for each low-voltage current rating used on the project,

except no spare fuses will be required for integral current-limiting fuse circuit breaker units.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SUPPORTS A. Provide hangers or other devices such as pads, channels, struts, joists, anchors, etc., necessary

for the support of electrical equipment. Provide the design, fabrication, and erection of supplementary structural framing electrical equipment. Show on shop drawing supplementary framing including design loads, member size, and location. When supplementary framing is indicated, verify that dimensions are suitable for the equipment furnished. Provide additional strength when equipment furnished is heavier than that specified.

3.3 DAMP AND WET LOCATION

A. Provide 1/4 inch air space behind all electrical equipment mounted in damp and wet locations and on concrete walls below grade. Use corrosion-resistant washers, bolts and anchors.

B. Unless otherwise specified, all electrical enclosures in damp and wet locations shall be NEMA 4, stainless steel.







DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK





EARTHWORK AND TRENCHING 31 20 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 31 20 00 – EARTHWORK AND TRENCHING

1.1 SUMMARY A. This section specifies earthwork which consists of excavation, filling, grading, trenching,

imported fill materials, geotextile fabrics, stockpiling, and excess material control. Section includes: 1. Pipeline Trenching and backfill. 2. Excavation and backfill for concrete structures.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01, Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary

controls, utilities, and support facilities; also for temporary site fencing if not in another Section.

2. Division 31, Section 31 23 10 "Site Demolition and Preparation" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade structures and utilities.

3. Division 31 Section 31 23 19 "Dewatering" for lowering and disposing of ground water during construction.

C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 1. Comply with all applicable requirements of local, state and federal agencies. 2. Comply with Oregon Occupational Safety and Health Code.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Samples

1. All imported materials proposed for the work, 7 days in advance of use. 2. Quantity

a. 0.5 cubic feet of each type of material. B. Disposal site for excavated materials.

1. Location and owner of permitted disposal site for non-hazardous excavated material. C. Dewatering plan. D. Pre-excavation Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and

site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earth moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Compaction

1. The degree of compaction is specified as percent compaction. Maximum or relative densities refer to soil densities obtainable at optimum moisture content.

B. Backfill: Soil material or controlled density fill material used to fill an excavation. C. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. D. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward

capillary flow of pore water. E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and

dimensions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond

indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Owner’s Authorized Representative. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Owner’s Authorized Representative. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Owner’s Authorized Representative, shall be without additional compensation.

F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.



G. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses and conglomerate deposits in its natural location that requires systematic quarrying and/or drilling for its removal; boulders of rock material 1-1/2 cu. yd. or more in volume.

H. Structures: Footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

I. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

J. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Trenching Protection

1. Protect adjacent structures and surrounding areas from damage during dewatering, shoring installation and removal, excavation, drilling, and backfilling.

2. Maintain a minimum of 5 feet between shoring or edge of trench and adjacent property boundary, construction easement line or designated construction limit as shown on the Drawings.

3. Protect all work from erosion and comply with all of the requirements of Section 31 51 00 “Erosion Control.”

B. Weather 1. Do not backfill or construct fills or embankments during freezing weather. 2. Do not use frozen materials, snow, or ice in any backfill, fill area, or embankment. 3. Do not backfill or construct fill or embankments on any frozen surface. 4. Comply with wet weather working conditions recommendations provided in the

Geotechnical Report. C. Remove and handle all excavated material regardless of its type, condition or depth. D. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, driveways and other adjacent occupied or

used facilities during earth moving operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities

without written permission from Owner’s Authorized Representative. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner’s

Authorized Representative. E. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service "Call Before You Dig" for area where

Project is located before beginning earth moving operations. F. Do not commence earth moving operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control

measures, specified in Division 01 Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls," are in place.

G. Do not commence earth moving operations until plant-protection measures specified in Division 31 Section 31 23 10 "Site Demolition and Preparation” are in place.

H. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise

indicated. I. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones. J. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Drain Rock

1. Imported, open graded, granular material with a maximum size of 1-1/2-inch and less than 2% passing the No. 200 sieve (washed analysis).

B. Fine Granular Material 1. Fine granular material consisting of 1”-minus, well graded, angular, crushed gravel or

rock, in accordance with Standard Specifications Section 02630.10. C. Trench Bottom Stabilization Rock

1. Clean, open-graded crushed rock granular material of 3 /4- to 1-1 /2-inch gradation having a nominal maximum size of 4 in. Clean on-site sandy gravel may be acceptable for this material. Use of on-site material shall be approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

D. Pipe Bedding and Pipe Zone 1. Clean, 3/4-minus crushed rock with less than about 5% passing the No. 200 sieve

(washed analysis). E. Trench Backfill

1. Granular material consisting of sand and gravel or crushed rock. Maximum particle size shall be 2-inch. On-site sandy gravel may be acceptable for this material. Use of on-site material shall be approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

F. Crushed Rock Surfacing 1. Fine Granular Material in accordance with paragraph 2.1 B.

G. Controlled Low Strength Materials (CLSM) or Controlled Density Fill (CDF): Flowable lean concrete mix meeting requirements of Oregon Department of Transportation (ODOT) Standard Specification 00442.

H. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

I. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487 or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

J. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.

K. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

L. Granular Drainage Blanket: Graded mixture meeting requirements of Oregon Department of Transportation (ODOT) Standard Specification 00360.11. Material may be accepted without testing if the Owner’s Authorized Representative visually determines compliance with ODOT standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations. C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove

temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.



3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared

subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water

accumulation. C. Dewater excavations free from water during construction in accordance with the

recommendations contained in the Geotechnical Report. D. Have on hand pumping equipment and machinery in good working condition for emergency

and have workers available for its operation. E. Operate dewatering systems continuously (24 hours per day, 7 days per week) until backfill has

been completed to 1 foot above the normal static groundwater. F. Dewatering requirements and restrictions: see Section 31 23 19 “Dewatering”.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.4 HAULING A. Hauling and Traffic Patterns

1. When hauling is done over highways or city streets trim the loads and clean the vehicle shelf areas after each loading.

2. Cover the loads after trimming to minimize dust. 3. Maintain traffic patterns in the existing structural filled areas which preserve the stability

of the soil under all future structural foundations or paved areas. B. Haul Roads

1. Utilize existing haul roads and/or construct new haul roads as required to transport materials on site.

2. Select alignment of haul roads to avoid interference with any construction and to minimize disruption of local traffic.

3.5 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface

and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials

and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent

construction without exceeding the following dimensions: a. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings. b. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings. c. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade. d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without

forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. e. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete mats or slabs-on-grade.

B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross sectioned by Owner’s Authorized Representative. The Contract Sum will be adjusted for rock excavation according to unit prices included in the Contract Documents. 1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface;

underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.



a. Intermittent drilling; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.

2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions: a. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings. b. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings. c. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade. d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without

forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. e. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete mats or slabs-on-grade.

C. Clear and grub site areas to receive structural or surfacing improvements in accordance to Section 31 23 10 “Site Demolition and Preparation.”

D. Except as otherwise noted or specified any method of excavation may be used which meets the intent of the Contract Documents and does not damage adjacent improvements. Material excavated may be placed adjacent to the excavation if space is available. The toe of the slope of the spoil material must be at least 2 feet from the edge of the excavation. Pile trench spoils in a manner to prevent surface water from flowing into the excavation.

E. Existing utilities of record are shown on the Drawings. These are shown for convenience only, and the Owner assumes no responsibility for improper locations or failure to show utility locations on the Drawings. Protect existing utilities and infrastructure, not scheduled for demolition, from damage at all times.

F. Perform all excavation of every description and of whatever materials encountered to the depth indicated on the Drawings or specified. Make excavations by open cut in all locations, except as indicated on the Drawings. Excavate all footings and pipe trenches to true and smooth bottom grades and in accordance with the grades shown. Prepare the bottom of excavations to provide uniform bearing and support by undisturbed soil for each footing or slab on grade structure. Cobbles and boulders that would otherwise extend in to the trench or footing design limits shall be removed and replaced with structural foundation stabilization material. Proof roll the top 12-inches of subgrades for pavements and building slabs.

G. Exercise sound construction practices in excavating and maintain it so that no damage will occur to any foundation, structure, pole line, pipeline, or other adjacent facility because of slough or slopes, or from any other cause. If, as a result of the excavation, there is ground deformation which may endanger other property, immediately take remedial action to correct the problem. No act, representation, or instruction of the Owner’s Authorized Representative shall in any way relieve the Contractor from liability for damages or costs that result from excavation.

H. Prior to installation of structures or bedding and pipe, bring the excavation bottom to grade as indicated for the type of bedding specified, and compact the subgrade as necessary by tamping, with mechanical compactors to provide a foundation capable of supporting the pipe in its proper position.

I. Take care not to excavate below the depth specified. If ground is excavated below the depth specified, backfill excavation below that depth with structural fill and compact as specified herein at no cost to the Owner.

J. Stockpiling of topsoil, excess material and unsuitable material at the work site is allowed at the existing stockpile area, segregate materials by soil type.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If

applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.



1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.

B. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones: 1. Excavate by hand to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use

narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Division 01 Section 31 23 10 "Site Demolition and Preparation"

3.7 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT A. Unsuitable materials include but are not limited to peat, soils with high organic content, and

other soft, loose, saturated, and/or disturbed soils. Removal of unsuitable material below the trench bottom shall not be authorized without prior approval of the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

B. When unsuitable material is encountered at or below the trench bottom, it shall be excavated to a depth specified by the Owner’s Authorized Representative and backfilled with fill material. The material shall be placed in lifts of 8 inches maximum thickness and compacted to at least 90% of the maximum dry density as determined by AASHTO T-180. Each layer shall be fully compacted prior to placement of subsequent layers. The Owner’s Authorized Representative reserves the right to specify an alternate trench section in lieu of the over-excavation procedure described above.

C. Unsuitable material shall be disposed of by the Contractor within 5 working days of the time of excavation, except in or adjacent to roadways or other improved areas where it shall be disposed of within 24 hours of excavation.

3.8 PIPELINE BEDDING A. Where the invert of the new pipe is established in sand and gravel, favorable pipe foundation

conditions should be encountered; hence, only the minimum thickness of bedding will likely be required, as approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. In areas where the invert will be established in cobbles and boulders, a minimum 6-inch thickness of bedding material beneath the pipe is required. It should be anticipated that some overexcavation of cobbles and boulders and subsequent backfilling will be required to provide uniform support for the pipe. The backfill placed to restore subgrade level should be firmly tamped into place prior to installing the normal bedding lift. Compact the bedding material around the pipe by the use of shovels or other approved hand-held tools, so as to provide firm and uniform support under the full length of the pipe. Compact the bedding between the pipe and trench wall using mechanical methods.

B. Take care to prevent any damage to pipe or its protective coating and to maintain the pipe within the line and grade tolerances specified in the Standard Specifications. Bedding shall be placed, compacted, and shaped to conform to the barrel of the pipe, with allowance for bells and other appurtenances, to ensure firm and continuous support for the entire length of pipe.

C. Pipe zone: After the pipe has been installed, alignment and grade checked and the inside checked for possible obstructions, the Contractor shall backfill and compact trenches using pipe zone material over the pipe as shown in the Drawings, making sure the backfill is in contact with the entire periphery of the pipe. The balance of the backfill shall be placed as backfill zone material.



3.9 TRENCH BACKFILL A. The granular backfill shall be placed in lifts and compacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry

density as determined by ASTM D 698 to a depth of 5 feet or to a depth of 1.5 times the width of the trench, whichever is deeper. Below this depth, trench backfill shall be compacted to at least 90% of the maximum dry density (ASTM D 698). Compaction should be accomplished using vibratory plate compactors or tamping units. Flooding or jetting the backfilled trenches with water to achieve the recommended compaction is not permitted.

B. Backfill above the pipe zone in such a manner that the pipe will not be shifted out of position nor damaged by impact or overloading.

3.10 SOIL FILL A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill

material will bond with existing material. B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under seeded and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. Place in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches in depth for hand-operated tampers.

2. Under structural slabs and mats, use engineered fill. Place in layers not more than 12 inches in depth.

3. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. Place in layers not more than 12 inches in depth.

4. Under riprap slope armor, use granular drainage blanket material. Spread in layers with no layer exceeding 3 feet in depth.

5. For backfill of concrete walls, use granular drainage blanket material. Place in layers with no layer exceeding 3 feet in depth.

6. For stream bank slope armor, use loose riprap material placed on riprap geotextile. Spread in one layer of depth indicated.

7. For stream bed construction, use streambed materials placed in one layer to elevations indicated.

C. Place soil fill materials on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.11 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and

uniformly along the full length of each structure. B. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight

according to ASTM D 698: 1. Under structures, slabs, mats and pavements compact the top 12 inches of each layer of

backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 2. Under seeded or unpaved areas, compact the top 12 inches of backfill or fill soil material

at 85 percent. C. Do not compact the following soil materials:

1. Granular drainage blanket material spread on stream bank slopes beneath loose riprap armor.

2. Granular drainage blanket material placed as backfill for structural walls. 3. Loose riprap spread on stream banks as slope armor over geotextiles. 4. Streambed material placed in the stream.

3.12 COMPACTION TESTING A. Pipe bedding and backfill: 1 ea. per 500 feet of pipe or 1 minimum per trench B. Pavement Subgrades and Bases: 1 test per lift of material, per 1,000 square feet. C. Embankment, where required, and Structural Fill: 1 test per lift of material, per 1,000 square

feet.



3.13 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply

with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances. B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from structures and to prevent ponding.

Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1-inch 2. Pavements: Plus or minus ½-inch. 3. Structures: Plus or minus 1-inch. 4. Stream Banks: Plus or minus 3 inches. 5. Streambed: Plus or minus 3 inches.

C. Grading inside Structure Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of ½-inch when tested with a 10-foot .

D. Roadway and Parking Grading: Finish ordinarily obtainable from a blade-grader operation, but not more than 0.1-foot above or below the established grade.

3.14 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC A. Install material following manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Install Riprap Geotextile according to ODOT Standard Specifications Section 00390.41.

3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Earthwork Inspections: Contractor will provide a qualified inspector to perform the following

inspections: 1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with

requirements. 2. Determine that fill material and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements.

3.16 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep

free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed

surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact if required, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,

and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.17 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and

debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. B. Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or

spread soil as directed by Owner’s Authorized Representative. 1. Remove waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally

dispose of them off Owner's property.



SITE DEMOLITION AND PREPARATION 31 23 10 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 31 23 10 – SITE DEMOLITION AND PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work specified in this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Demolition and removal of portion of reinforced concrete structure and related site improvements.

2. Removing below-grade construction. 3. Filling or removal of underground pipes. 4. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, abandoning in-place and removing site utilities 5. Filling voids in subgrade as a result of demolition work. 6. Removing and disposing of vegetation, duff, organics, or other unwanted materials from

the ground surface. 7. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 8. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 9. Removing materials from the site. 10. Removing designated trees and protecting from harm any trees or other objects selected

to remain. 11. Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section 01 10 00 "Summary of Work" for use of the premises and phasing

requirements. 2. Division 01 Section 01 50 00 “Temporary Facilities and Controls” for temporary utility

services, construction and support facilities, security and protection facilities and temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.

3. Division 31 Section 31 23 19 “Dewatering” for controlling groundwater and stream water during construction.

1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless

indicated to be removed and salvaged. B. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic

matter and soil organisms. C. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site.

In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

D. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow.

E. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.

F. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.

1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. No historic items are anticipated to be encountered on this project. Should historic items, relics,

and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to the Owner that may be encountered during site preparation shall remain the Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to the Owner.



B. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. C. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain

Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and

site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing. 1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or video. 2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each

tree or other plants designated to remain. B. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other

subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. C. Procedures and operational sequence for review and acceptance by the Owner’s Authorized

Representative. Include: 1. Permits for transport and disposal of debris as required.

D. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit informational report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

E. Schedule of Structure Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of demolition work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 2. Temporary interruption of utility services. 3. Shutoff and capping or re-routing of utility services.

F. Pre-demolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining residences, construction and site improvements, including landscaping and finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations.

G. Qualifications: Previous experience record of general contractor and specialty sub-contractors for environmentally sensitive in-stream demolition, earthwork and construction operations.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. C. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be demolished. 2. Review and finalize structure demolition schedule and verify availability of demolition

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review and finalize protection requirements. 4. Review procedures for noise control and dust control. 5. Review procedures for protection of adjacent residences. 6. Review items to be removed and salvaged by Owner. 7. Review items to be removed and salvaged by contractor to be reinstalled.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Structures to be demolished will be abandoned and their use discontinued before start of the

Work. B. Residences immediately adjacent to work area will be occupied. Conduct structure demolition

so operations of occupied residences will not be disrupted. 1. Maintain access to existing garages, carports, driveways, doorways, walkways, exits, and

other facilities used by occupants of adjacent residences.



a. Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits, or other facilities used by occupants of adjacent residences without written permission from Owner’s Authorized Representative.

C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

D. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, driveways, walks, and adjacent residences during site-clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, driveways walks, or other adjacent occupied or used

facilities without permission from Owner’s Authorized Representative. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner’s

Authorized Representative. E. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service “Call Before You Dig” for area where

Project is located before site clearing. F. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control

and tree-protection measures are in place.

1.7 COORDINATION A. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site fish hatchery operations

or continued occupancy of adjacent residences.

1.8 DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUT A. The Contractor shall be responsible for fencing the construction area and resetting fencing to

accommodate changes in the construction area. B. All work, materials, methods, and personnel shall be subject to approval by the Owner’s

Authorized Representative prior to commencing construction and on a continuing basis for each phase requiring accuracy control.

C. The Contractor is responsible for preserving all benchmarks and stakes and replacing any that are displaced or missing as a result of the Contractor's operations.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for locating all underground utilities prior to beginning any excavation or underground demolition.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in

Division 31 Section 31 20 00 "Earthwork and Trenching." 1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not

available on-site.

2.2 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Temporary Chain Link Fence

1. Temporary chain link fence and gates shall be provided to protect the public from the work area.

2. Fence posts shall be driven into the ground a minimum of 30 inches in lieu of concrete footings.

3. Concrete footing shall be used for gate posts. 4. Where shown on the Drawings the existing fence may be left in place and used as a

temporary fence.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DEMOLITION CONTRACTOR A. Demolition Contractor: Experienced and qualified for environmentally sensitive in-stream

demolition operations.

3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verify clearing and grubbing and site features and site structures to be removed and

demolished. B. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition operations. C. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction provided by Owner’s Authorized

Representative. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

3.3 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during

construction. B. Locate and clearly identify trees to remain. Wrap a 1-inch blue vinyl tie tape flag around each

tree trunk at 54 inches above the ground. C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner’s Authorized Representative.

D. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving structures to be demolished.

E. Dewatering: Install dewatering facilities to control groundwater.

3.4 EROSION/POLLUTION CONTROL A. Required erosion/pollution control facilities in accordance with Section 31 51 00 “Erosion

Control” shall be in place prior to beginning the work of this Section. B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction

activity do not enter or cross protection zones. C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction

until permanent vegetation has been established. D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during

removal.

3.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Existing Residences: Protect adjacent residential driveways, carports, doorways, walkways, and

other residential facilities during demolition operations. Maintain exits continuously from existing residences.

B. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection such as chain link metal or wood fences where required by Owner’s Authorized Representative and as indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 1. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, trees and landscaping to remain. 2. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip

line of groups of trees to remain. 3. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people

and damage to adjacent residences. 4. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around structure demolition area and

to and from occupied adjacent residences. C. Do not shut off or cap utilities without prior notice. Maintain storm drains open for free

drainage:



1. Provide filter fabric at catch basins. D. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open

excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in place.

3.6 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. General: Clear and Grub or otherwise prepare areas to receive construction or other

improvements. 1. Excavate and remove all stumps to a depth of 3 feet below existing grade or proposed

subgrade, whichever is lower. 2. Excavate and remove roots larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter, rocks greater than 2-inch

in any dimension, boulders, any asphalt and concrete paving and reservoir lining material, as well as other unsuitable materials.

3. Remove topsoil, sod, duff, organics, and loose or soft soils. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones. 5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

3.7 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to depth of 6 inches in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil

or other waste materials. 1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and

other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water. 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones. 3. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity indicated to be

stockpiled or reused. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.

3.8 TREE AND SHRUB PROTECTION A. Provide tree and shrub protection as follows:

1. Include barricades and/or fencing and other protection for trees and shrubs indicated on the Drawings and directed by the Owner’s Authorized Representative to be saved and protected.

2. Maintain existing grade within root protection zone of trees unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 SITE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish indicated structures and site improvements completely. Use methods

required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations B. Engineering Surveys: During demolition, perform surveys to detect hazards that may result

from structure demolition activities. C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct structure demolition and debris-removal

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and adjacent occupied residences.

D. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. E. Proceed with demolition of structural components systematically, from higher to lower level.



F. Below-Grade Construction: Demolish completely concrete foundation walls, footings, slabs, mats and other below-grade construction.

G. Sprinkle debris with water as necessary to limit dust to lowest practicable level. Do not use water to extent causing flooding, contaminated runoff, or icing.

H. Utilities: Fill all piping to be abandoned in place with sand, CDF, or lean concrete. Remove all piping designated for removal, including underground piping and exposed piping. 1. Piping:

a. Some utility piping and structures are to remain until new services are in operation and shall be protected during construction. Damage to existing utilities, which are to remain, shall be repaired at no additional cost to the Owner.

b. In the event the Contractor encounters utility lines not shown on the Drawings or otherwise indicated to be saved, removed, or abandoned, the location of such lines shall be marked in the field and the Owner’s Authorized Representative notified.

2. Existing utility lines, structures, and meters serving other properties shall remain in operation unless otherwise shown. Protect and support lines and meters from damage and movement.

3.10 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS A. The refuse resulting from site preparation shall be disposed by the Contractor in a manner

consistent with all government regulations. 1. No burning permitted. 2. Do not leave refuse material on the project site, shoved onto abutting private properties,

or buried in embankments or trenches on the project site. 3. Do not deposit debris in stream, body of water, street or alley, or upon private property

except by written consent of the private property Owner. 4. Maintain hauling routes clean and free of debris resulting from work of this Section.

3.11 SITE RESTORATION A. Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from structure

demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in Division 31 Section 31 20 00 "Earthwork and Trenching."

B. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.

3.12 REPAIRS A. Promptly repair damage to adjacent residences caused by demolition operations.

3.13 CLEAN-UP A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, remove all rubbish, trash, and debris resulting

from operations. B. Remove equipment and tools; leave the site in a neat and orderly condition acceptable to the

Owner’s Authorized Representative.



DEWATERING 31 23 19 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 31 23 19 – DEWATERING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes the requirements for providing for the control of surface water runoff,

dewatering of excavations and other elements to keep excavations free of water during completion of the Work.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 31 20 00 "Earthwork and Trenching" for excavating, backfilling and site grading.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. NONE

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain

dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control hydrostatic pressures and to lower, control, remove, and dispose of ground water and surface water to permit excavation and construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades. 1. Delegated Design: Design dewatering system, including comprehensive engineering

analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

2. Continuously monitor and maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations and constructed slopes, that excavation does not flood, and that damage to subgrades and permanent structures is prevented.

3. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 4. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing residences, structures, and site

improvements adjacent to excavation. 5. Remove dewatering system when no longer required for construction.

B. Surface water runoff and discharge from dewatering shall be disposed of so as not to cause injury to public or private property, or to cause a nuisance or a menace to the public. Under no condition shall trench water or surface water runoff be discharged directly to a receiving water.

C. Surface water runoff and discharge from the dewatering system shall pass through a settling basin prior to discharge to the receiving waters or conveyance system. In areas where there are no acceptable locations for the construction of settling basins, the Contractor shall utilize portable settling tanks. Environmental control fencing conforming to Section 31 51 00 “Erosion Control” shall be used to construct check dams to slow the water's velocity so that suspended particles will settle out. Discharge from the dewatering operation should pool up behind the check dams and spill over slowly. A series of check dams shall be constructed as required to obtain discharge meeting the ambient conditions of the receiving waters outside of the construction areas. The check dams and settling basins shall be cleaned as required.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing United States EPA, Oregon DEQ and

Tillamook County WES notification regulations before beginning dewatering. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility serving facilities occupied by

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated:



1. Notify Owner’s Authorized Representative no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of utility.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without Owner’s written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL A. Provide machinery, appliances, and equipment designed and manufactured to control water.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent residences, structures, utilities, roads, driveways, walkways and other facilities

from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering operations. 1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from

ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site and surrounding area. 2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water

accumulation. B. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with residences, roads, driveways,

walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct roads, driveways, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used

facilities without permission from Owner’s Authorized Representative. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Provide temporary grading to facilitate dewatering and control of surface water. D. Monitor dewatering systems continuously. E. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering. F. Protect and maintain temporary erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in

Division 01 Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" during dewatering operations.

3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Excavation and placement of backfill and fill shall be carried out in the dry. The Contractor

shall furnish, install, operate and maintain necessary equipment and appurtenances to keep excavations free from water during construction. The Contractor shall have on hand sufficient pumping equipment and machinery in good working condition for emergencies, including power outage, and shall have available at all times competent workmen for the operation of the pumping equipment. The dewatering systems shall not be shut down between shifts, on holidays or weekends, or during work stoppage without written permission from the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

B. The control of groundwater shall be such that softening of the bottom of excavations, or formation of "quick" conditions or "boils" during excavating shall be prevented. Dewatering systems shall be designed and operated so as to prevent removal of the natural soils.

C. Do not use open or cased sumps as primary dewatering means for excavations more than 3 feet below the static water level. Sumps used for dewatering excavation shall be filtered sumps constructed of 2 casings or slotted pipes with the annular space filled with a filter material, such as 1/4- to 1/2-inch washed rock. Sumps shall be constructed outside the pipeline alignment.

D. Surface water runoff shall be controlled so as to prevent entry or collection of water in excavations. The static water level shall be drawn down a minimum of 1-foot below the bottom of the excavation so as to maintain the undisturbed state of the foundation soils and allow the placement of any fill or backfill to the required density. Dewatering systems shall be installed



and operated so that the groundwater level outside the excavation is not reduced to the extent that would damage or endanger adjacent structures or property.

E. Trench water shall not be allowed to enter the pipe at any time. F. The release of groundwater to its static level shall be performed in such a manner as to maintain

the undisturbed state of the natural foundation soils, prevent disturbance of compacted backfill and prevent flotation or movement of structures, pipelines or sewers.

G. The Contractor shall make provisions to take care of surplus water, mud, slickings, and runoff pumped from excavations or resulting from sluicing or other operations and shall be responsible for any damage of whatever nature resulting from its failure to provide for the adequate control of runoff.

H. In areas where the Contractor constructs settling ponds for the control of surface water runoff and discharge from dewatering systems, and after the Contractor has completed construction in the area of the settling pond, the Contractor shall remove the sediment deposited in the bottom of the pond, dispose of the sediment at approved sites, backfill with select native or imported material as specified and hydroseed the area.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump

equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water disposal, and surface-water controls. 1. Space well points or wells at intervals required to provide sufficient dewatering. 2. Use filters or other means to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the subsurface.

B. Before excavating below ground-water level, place system into operation to lower water to specified levels. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been constructed and fill materials have been placed or until dewatering is no longer required.

C. Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation, construction of structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Install sufficient dewatering equipment to drain water-bearing strata above and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations. 1. Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade

softening, and slope instability. D. Reduce hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below subgrade elevations of foundations,

drains, sewers, and other excavations. 1. Maintain piezometric water level a minimum of 24 inches below surface of excavation.

E. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water and sediment in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow-control devices as required by Owner’s Authorized Representative or authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Provide standby equipment on site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to Owner. 1. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or fill well

holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches below overlying construction.

G. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Observation Wells: Provide, take measurements, and maintain at least the minimum number of

observation wells or piezometers indicated; additional observation wells may be required by authorities having jurisdiction.



1. Observe and record daily elevation of ground water and piezometric water levels in observation wells.

2. Repair or replace, within 24 hours, observation wells that become inactive, damaged, or destroyed. In areas where observation wells are not functioning properly, suspend construction activities until reliable observations can be made. Add or remove water from observation-well risers to demonstrate that observation wells are functioning properly.

3. Fill observation wells, remove piezometers, and fill holes when dewatering is completed. B. Provide continual observation to ensure that subsurface soils are not being removed by the

dewatering operation.

3.5 DAMAGES A. Repair any damage to work in place that may result from inadequate or improper installation of

the Dewatering or System, maintenance, and operation of the system, and any mechanical or electrical failure of the system. Work in place including: 1. Structures. 2. Other contractors' equipment. 3. The excavation, including damage to the bottom due to heave and removal of material and

pumping out of the excavated area. B. Immediately support any utilities or other structures that become unstable and vulnerable to

settlement due to removal or disturbance of groundwater. 1. Support shall include, but not be limited to, excavation support system including sheeting

and bracing; grouting; underpinning; driving piles; backfilling; placing new structural concrete beneath or adjacent to the unstable structure; or other means to control the event.



EROSION CONTROL 31 51 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 31 51 00 – EROSION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section specifies temporary erosion and sediment control to minimize erosion and

sedimentation during and following construction. Work shall include providing required plan; materials; installation and maintenance of temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control measures; preparing slopes; mixing; seeding; fertilizing; mulching; and temporary covering of graded slopes, disturbed areas, and stockpile areas in accordance with the permits, DEQ requirements, these Specifications and as shown on the Drawings.

B. The erosion control system indicated on the Drawings shall be considered the minimum. Additional facilities may be required to protect the public water supply, adjacent property and receiving waters.

C. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section 01 10 00 "Summary of Work" for use of the premises and phasing

requirements. 2. Division 01 Section 01 50 00 “Temporary Facilities and Controls” for temporary utility

services, construction and support facilities, security and protection facilities and temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.

3. Division 31 Section 31 23 19 “Dewatering” for controlling groundwater and stream water during construction.

1.2 QUALITY CONTROL A. References: This section references the latest revisions of the following documents. They are a

part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Reference Title

ASTM A392 Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric ASTM D 882 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting ASTM D 1004 Test Method for initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and Sheeting ASTM D1505 Test Method for Specific gravity of polymer ASTM D 1777 Test Method for Thickness of Textile Materials ASTM D 3776 Test Method of Mass per Unit Area (Weight) of Fabric ASTM D3786 Test Method of Mullen Burst Strength ASTM D 5034 Test Methods for Breaking Strength and Elongation for Textile Fabrics (Grab Test) ASTM D4491 Test Method of Water Permitivity ASTM D4632 Test Method of Grab Tensile Strength

B. Testing: Testing may be conducted by the Owner’s Authorized Representative to determine compliance with the specified materials, soil preparation, hydroseed mix, spreading and physical erosion protection barrier.

C. Comply with all applicable requirements of local, state, and federal agencies. D. Conform to local and state Water Quality Standards for all discharge.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 00 “ Submittal Procedures”. B. Shop drawings and product data:

1. Product data for catch basin filter fabric, filter fabric fence and all other erosion control materials used.

2. Manufacturer’s or supplier’s certificates of compliance with Specifications. 3. Haul routes ingress and egress. 4. Submittal of responses to the questions referencing this Section.



1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct erosion control system prior to demolition, clearing, grubbing or excavation activities. B. Provide staging of construction and coordination between onsite stockpiles and wasting of

excess material in movement of sedimentation fences as construction progresses, temporary seeding, and use of mulch, netting, sod, etc.

C. Changes to the Erosion Control as shown on the Drawings may be required based on the Contractor’s construction methods procedures and coordination with Owner and Contractor operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS A. Geotextile for silt fence, filter fabric filters, and gravel wire mesh filters. Geotextile shall be

Mirafi 100X or approved equal, and shall have the following characteristics: 1. Puncture: 60 lbs 2. Grab Strength/Elongation: 120 lbs/15% 3. Mullen Burst Strength: 280 psi 4. EOS: 20 5. Ultraviolet light resistance: 70% (% Strength Retained)

B. Straw bales shall be bales of straw tied with wire or plastic. The straw shall be free of noxious weeds and reed canary grass seed.

C. Composite Drainage Net (CDN): CDN shall consist of geonet with nonwoven geotextile bonded at the factor to each side. The laminate bond strength between the geonet and geotextile shall be 1 pound per inch measured in accordance with ASTM D413. The bonding process shall not impair the transmissivity of the geonet or the permeability of the geotextile. 1. Geonet shall be domestic polyethylene resin extruded ribs made to form a rigid, porous net

of uniform pattern with distinct measurable openings. Geonet shall be Tex-Net TN-3002, as manufactured by Fluid Systems, Inc., Cincinnati, OH; Tendrain 100-2, as manufactured by Tenax Corporation, Baltimore, MD; or DC 4205, as manufactured by Tensar Corp., Morrow, GA, or approved equal. Approximately 2 percent carbon black shall be added to the resin for ultraviolet light resistance.

Thickness, in. (MinARV) ASTM D1777 0.2 Aperture Size center to center of ribs, in., max Direct measure 0.39 Specific gravity of polymer ASTM D1505 0.937

2. Geotextile shall be nonwoven bonded to each side of the geonet. The geotextile shall be a pervious sheet of polypropylene or polyester filaments oriented into a stable network so that the filaments retain their relative position with respect to each other. The geotextile shall be manufactured into a width 6 inches gather than the width of the geonet roll. The geotextile shall conform to the following maximum or minimum average roll (MaxARV or MinARV) physical property values:

Thickness, mil (MinARV) ASTM D1777 80 Weight oz/sq yd (MinARV) ASTM D3776 6.0 Water Permittivity, sec-1 (MinARV) (falling head) ASTM D4491 1.8 Grab Tensile Strength, lb (MinARV ASTM D4632 145 Grab Elongation, % (MaxARV) ASTM D4632 50-90 Mullen Burst Strength, psi (MinARV) ASTM D3786 220

D. Reinforced Plastic Fabric: 1. Construed, copolymer laminate. 2. Reinforcing: Non-woven grid of high strength nylon cord submerged in a permanently

flexible adhesive medium. 3. Equal tear resistance in all directions. 4. Color: Black. 5. Ultraviolet light stabilized. 6. Material to from a single manufacturer.



7. Physical strength requirements: a. Tear strength, lbs: 130 per ASTM D1004. b. Elongation percent; 620 per ASTM D882. c. Minimum life expectancy: 2 ½ years of normal outdoor exposure.

E. Fabrics/mats/blankets: 1. Geotextiles: Section 31 20 00. 2. Temporary erosion control blankets:

a. Biodegradable wood materials. b. No chemical additives. c. Photodegradable extruded plastic netting top and bottom. d. Smolder resistant. e. Physical properties of blanket for slope protection:

1) Weight: 0.98 lbs/sy. 2) Netting: 1-inch by 2-inch.

f. Physical properties for blanket for channel protection: 1) Weight: 1.0 lbs/sy. 2) Netting: 5/8-inch by 3/4-inch.

F. Wire fabric for silt fence: 1. 2-inch x 4-inch mesh, 14 gage or approved equal. 2. Hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A 392, Class 2. 3. Height: As shown on Drawings.

G. Posts: Nominal 2-inch by 4-inch wooden posts, No. 2 grade or better, pressure treated for exterior applications, Alternatively, Contractor may submit proposal to utilize aluminum-coated steel fence posts and aluminum alloy tie wire.

H. Hold Downs: 1. Sand bags as approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. 2. Secure with 1/4-inch polypropylene rope at 10 feet on center maximum each way. 3. Anchor rope with 2-inch by 4-inch fir, standard or better.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION A. Prior to general stripping of topsoil and excavation, install all temporary erosion and

sedimentation control as shown in the Drawings. B. Install catch basin protection at all catch basins within 100 feet of work area or at nearest

downstream catch basin if none within 100 feet. C. Install filter fabric sediment fences and stabilized construction entrances at locations shown in

the Drawings. D. Utilize Baker Tanks to meet detention requirements for sediment control. E. Install stabilized construction entrance per Drawings. F. Install straw bales as necessary and as required by permit or as directed by the Owner’s

Authorized Representative. G. Hydroseed and provide temporary control blankets and permanent revegetation mats for all

erosion control ditches, drainage ditches, and sedimentation traps unless otherwise noted. Maintain, in accordance with the specifications.

H. Provide additional silt fence or construction fencing to protect areas of landscaping that will not be affected by construction.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Plastic sheeting:

1. Install in accordance with the Drawings at all excavation faces and at stockpiles. 2. Completely cover stockpiles including slope faces. 3. Anchor plastic sheeting in 2-foot by 2-foot trench around the entire perimeter of plastic

sheeting.



4. Overlap joints with minimum 2-foot lap and tape seam. 5. Install hold downs at all excavation faces and at stockpiles. 6. Secure hold downs with polypropylene rope at 10-foot on center, maximum each way,

across the entire surface of plastic sheeting. 7. Anchor the polypropylene rope by driving 2-inch by 4-inch stake at the top of excavations or

bottom of stockpiles and tying rope to stake. B. Filter Fabric Silt Fence:

1. Install filter fabric over wire fabric. 2. Secure filter fabric to wire fabric.

a. Use aluminum alloy wire, minimum 10 gage. b. Spacing at top: maximum of 4-foot on center

3. Repairs: patch with filter fabric extending 6 inches beyond damaged area in all directions. C. Wire Fabric:

1. Install wire fabric for attachment of filter fabric for sediment fence. 2. Secure wire fabric to posts with heavy duty wire staples (at least 1-inch long), aluminum

alloy tie wires (10 gage) or wire rings. Secure at top, middle, and bottom. 3. Backfill area immediately upslope and adjacent to the fences line with drain rock as shown

on the Drawings. 4. Set posts at 6-foot maximum spacing. 5. Wire fabric to extend 24 inches above ground surface.

3.3 CLEARING AND GRADING A. Comply with the requirements of all applicable permits. B. Limit daily scope of clearing and grading operation to minimize the area of exposed soils open

at one time. Submit daily clearing limit as part of Contractor’s erosion/sedimentation control plan.

C. Maintain intact all landscaping and planting to remain. D. Cast and save topsoil for use as required by permits or these Contract Documents.

3.4 SOURCE SEDIMENT CONTROLS A. Placement and use of temporary erosion controls shall be provided during construction using

filter fences, straw bales, and sediment traps. B. Gravel Filter Berms: Where required, construct gravel filter berms of 3/4- to 3-inch well graded

gravel or crushed rock with less than 5 percent fines. C. Temporary Cover: Complete temporary seeding, site seeding or utilize filter fabric, straw, or

plastic sheeting to cover the bare earth surfaces.

3.5 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain and modify the erosion control system and change the Plan throughout construction as

required. B. Implement structural Best Management Practices (BMPs) to divert flows from exposed soils.

Store flows or otherwise limit runoff and the discharge of pollutants from exposed areas of the site. Such practices may include silt fences, earthen dikes, drainages swales, sediment traps, check dams, subsurface drains, pipe slope drains, level spreaders, storm drain inlet protection, rock outlet protection, reinforced soil retaining systems, gabions, and sediment basins: 1. Prior to leaving the site, pass all site runoff through a silt fence, catch basin filter, sediment

pond, Baker Tank or other appropriate BMP. 2. Protect adjacent properties and surface waters from sediment deposition. 3. Protect properties and waterways downstream from the construction site from erosion due to

increases in storm water runoff from the site. C. Initiate stabilization measures as soon as practical in portions of the site where construction

activities have temporarily or permanently ceased: 1. Stabilize all exposed and unworked soils by suitable and timely application of BMPs, which

may include temporary seeding permanent seeding, mulching, geotextiles, sod stabilization,



vegetative buffer strips, protection of trees, preservation of mature vegetation, and other appropriate measures.

2. All exposed and unworked soils shall be stabilized according to the following criteria: a. From October 1 to April 30, no exposed and unworked soils shall remain

unstabilized (exposed) for more than two days. Non-erodible, clean, granular base materials shall be applied to stabilize all trafficked areas.

b. From May 1 to September 30, no exposed and unworked soils on slopes shall remain unstabilized (exposed) for more than seven days.

3. Cover stockpiles when runoff from rain is or would likely cause turbid waters to enter local waterways. Suspend work in the rain if such work cannot be performed without causing turbid runoff.

4. Existing vegetation should be preserved where attainable. Clearly mark clearing limits. Mark and fence areas which are not to be to be disturbed, including setbacks, sensitive/critical areas and their buffers, trees, and drainage courses.

5. Construct cut and fill slopes in a manner that will minimize erosion. 6. Properly protect and maintain all storm drain inlets during construction.

D. General Maintenance Activities: 1. Inspect temporary erosion and sediment control (TESC) facilities on active sites daily and

immediately after each rainfall. 2. Inspect TESC facilities on inactive sites a minimum of once a month, within 24 hours

following any storm event and as the Owner’s Authorized Representative or permitting agency deems necessary.

3. Repair or replace damaged or missing items immediately. 4. Clean sediment accumulation from surface of catch basin to prevent blockage. Prevent

sediments form being flushed to the downstream system during cleaning. 5. Remove sediment from behind sediment fence when deposit has reached a height of 6 inches

above drain rock backfill. 6. Maintain seeded surfaces throughout construction.

E. If erosion or discharge of sediment-laden runoff is occurring, the Contractor shall make modification to the erosion control system to mitigate the problem(s).

3.6 REMOVAL OF TESC FACILITIES A. Remove temporary erosion/sedimentation control fencing following completion of work in

specific areas. The fencing shall not be removed until the grass has established a minimum of 75% coverage, or as approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Place additional temporary erosion/sedimentation control fencing if necessary for other areas still under construction. The Contractor shall take care when removing the fencing to ensure that trapped sediments are removed along the fence and are not released outside the project area.

B. Contractor shall remove catch basin protection after it has served its useful purpose but not before construction activities have advanced to a point 100 feet beyond the catch basin.

C. Contractor shall remove temporary erosion and sedimentation control (TESC) facilities not otherwise described for removal herein after they have served their useful purpose, or as requested by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

3.7 MODIFICATIONS TO EROSION CONTROL SYSTEM A. The Owner’s Authorized Representative and regulatory agencies will determine the

effectiveness of the erosion control system. B. If erosion control system designed by Contractor is determined to be ineffective by the Owner’s

Authorized Representative or regulatory agencies, upgrade erosion control system to satisfaction of the Owner’s Authorized Representative and regulatory agencies.

C. Refusal to upgrade erosion control system may result in the Owner’s Authorized Representative having erosion control work completed and the cost of the work being withheld from Contractor’s payments.



D. Refusal to upgrade erosion control system may result in the requirement for suspension of construction activity until TESC measures are satisfactory to the Owner’s Authorized Representative and regulatory agencies.




DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS





SURFACE RESTORATION 32 12 18 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 32 12 18 – SURFACE RESTORATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. The work covered by the section consists of surface restoration including pavement, crushed

rock, and landscaping.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM). B. Standard Specification: Current Oregon Standard Specifications for Construction, prepared by

the Oregon Department of Transportation (ODOT) and the Oregon Chapter of the American Public Works Association (APWA).

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit mix design from the intended asphalt or concrete supplier at least 10 days prior to the

start of pavement surfacing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES A. Base Course; Fine granular material consisting of ¾-minus, well graded, angular, crushed

gravel or rock, in accordance with Standard Specifications Section 02630.10

2.2 ASPHALT CONCRETE A. Asphalt concrete pavement surface course shall be Level 3, 1/2-inch dense, HMAC and shall

comply with mixing and proportion of materials as designated in the Standard Specification Section 00745. The grade of paving asphalt shall be AR 4000 and shall conform to the requirements of Standard Specifications Section 745.

B. Asphalt for tack coat shall be Grade CSS-1 and shall conform to the requirements of the Standard Specification Section 730.

2.3 CHIP SEAL A. Aggregate shall be Graded Medium in accordance with Standard Specification Section

00710.10. B. Emulsified asphalt shall be polymer modified emulsified asphalt in accordance with Standard

Specification 00710.11 (b).

2.4 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE A. Concrete for curbs, sidewalks and miscellaneous structures shall conform to Standard

Specifications Section 00759.

2.5 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil shall be imported from approved sources. The topsoil shall be a sandy loam free of

subsoil, grass, noxious weeds and any material deleterious to plant health. Imported topsoil shall be approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

Revised: 01-15-2019



PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.1 GENERAL A. All areas disturbed during construction shall be restored to their original condition as nearly as

possible. All excess material shall be removed. Any damaged concrete walks or driveways shall be restored. All dirt and debris that accumulated from the Contractor's operations shall be removed from inlets, catch basins and connecting pipelines. All trench cuts shall be kept in a smooth condition throughout the length of the contract. Any material entering manholes or ditch culverts from street resurfacing work and trenching work and, if applicable, the adjacent line shall be reflushed to remove any material that may have entered the pipeline. Daily cleanup of all visible mud and debris is required.

3.2 ASPHALT SURFACING A. All asphalt surfacing, where open cuts are made or where shown on the Drawings or required

by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. 1. Asphalt concrete construction shall be per the Standard Specifications and the Drawings. 2. The limits of the restoration shall include all damaged or undermined surfacing. 3. When the utility trench is placed closer than three feet inside the edge of pavement the

remaining pavement must be removed and replaced with the trench repair. Further, when the trench is under the edge of pavement additional pavement shall be removed to allow a three foot minimum width of repair and to maintain the original roadway width.

4. When laid adjacent to existing asphalt, the edge of the existing asphalt shall be saw cut in a straight line and a vertical plane with all dirt and loose material removed. The vertical edge of the asphalt shall be coated with an asphalt emulsion to ensure a watertight bond with the new asphalt.

5. The edges of the compacted mat shall be flush with the existing asphalt and provide a smooth riding surface.

6. The connections between existing and new asphalt shall be sealed and sanded. 7. Asphalt shall not be placed during rainfall or before any imminent storm that might

damage construction. The application of asphalt when the ground temperature is less than 50 degrees F will not be allowed.

8. The Contractor shall place 1-1/2 inches of cold patch on all surfaces where asphalt has been removed and maintain the temporary patch in a smooth, continuous surface until final paving is completed.

9. Settlement of 1/4-inch or greater of asphalt concrete patches within 1 year of substantial completion will require repair or replacement as required by the Owner’s Authorized Representative at the Contractor's expense.

3.3 GRAVEL SURFACING A. All graveled roadways, graveled shoulders, graveled driveways, areas shown on the Drawings,

or as required by the Owner’s Authorized Representative shall be restored using 3/4”-0 crushed rock. 1. Surfacing shall have a compacted depth of 8-inches or as shown on the Drawings. 2. The finished surface shall be smooth and level with the surrounding surfacing. 3. Settlement of 1/2-inch or greater in graveled areas within one year of completion will

require repair and regrading as required by the Owner’s Authorized Representative at the Contractor's expense.

4. Compaction shall be to 92% of AASHTO T-180.



3.4 LANDSCAPE RESTORATION A. All areas as shown on the Drawings or as required by the Owner’s Authorized Representative

shall be restored by placement of 12 inches of topsoil, fine grading and seed or sod placement to match existing conditions, in accordance with Standard Specification Section 01030. 1. Settlement of 1 inches or greater within 1 year of substantial completion will require

repairs and reseeding as required by the Owner’s Authorized Representative at the Contractor's expense.

3.5 INSPECTION A. Verify that earthwork is completed to correct line and grade and that surface drainage will

freely flow to an approved point of discharge. B. Check that subgrade is smooth, compacted, and free of frost or excessive moisture. C. Do not commence work until conditions are satisfactory.

3.6 SOIL STERILIZATION A. Soil sterilization shall be provided under all asphalt surface areas. B. Soil sterilant shall be applied on all compacted subgrades just prior to placing the import gravel

base material. C. The sterilant shall be a borate chlorate type containing not less than 25% sodium chlorate. It

shall be mixed thoroughly with water at the rate of 1-1/2 pounds of sterilant per gallon of water. The sterilant shall be applied evenly at the rate of 0.2 gallons per square yard. The Contractor shall take whatever precautions are necessary to prevent contamination of adjacent soil areas with sterilant and for the protection of personnel. Certification shall be furnished if requested to the Owner’s Authorized Representative, showing the purchase receipt and rate of application of the material.

3.7 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Subgrade preparation shall be in accordance with Standard Specification Section 00330. No

standing water shall be present at the time of placement of the gravel base course.

3.8 BASE COURSE A. Base course and leveling course shall be used under pavement. B. Base Course

1. Base course shall be a minimum of 12 inches thick under asphalt concrete pavement or in accordance with the Drawings. Base course shall be compacted to 92% AASHTO T-180.

2. Base aggregate placed for construction traffic may be used as the base course providing that the material is returned to the section shown on the Drawings, free of all contamination and meets the compaction requirements of this specification. The Owner’s Authorized Representative shall examine the base course for contamination prior to placement of the leveling course, repairs shall be made as required at no cost to the Owner.

C. Check base course for conformity with elevations and section immediately before placing the leveling course.

D. Place to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Compact to 92% maximum dry density as per AASHTO T-180.

E. Finish the surface by blading or rolling with a smooth roller, or a combination thereof, so that it is smooth and free from waves and inequalities.

F. The area to be paved shall be true to line and grade, have a smooth, dry, compacted surface, and free from all loose asphalt and foreign material.

G. Base/leveling course variance - no greater than 3/8-inch when measured with a 10-foot straightedge.



3.9 DUST CONTROL A. When the weather is dry and when, in the estimation of the Owner’s Authorized Representative,

the dust becomes a nuisance, the Contractor shall sprinkle water on surface streets twice a day in order to keep the dust down. This sprinkling shall be maintained until the project is accepted. On paved streets when the backfilling has been completed, the streets shall be washed to remove all dirt and debris; and if the dust becomes a nuisance before the backfilling is completed, the Contractor shall wash the streets to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

3.10 ACCEPTANCE A. Final acceptance will not be until final completion of the entire project, including all restoration

and cleanup to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

3.11 TESTING A. Compaction testing of the asphalt concrete pavement shall be in accordance with the Standard

Specifications. Testing shall be done every 50 tons of asphalt used. Three tests minimum for every day asphalt is placed.

B. Compaction testing of rock surfacing shall be done in accordance with Section 31 20 00 “Earthwork and Trenching.




DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES





PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS 33 05 16 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 33 05 16 – PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide precast concrete vaults, complete and in place, in accordance

with the Contract Documents.

1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Furnish submittals in accordance with Division 01 Section 01 33 00 “Submittal

Procedures”. B. Shop Drawings

1. Show dimensions, locations, lifting inserts, reinforcement, and joints. 2. Structural design calculations for vaults, signed by a registered engineer in the State of

Oregon. C. Manufacturer’s Certification for Vaults: Written certification that the vault complies with the

requirements of this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES A. Commercial Standards

ASTM A 48 Gray Iron Castings ASTM C 150 Portland Cement

ASTM C 443 Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets ASTM C 478 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections ASTM C 890 Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Monolithic or

Sectional Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures ASTM C 913 Standard Specification for Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures ASTM C 923 Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes,

and Laterals

1.4 QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: After installation, the Contractor shall demonstrate that manholes and vaults have

been properly installed, level, with tight joints, at the correct elevations and orientations, and that the backfilling has been carried out in accordance with the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VAULTS A. The Contractor shall provide precast vaults designed for the indicated applications and of the

sizes indicated. B. The minimum structural member thickness for vaults shall be 5 inches. Cement shall be Type V

portland cement as specified in ASTM C 150. The minimum 28-day concrete compressive strength shall be 4,000 psi. All reinforcing steel shall be embedded in the concrete with a minimum clear cover as recommended by ACI 318.

C. Design Loading: Vaults shall be designed for HS-25 traffic loading. Lateral loads on vaults in all areas shall be calculated from:

L = 90 h, plus surcharge of 240 psf in areas of vehicular traffic Where L = loading in psf h = depth of fill in feet

D. Where joints are designed in pre-cast concrete vaults, such joints shall be interlocking to secure proper alignment between members and prevent migration of soil through the joint. Structural


PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS 33 05 16 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

sections at joints shall be sized sufficiently to reinforce the section against localized distress during transportation and handling and against excess contact bearing pressures through the joint.

E. Where openings for access to the vault are required, the full clear space opening indicated shall be provided, without obstructions from brackets or supports. For large openings where brackets or supports are designed to protrude into the opening for support of required covers, such brackets or supports shall be designed to be easily removed and replaced with a minimum of effort and without cutting or welding.

1. Covers for access openings shall be provided. Frames for covers shall be fabricated from steel, galvanized after fabrication, and shall be integrally cast into the vault concrete sections. All covers shall be tight fitting to prevent the entrance of dirt and debris. Where edge seams are permitted, no gaps greater than 1/16-inch between edges will be accepted. All covers, except round, heavy-weight, cast iron manhole covers, shall have securing mechanisms to hold the covers firmly in place against the effects of repetitious live loads such as pedestrian or vehicle traffic.

2. Where penetration of the pre-cast concrete vault are required for piping, conduit, or ducts, such penetrations shall be accommodated through pre-cast openings or thin-wall knock-out sections. All openings for penetrations shall be smooth and free of surface irregularities and without exposed steel reinforcing. Vaults need not be designed to resist thrust from piping passing through the vault.

F. Warning Signs 1. The entrance to every manhole and vault shall be fitted with a permanently affixed,

plastic warning sign, located above and centered on the top step. 2. Sign Manufacturer, or Equal

a. W. H. Brady Company b. Seton Nameplate Corporation

G. Steps 1. ½” diameter Grade 60 reinforcing steel core with non-slip polypropylene cover. 2. Preformed side wings 3. Width: 12”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL A. Pre-cast concrete sections shall be transported and handled with care in accordance with the

manufacturer’s written recommendations. Where lifting devices are provided in pre-cast sections, such lifting devices shall be used as intended. Where no lifting devices are provided, the Contractor shall follow the manufacturer’s recommendations for lifting procedures to provide proper support during lifting.

B. Buried pre-cast concrete vaults shall be assembled and placed in excavations on properly compacted soil foundations as indicated. Pre-cast concrete vaults shall be set to grade and oriented to provide the required dimensions and clearances from pipes and other structures.

C. Prior to backfilling, all cracks and voids in pre-cast concrete vaults shall be filled with non-shrink grout or polyurethane sealant, or both. Around pipe and conduit penetrations, openings shall be sealed with polyurethane sealant. With the authorization of the Engineer grout or a closed-cell flexible insulation may be used as filler material prior to placing a final bed of polyurethane sealant.

E. Steps shall be installed 12 inches on centers vertically, not more than ½-inch out of plumb. The top step shall be no more than 12 inches below the manhole cover. Install per manufacturer’s instructions.



STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 41 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 33 41 00 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Cleanouts. 3. Manholes. 4. Catch basins. 5. Pipe outlets.


1. Pipes and fittings B. Shop Drawings: For manholes. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and

covers.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store plastic pipe and fittings in direct sunlight. B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Sewerage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities

occupied by Owner’s Authorized Representative or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner’s Authorized Representative no fewer than two business days in advance of

proposed interruption of service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner’s Authorized Representative's

written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PE Pipe and Fittings: A. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe and Fittings:

1. 4- through 10-inch diameter: AASHTO M 252M, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints. a. Watertight Couplings: AASHTO M 252M, corrugated, matching tube and

fittings. 2. 12- through 60-inch diameter: AASHTO M 294M, Type S, or ASTM F2306, with

smooth waterway for coupling joints. a. Watertight Couplings: AASHTO M 294M, corrugated, matching pipe and

fittings.

2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings:

1. 4- through 15-inch diameter: ASTM D-3034, SDR 35.



2. 18- through 27-inch diameter: ASTM F-679. 3. Joints in Plastic Pipe: Elastomeric gasket seal per ASTM D-3212 and ASTM F-

477.

2.3 CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76.

1. Bell-and-spigot or tongue-and-groove ends and gasketed joints with ASTM C 443, rubber gaskets sealant joints with ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl-rubber sealant.

2. Class IV

2.4 NONPRESSURE TRANSITION COUPLINGS A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling,

for joining underground non-pressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

B. Sleeve Materials: 1. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443 rubber. 2. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials

being joined. C. Unshielded, Flexible Couplings:

1. Description: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless-steel shear ring and corrosion- resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

D. Ring-Type, Flexible Couplings: 1. Description: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe

and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring.

2.5 CLEANOUTS A. PVC Cleanouts:

1. Description: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as sewer piping.

2.6 MANHOLES A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes:

1. Description: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints.

2. Diameter: 48 inches minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as

required to prevent flotation. 4. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab. See construction details for

minimum thickness for walls and base riser section; with separate base slab or base section with integral floor.

5. Riser Sections: See construction details for minimum thickness, of length to provide depth indicated.

6. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated; with top of cone of size that matches grade rings.

7. Joint Sealant: ASTM C-443, bitumen or butyl rubber. In addition to O-ring joint between manhole sections, a flexible butyl rubber seal, Con seal, or equal shall be used with a minimum temperature workability of 10°F-130°F.

8. Flexible Sleeve: A watertight flexible sleeve “Kon-n-Seal”, Press Wedge or equal to be provided at all connections between manholes and pipes.

9. Steps: Steps shall be reinforced polypropylene plastic 12 inches wide. Cast or anchor steps



into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 24 inches.

10. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings in load bearing areas and polyvinyl chloride (PVC) in non-load bearing areas, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, with diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and with height as required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope. B. Manhole Frames and Covers:

1. Description: East Jordan Iron Works No. 1775 or equal vented lid. 2. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent

to "STORM SEWER."

2.7 CATCH BASINS A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins:

1. Description: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints.

2. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab. See construction details for minimum thickness for walls; with separate base slab or base section with integral floor.

3. Joint Sealant: ASTM C-443, bitumen or butyl rubber. In addition to O-ring joint between catch basin sections, a flexible butyl rubber seal, Con seal, or equal shall be used with a minimum temperature workability of 10°F-130°F.

4. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section.

B. Manhole Frames and Covers: 1. Description: East Jordan Iron Works No. 5150 with Type M2 flat grate or equal.

2.8 PIPE OUTLETS A. Head Walls: Cast-in-place reinforced concrete, with apron and tapered sides. B. Riprap: ODOT Type “C” Rock Channel Protection per the Oregon Department of

Transportation Construction and Material (CMS) manual.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general

location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use pipe-jacking process of micro tunneling.

F. Install gravity-flow, non-pressure drainage piping according to the following:



1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow. 2. Install PE corrugated sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321. 3. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 4. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's "Concrete

Pipe Installation Manual” and the Ohio Department of Transportation Construction and Materials (CMS) section 604 manual 2010 edition.

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join gravity-flow, non-pressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Join corrugated PE piping according to ASTM D 3212 for push-on joints. 2. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-seal

joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasketed joints. 3. Join PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric- seal

joints or ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints. 4. Join reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation

Manual" for rubber-gasketed joints. 5. Join dissimilar pipe materials with non-pressure-type flexible couplings.

3.4 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Install piping so

cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. 1. Use Light-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot- traffic areas. 2. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in pavement areas.

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set with tops flush with surrounding grade.

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement and roads with tops flush with pavement surface.

3.5 MANHOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated. B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891. C. Where specific manhole construction is not indicated, follow manhole manufacturer's

written instructions. D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in

pavements. Set tops 3 inches above finished surface elsewhere unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated. B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.

3.7 STORMWATER OUTLET INSTALLATION A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated. B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated. C. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated. D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where

indicated. E. Construct energy dissipaters at outlets, as indicated.

3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318.

3.9 CONNECTIONS



A. Connect non-pressure, gravity-flow drainage piping in building's storm building drains specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Storm Drainage Piping."

B. Pipe couplings, expansion joints, and deflection fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use non-pressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, non-

pressure sewer piping unless otherwise indicated. a. Unshielded flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes. b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with

different OD. c. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space

between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.

3.10 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to

remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below: 1. Close open ends of piping with at least 18 inch to 24-inch thick, concrete or sakrete

bulkheads. 2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable

methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs. B. Abandoned Manholes and Structures: Excavate around manholes and structures as required and

use one procedure below: 1. Remove manhole or structure and close open ends of remaining piping. 2. Remove top of manhole or structure down to at least 36 inches below final grade. Fill to

within 12 inches of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete.

C. Backfill to grade according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

3.11 IDENTIFICATION A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange

for installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground structures. 1. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground

structures.

3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred.

Inspect after approximately 24 inches (610 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of

size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or



repaired, for leaks and defects. 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24

hours' advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following: a. Exception: Piping with soiltight joints unless required by authorities having

jurisdiction. b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417. c. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within

allowances specified.

3.13 CLEANING A. Perform cleaning of sewers following the current and applicable standards of the

authorities having jurisdiction. B. Prior to final acceptance and final manhole-to-manhole inspection of the sewer system

by the authorities having jurisdiction, flush and clean all parts of the system. Remove accumulated construction debris, rocks, gravel, sand, silt, and other foreign material from the sewer system at or near the closest downstream manhole. If necessary, use mechanical rodding or bucketing equipment.

C. Upon the authorities having jurisdiction’s final manhole-to-manhole inspection of the sewer system, if foreign matter is still present in the system, re-flush and clean the sections and portions of the lines as required.




DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION





PIPING, GENERAL 40 23 00 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 40 23 00 - PIPING, GENERAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide the piping systems indicated, complete and operable, in

accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all piping sections in Divisions 33 and 40. C. Pipe Fabrication Drawings. The mechanical Drawings define the general layout, configuration,

routing, method of support, pipe size, and pipe type. The mechanical drawings are not pipe construction or fabrication drawings. The Contractor shall provide detailed pipe fabrication and pipe laying submittals in accordance with the requirements of the individual pipe material specification sections.

D. Pipe Supports and Spacing. Where pipe supports and spacing are indicated on the Drawings and are referenced to a standard detail, the Contractor shall use that detail. Where pipe supports are not indicated on the Drawings, it is the Contractor’sresponsibility to develop the details necessary to design and construct mechanical piping systems to accommodate the specific equipment provided, and to provide spacers, adapters, and connectors for a complete and functional system.

1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.” B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall contain information as required in the individual pipe

material specification section as well as the following information: 1. Layout and Fabrication Drawings: Layout drawings including necessary details,

dimensions, and material lists for pipe joints, fittings, specials, bolts and nuts, gaskets, valves, appurtenances, anchors, and guides. Fabrication drawings shall indicate spacers, pipe adapters and couplings, connectors, fittings, and location of pipe supports to accommodate the equipment and valves in a complete and functional system.

2. Chemical Compatibility of Gaskets and Solvent Cements. For all gaskets and any thermoplastic or PVC based pipe joint systems, the Contractor shall provide: the gasket and / or solvent cement manufacturer's chemical compatibility information indicating that the recommended product is suitable for each fluid service application required in the project.

3. Modular Seals for Pipe Penetrations: Manufacturer's information sheets showing materials and installation procedures.

C. Samples: The Contractor shall provide and pay for any pipe material sampling and product testing as necessary and as required in the individual pipe material specifications.

D. Certifications 1. Necessary certificates, test reports, and affidavits of compliance shall be obtained by the

Contractor 2. A certification from the pipe fabricator that each pipe length will be manufactured subject

to the fabricator’s or a recognized Quality Control Program. An outline of the Quality Control Program shall be submitted to the Owner’s Authorized Representative for review prior to the manufacture of any pipe.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL A. Extent of Work: Pipes, fittings, and appurtenances shall be provided in accordance with the

requirements of the applicable Sections of Divisions 33 and 40 and as indicated. Materials and pipe coatings in contact with potable water or fisheries process water shall be listed as compliant with NSF Standard 61.



B. Pipe Supports: Pipes shall be adequately supported, restrained, and anchored as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

C. Interior Linings: Application, thickness, and curing of pipe interior linings shall be in accordance with the applicable specification section, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Exterior Coatings: Application, thickness, and curing of exterior coatings on buried pipe shall be in accordance with the applicable specification section, unless otherwise indicated. For pipes above ground or in structures, exterior coatings of such pipe shall be in accordance with the applicable specification section and those coating systems as identified in Section 09 80 00 “Protective Coatings.”

E. Inspection: Pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture. During the manufacture, the Owner and Owner’s Authorized Representative shall be given access to areas where manufacturing is in progress and shall be permitted to make inspections necessary to confirm compliance with requirements.

F. Tests: Except where otherwise indicated, materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the applicable specifications and standards. The Contractor shall be responsible for performing material tests.

G. Welding Requirements: Qualification of welding procedures used to fabricate pipe shall be in accordance with the provisions of AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code for steel and the latest HDPE welding techniques. Welding procedures shall be submitted for the Owner’s Authorized Representative’s review.

H. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be done by skilled welders and welding operators who have adequate experience in the methods and materials to be used. Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of AWS D1.1 or the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 9, by an independent local, approved testing agency not more than 6 months prior to commencing Work on the piping. Machines and electrodes similar to those used in the Work shall be used in qualification tests. Qualification testing of welders and materials used during testing is part of the Work.

2.2 PIPE FLANGES A. General: Flanges shall have flat faces and shall be attached with bolt holes straddling the

vertical axis of the pipe unless otherwise indicated. Attachment of the flanges to the pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of AWWA C207. Flange faces shall be perpendicular to the axis of the adjoining pipe. Flanges for miscellaneous small diameter pipes shall be in accordance with the standards indicated for these pipes.

B. Pressure Ratings 1. 150 psi or less: Flanges shall conform to either AWWA C207 - Steel Pipe Flanges for

Waterworks Service--Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In., Class D, or ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, 150 lb class.

2. 150 psi to 275 psi: Flanges shall conform to either AWWA C207 Class E or Class F, or ASME B16.5 150 lb class.

3. 275 psi to 700 psi: Flanges shall conform to ASME B16.5, 300 lb class. 4. Selection based on test pressure: AWWA flanges shall not be exposed to test pressures

greater than 125 percent of rated capacity. For higher test pressures, the next higher rated AWWA flange or an ANSI-rated flange shall be selected.

C. Blind Flanges: Blind flanges shall be in accordance with AWWA C207, or as indicated for miscellaneous small pipes. Blind flanges for pipe sizes 10-inches and greater shall be provided with lifting eyes in the form of welded or screwed eye bolts.

D. Flange Coating: Machined faces of metal blind flanges and pipe flanges shall be coated with a temporary rust-inhibitive coating to protect the metal until the installation is completed.

E. Flange Bolts: Bolts and nuts shall conform to Section 05 50 00 “Metal Fabrication”, unless noted otherwise on the Contract Drawings. All-thread studs may be used on valve flange connections where space restrictions preclude the use of regular bolts. Bolts for threaded inserts at butterfly valves shall be stainless steel and conform to Section 05 50 00 “Metal Fabrication”.



F. Insulating Flange Sets: Insulating flange sets shall be provided where indicated. Each insulating flange set shall consist of an insulating gasket, insulating sleeves and washers, and a steel washer. Insulating sleeves and washers shall be one piece when flange bolt diameter is 1.5 inch or smaller and shall be made of acetal resin. For bolt diameters larger than 1.5 inches, insulating sleeves and washers shall be 2 piece and shall be made of polyethylene or phenolic material.

G. Steel washers shall be in accordance with ASTM A 325 - Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.

H. Insulating gaskets shall be full-face. I. Insulated flanges shall have bolt holes 1/4-inch diameter greater than the bolt diameter. J. Insulating flange sets shall be as manufactured by JM Red Devil, Type E, Maloney Pipeline

Products Co, PSI Products, Inc., or equal K. Flange Gaskets

1. Gaskets for flanged joints used in general water and wastewater service shall be full-faced type, with material and thickness in accordance with AWWA C207, suitable for temperatures to 700 deg F, a pH of one to 11, and pressures to 1000 psig. Blind flanges shall have gaskets covering the entire inside face of the blind flange and shall be cemented to the blind flange. Ring gaskets shall not be permitted unless otherwise indicated. Flange gaskets shall be as manufactured by John Crane, Style 2160, Garlock, Style 3000, or equal.

2. Gaskets for flanges for PVC and CPVC piping used in general water, fisheries, and wastewater service shall be full faced, 1/8-inch thick, made of ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) having a Type A durometer hardness of 50 to 70 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2240. When the mating flange has a raised face, provide a flat ring gasket filler between the PVC flange and gasket and the adjacent flange.

3. Gaskets for flanged joints used in chemicals, air, solvents, hydrocarbons, steam, chlorine and other fluids shall be made of materials compatible with the service, pressure, and temperature.

2.3 THREADED INSULATING CONNECTIONS A. General: Threaded insulating bushings, unions, or couplings, as appropriate, shall be used for

joining threaded pipes of dissimilar metals and for piping systems where corrosion control and cathodic protection systems are involved.

B. Materials: Threaded insulating connections shall be of nylon, Teflon, polycarbonate, polyethylene, or other non-conductive materials, and shall have ratings and properties to suit the service and loading conditions.

2.4 MECHANICAL-TYPE COUPLINGS (GROOVED OR BANDED PIPE) A. General: Cast mechanical-type couplings shall be provided where indicated. The couplings

shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of Section 05 50 00 “Metal Fabrications”. Gaskets for mechanical-type couplings shall be compatible with the piping service and fluid utilized, in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations. The wall thickness of grooved piping shall conform to the coupling manufacturer's recommendations to suit the highest expected pressure. To avoid excessive load on equipment caused by pipe movement due to steady state or transient pressure conditions, equipment connections with mechanical-type couplings shall have rigid grooved couplings or flexible type coupling with harness in sizes where rigid type couplings are not available, unless thrust restraint is provided by other means. Mechanical type couplings shall be bonded. The Contractor shall have the coupling manufacturer's service representative verify the correct choice and application of couplings and gaskets, and the workmanship, to assure a correct installation. To assure uniform and compatible piping components, grooved fittings, couplings, and valves shall be furnished by the



same manufacturer as the coupling. Grooving tools shall be from the same manufacturer as the grooved components.

B. Manufacturers of couplings for steel pipe, or equal 1. Gustin-Bacon (Aeroquip Corp.) (banded or grooved) 2. Victaulic Style 41 or 44 (banded, flexible) 3. Victaulic Style 77 (grooved, flexible or rigid) 4. Victaulic Style 07 or HP-70 (grooved, rigid)

C. Manufacturers of ductile iron pipe couplings, or equal 1. Gustin-Bacon, (Aeroquip Corp.) 2. Victaulic Style 31 (flexible or rigid grooving)

Note: Ductile iron pipe couplings shall be furnished with flush seal gaskets. D. Manufacturers of couplings for PVC pipe, or equal

1. Gustin-Bacon, (Aeroquip Corp) 2. Victaulic Style 775

Note: Couplings for PVC pipe shall be furnished with radius cut or standard roll grooved pipe ends.

2.5 SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS

A. General: Sleeve-type couplings shall be provided where indicated. The Contractor will not be allowed to substitute a sleeve-split coupling, or any other type in lieu of sleeve coupling unless approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

B. Construction: Sleeve couplings shall be in accordance with AWWA C219 - Standard for Bolted Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe. Couplings shall be steel with steel bolts, without pipe stop. Couplings shall be of sizes to fit the pipe and fittings indicated. The middle ring shall be not less than 1/4-inch thick or at least the same wall thickness as the pipe to which the coupling is connected. If the strength of the middle ring material is less than the strength of the pipe material, the thickness of the middle ring shall be increased to have the same strength as the pipe. The coupling shall be either 5- or 7-inches long for sizes up to and including 30-inches and 10-inches long for sizes greater than 30-inches, for standard steel couplings, and 16-inches long for long-sleeve couplings. The followers shall be single-piece contoured mill sections welded and cold-expanded as required for the middle rings, and of sufficient strength to accommodate the number of bolts necessary to obtain adequate gasket pressures without excessive rolling. The shape of the follower shall be of such design as to provide positive confinement of the gasket. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of Section 05 50 00 “Metal Fabrications”. Buried sleeve-type couplings shall be epoxy-coated at the factory as indicated.

C. Pipe Preparation: Where indicated, the ends of the pipe shall be prepared for flexible steel couplings. Plain ends for use with couplings shall be smooth and round for a distance of 12-inches from the ends of the pipe, with outside diameter not more than 1/64-inch smaller than the nominal outside diameter of the pipe. The middle ring shall be tested by cold-expanding a minimum of one percent beyond the yield point, to proof-test the weld to the strength of the parent metal. The weld of the middle ring shall be subjected to air test for porosity.

D. Gaskets 1. Gaskets for sleeve-type couplings shall be rubber-compound material that will not

deteriorate from age or exposure to air under normal storage or use conditions. Gaskets for wastewater and sewerage applications shall be Buna "N," Grade 60, or equivalent suitable elastomer. The rubber in the gasket shall meet the following specifications:

a. Color: Black b. Surface: Non-blooming c. Durometer Hardness: 75 +/- 5 d. Tensile Strength: 1000 psi minimum



e. Elongation: 175 percent minimum 2. The gaskets shall be immune to attack by impurities normally found in water or

wastewater. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 2000 - Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications, AA709Z, meeting Suffix B13 Grade 3, except as noted above. Where sleeve couplings are used in water containing chloramine or other fluids which attack rubber materials, gasket material shall be compatible with the piping service and fluid utilized.

E. Piping Connection to Equipment: Where piping connects to mechanical equipment such as pumps, compressors, and blowers, the piping shall be brought to the equipment connection aligned and perpendicular to the axis of the flange or fitting for which the piping is to be connected. The piping shall not impose excessive stress to the equipment connection to cause misalignment of the equipment. The Contractor shall assign the responsibility to the equipment manufacturer to review the piping connection to the equipment and submit any modifications to the Owner’s Authorized Representative for review.

F. Insulating Sleeve Couplings: Where insulating couplings are required, both ends of the coupling shall have a wedge-shaped gasket which assembles over a sleeve of an insulating compound material compatible with the fluid service in order to obtain insulation of coupling metal parts from the pipe.

G. Restrained Joints: Sleeve-type couplings on pressure lines shall be harnessed unless thrust restraint is provided by other means. Harnesses shall be designed by the pipe manufacturer in accordance with AWWA Manual M11, or as indicated. Harness sets shall be designed for the maximum test pressure of the pipe in which they are installed. Where harness sets are installed near the suction and discharge of the pump, harness bolts shall have zero elongation to prevent misalignment of the pump imparted by the thrust within the piping system.

H. Manufacturers, or equal 1. Dresser, Style 38 2. Ford Meter Box Co., Inc., Style FC1 or FC3 3. Smith-Blair, Style 411

2.6 SLEEVE SPLIT-TYPE COUPLINGS (Depend-O-Lok) A. General: Where indicated sleeve-split type couplings shall be furnished. B. Construction: Couplings shall be split-type, consisting of one or 2 piece housing, gasket

assembly, bolts and nuts, and end rings. The double arch cross section that closes around the pipe ends shall be smooth to allow for expansion or contraction requirements. The pipe ends with steel end rings affixed shall provide restraint requirements. As the coupling closes, it shall confine the elastomeric gasket beneath the arches of the sleeve to create a radial seal. The axial seal shall squeeze the closure plates as the bolts pull the coupling snug around the pipe. The coupling shall permit angular pipe deflection, flexibility, contraction and expansion as designed by the manufacturer. The coupling housing shall be designed for internal pressure and external loads as determined by the design procedures of AWWA M-11. The coupling shell thickness of the steel coupling shall be calculated using the formula:

T=PwDy/2Fs

where: T = steel coupling thickness, inches Dy = pipe outside diameter, inches Pw = Design working pressure, psi Fs = 50 percent of minimum yield point of steel, psi

1. Coupling design calculations shall be stamped and signed by a registered engineer and shall be included in the Shop Drawing submittal for couplings.

2. The sealing members shall comprise of two “O”-ring gaskets and an elastomer sealing pad bonded to sealing plate. Internal pressure shall not be required to make the seal.



C. Materials 1. Unless otherwise indicated, coupling housing material shall be the same material as the

piping. Carbon steel couplings shall be fabricated from ASTM A 36. Stainless steel couplings shall be fabricated from ASTM A 240, T-304, 304L, 316, or 316L.

2. Carbon steel end rings shall conform to ASTM A 108 Grade 1018. Stainless steel end rings shall conform to ASTM A 276 T-316L.

3. Bolts and nuts shall be in conformance with Section 05 50 00. 4. Gaskets shall be EPDM conforming to ASTM D 2000 for air service up to 240 degrees F.

Gaskets for general water or sewerage service within the temperature range of –20 to 180 degrees F shall be isoprene or EPDM conforming to ASTM D 2000.

5. Carbon steel couplings shall be fusion bond epoxy coated inside and outside of the coupling in accordance with Section 09800. Couplings installed underground shall be provided with Depend-O-Wrap tape or equal. Application of wrapping material shall be in conformance with AWWA C209.

D. Pipe Preparation 1. Ends of pipes shall be prepared for the flexible split sleeve type couplings inspected and

approved by the coupling manufacturer. The pipe outside diameter and roundness tolerances shall comply with tolerances listed in AWWA C219.

2. Plain ends for use with couplings shall be smooth and round for a distance of 12-inches from end of the pipe.

3. End rings shall be furnished with couplings when restraint is required. Carbon steel end rings shall be ASTM A 108 Grade 1018. Stainless steel end rings shall conform to ASTM A 276 T-316L.

4. Where the split-type coupling is used to take up thermal expansion or contraction (Depend-O-Lok F X E) at the pipe joint, one end ring shall be fixed to one end of the pipe to keep the coupling in the proper location.

5. Where the split-type coupling is used for a fully restrained pipe joint (Depend-O-Lok F X F) at the pipe joint, one end ring shall be welded to each of the pipe ends to fit beneath the coupling and shall be protected by the coating. Welding design and specification shall be in conformance with the coupling manufacturer’s recommendation.

E. Manufacturer 1. Depend-O-Lok

2.7 FLANGE COUPLING ADAPTERS A. Flange coupling adapters shall be provided where indicated. The Contractor will not be allowed

to substitute any other type in lieu of flange coupling adapter unless approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. The coupling shall be rated as indicated.

B. Construction: Flange coupling adapter body shall be fabricated from steel ASTM A 512 - Cold-Drawn Buttweld Carbon Steel Mechanical Tubing or A 513 - Electric-Resistance Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing with steel bolts, without pipe stop. Flange shall be in accordance with AWWA C207. Couplings shall be of sizes to fit the pipe and fittings indicated. The body shall be not less than 1/4-inch thick or at least the same wall thickness as the pipe to which the coupling is connected. If the strength of the body material is less than the strength of the pipe material, the thickness of the middle ring shall be increased to have the same strength as the pipe. The follower flange shall be fabricated from steel, ASTM A 576 - Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot Wrought, Special Quality or AISI C1012. The shape of the follower shall be of such design as to provide positive confinement of the gasket. Flange coupling adapters installed in piping system rated for positive pressure, the coupling shall be restrained with harness bolts or tie rods. Other means of restraining the coupling such as set screws will not be acceptable. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of Section 05 50 00. Buried couplings shall be epoxy-coated at the factory as indicated.

C. Gaskets: Gaskets for flange coupling adapters shall be rubber-compound material that will not deteriorate from age or exposure to air under normal storage or use conditions. Gaskets for



wastewater and sewerage applications shall be Buna "N," Grade 60 NSF approved, or equivalent suitable elastomer.

1. The rubber in the gasket shall meet the following specifications:

a. Color - Jet Black b. Surface - Non-blooming c. Durometer Hardness - 74 plus and minus 5 d. Tensile Strength - 1000 psi Minimum e. Elongation - 175 percent Minimum

2. The gaskets shall be immune to attack by impurities normally found in water or wastewater. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 2000 - Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications, AA709Z, meeting Suffix B13 Grade 3, except as noted above. Where flange coupling adapters are used in water containing chloramine or other fluids which attack rubber materials, gasket material shall be compatible with the piping service and fluid utilized.

D. Piping Connection to Equipment: Where piping connects to mechanical equipment such as pumps, compressors, and blowers, the piping shall be brought to the equipment connection aligned and perpendicular to the axis of the flange or fitting for which the piping is to be connected. The piping shall not impose excessive stress to the equipment connection to cause misalignment of the equipment. The Contractor shall assign the responsibility to the equipment manufacturer to review the piping connection to the equipment and submit any modifications to the Owner’s Authorized Representative for review.

E. Restrained Joints: Flange coupling adapters on pressure lines shall be harnessed unless thrust restraint is provided by other means. Harnesses shall be designed by the pipe manufacturer in accordance with AWWA Manual M11, or as indicated. Harness sets shall be designed for the maximum test pressure of the pipe in which they are installed. Where harness sets are installed near the suction and discharge of the pump, harness bolts shall have zero elongation to prevent misalignment of the pump imparted by the thrust within the piping system.

F. Manufacturers, or equal 1. Smith-Blair, Model 975 2. JCM, Model 309

2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Low Temperatures: Flexible connectors shall be installed in piping connections to engines,

blowers, compressors, and other vibrating equipment, and where indicated. Flexible connectors for service temperatures up to 180 deg F shall be flanged reinforced neoprene or butyl spools, rated for a working pressure of 40 to 150 psi, unless noted otherwise on Drawings, or reinforced flanged duck and rubber, as best suited for the application. Flexible connectors for service temperatures above 180 deg F shall be flanged, braided stainless steel spools with inner, annular, corrugated stainless steel hose, rated for minimum 150 psi working pressure, unless otherwise indicated. The connectors shall be a minimum of 9-inches long, face-to-face flanges, unless otherwise indicated. The final material selection shall be approved by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and calculations.

B. High Temperature: Flexible connectors shall be installed in engine exhaust piping and where indicated. Connectors shall be sufficient to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction and also to isolate vibration between the engine and the exhaust piping system. Connectors shall be stainless steel bellows type, flanged, and rated for minimum 150 psi, 2000 deg F.

2.9 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Piping subject to expansion and contraction shall be provided with sufficient means to

compensate for such movement without exertion of undue forces to equipment or structures. This may be accomplished with expansion loops, bellow-type expansion joints, or sliding-type expansion joints. Expansion joints shall be flanged end, stainless steel, Monel, rubber, or other



materials best suited for each individual service. The Contractor shall submit detailed calculations and manufacturer's Shop Drawings of proposed expansion joints, piping layouts, and anchors and guides, including information on materials, temperature, and pressure ratings.

2.10 PIPE THREADS A. Pipe threads shall be in accordance with ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (inch),

and be made up with Teflon tape unless otherwise indicated.

2.11 MODULAR MECHANICAL SEALS FOR PIPING PENETRATIONS A. Where indicated and where required to prevent flow of water or air, the passages of piping

through wall sleeves and cored openings shall be sealed with modular interlocking link mechanical closures. Individual links shall be constructed of EPDM rubber, be suitable for temperatures between minus 40 and plus 250 deg F, and be shaped to fill the annular space between the outside of the pipe and the inside of the wall sleeve or cored opening. 1. Links shall be assembled with type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts to form a continuous

rubber belt around the pipe. 2. Pressure plates under each bolt and nut shall be fabricated of a corrosion-resistant

composite material. 3. Sizing and installation of sleeves and assemblies shall be in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Modular mechanical seals for pipe penetrations shall be Link Seal by Thunderline

Corporation, or equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Piping materials, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be delivered in a clean and undamaged

condition and stored off the ground for protection against oxidation caused by ground contact. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced with new materials.

3.2 GENERAL A. Piping, fittings, and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of

applicable Sections of Division 33 and Division 40. Proprietary manufactured couplings shall be installed in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's recommendation.

B. Care shall be taken to insure that piping flanges, mechanical-type couplings, sleeve-type couplings, flexible connectors, and expansion joints are properly installed as follows: 1. Gasket surfaces shall be carefully cleaned and inspected prior to making up the

connection. Each gasket shall be centered properly on the contact surfaces. 2. Connections shall be installed to prevent inducing stress to the piping system or the

equipment to which the piping is connected. Contact surfaces for flanges, couplings, and piping ends shall be aligned parallel, concentric, and square to each axis at the piping connections.

3. Bolts shall be initially hand-tightened with the piping connections properly aligned. Bolts shall be tightened with a torque wrench in a staggered sequence to the AISC recommended torque for the bolt material.

4. Groove ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from the pipe end to the groove.

5. After installation, joints shall meet the indicated leakage rate. Flanges shall not be deformed nor cracked.

C. Lined Piping Systems: The lining manufacturer shall take full responsibility for the complete, final product and its application. Pipe ends and joints of lined pipes at screwed flanges shall be epoxy-coated to assure continuous protection.



D. Core Drilling: Where core drilling is required for pipes passing through existing concrete, core drilling locations shall be determined by radiograph of concrete construction to avoid damage to embedded raceways and reinforcing bars.

E. Cleanup: After completion of the Work, cuttings, joining and wrapping materials, and other scattered debris shall be removed from the Site. The entire piping system shall be handed over in a clean and functional condition.

3.3 WARRANTY A. Piping and related equipment, including pipe supports, shall be covered under warranty for a

minimum of 2 years from project substantial completion, unless noted otherwise.






HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE 40 23 16 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 40 23 16 - HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE AND FITTINGS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION DESCRIPTION

A. This specification includes but is not limited to high-density polyethylene (PE 3408 or PE 4710) (ductile iron pipe size O.D or iron pipe size O.D.) pressure pipe primarily intended for the transportation of water and sewage either buried or above grade.

1.2 REFERENCES

Reference: Title: A. AWWA C901 Polyethylene (PE) pressure Pipe & Tubing, ½ inch through 3 inch for water B. AWWA C906 Polyethylene (PE) pressure Pipe & Fittings, 4 inch through 63 inch for water C. ASTM D3035 Standard Spec for PE Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter D. ASTM D3261 Butt Heat Fusion PE Fittings for PE Pipe & Tubing E. ASTM D3350 Standard Specification for PE Pipe & Fittings Materials F. ASTM D1238 Melt Flow Index G. ASTM D1505 Density of Plastics H. ASTM D2837 Hydrostatic Design Basis I. NSF Std.#14 Plastic Piping Components & Related Materials J. TR-33/2005 Generic Butt Fusion Joining Procedure for Field Joining of PE Pipe

1.3 GENERAL

A. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipes/fittings shall be allowed for use as water, wastewater and reclaimed water pressure pipe where compatible with the specific conditions of the project. All material used in the production of water main piping shall be approved by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).

B. DOCUMENTATION 1. Documentation from the resin’s manufacturer showing results of the following

tests for resin identification: a. Melt Flow Index ASTM D1238

2. Density ASTM D1505 C. All HDPE pipe shall be from a single manufacturer and all fittings shall be from a single

manufacturer, who is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the HDPE pipe to be furnished. The pipe shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these Specifications. Qualified manufacturers shall include: JM Eagle, Performance Pipe Division of Chevron Chemical Company, DRISCOPIPE as manufactured by Phillips Products Co., Inc., SCLAIRPIPE as manufactured by DuPont of Canada or approved equal.

D. FINISHED PRODUCT EVALUATION 1. Production staff shall check each length of pipe produced for the items listed below.

The results of all measurements shall be recorded on production sheets, which become part of the manufacturer’s permanent records. a. Pipe in process shall be checked visually, inside and out for cosmetic

defects (grooves, pits, hollows, etc.) b. Pipe outside diameter shall be measured using a suitable periphery tape to ensure

conformance with ASTM F714 or ASTM D3035, whichever is applicable. c. Pipe wall thickness shall be measured at 12 equally spaced locations

around the circumference at both ends of the pipe to ensure conformance with ASTM F714 or ASTM D3035, whichever is applicable.

d. Pipe length shall be measured.



e. Pipe marking shall be examined and checked for accuracy. f. Pipe ends shall be checked to ensure they are cut square and clean. g. Subject inside surface to a “reverse bend test” to ensure the pipe is free of

oxidation (brittleness). E. The polyethylene pipe manufacturer shall provide certification that stress regression testing

has been performed on the specific polyethylene resin being utilized in the manufacture of this product. This stress regression testing shall have been done in accordance with ASTM D2837 and the manufacturer shall provide a product supplying a minimum Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) of 1,600 psi as determined in accordance with ASTM D2837.

F. Contractor is responsible for compatibility between pipe materials, fittings and appurtenances.

G. Contractor shall obtain, in the Owner’s name, a manufacturer’s warranty against manufacturing defects of material and workmanship for a period of ten years after the final acceptance of the Project by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. The warranty shall include an obligation of the manufacturer to replace, at no expense to the Owner, any defective pipe/fitting material including all travel, labor, and expenses necessary for the replacement of the defective pipe/fitting material within the warranty period.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS FOR PIPE SIZES 4-INCH DIAMETER AND LARGER

A. Materials used for the manufacture of polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be made from a PE 3408 or PE 4710 high density polyethylene resin compound meeting cell classification 345434C per ASTM D3350; and meeting Type lll, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34 per ASTM D1238.

B. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe shall comply with AWWA Specifications C906.

C. If rework compounds are required, only those generated in the Manufacturer’s own plant from resin compounds of the same class and type from the same raw material supplier shall be used.

D. Dimensions and workmanship shall be as specified by ASTM F714. HDPE fittings and transitions shall meet ASTM D3261. HDPE pipe shall have a minimum density of 0.955 grams per cubic centimeter. All HDPE pipe and fittings shall have a Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) of 1,600 psi.

E. HDPE pipe and accessories 4-inch diameter and larger, shall be 100 psi at 73.4-degrees F meeting the requirements of Standard Dimension Ration DR17 or DR21 as MINIMUM STRENGTH.

F. The pipe Manufacturer must certify compliance with the above requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS FOR PIPE SIZES 2-INCH DIAMETER AND LESS

A. Materials used for the manufacture of polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be made from a PE 3408 high density polyethylene resin compound meeting cell classification 345434C per ASTM D3350; and meeting Type lll, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34 per ASTM D1238.

B. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipes shall comply with AWWA Specifications C901.

C. If rework compounds are required, only those generated in the Manufacturer’s own plant from resin compounds of the same class and type from the same raw material supplier shall be used.

D. Dimensions and workmanship shall be as specified by ASTM D3035. HDPE fittings and transitions shall meet ASTM D3261. HDPE pipe shall have a minimum density of 0.955 grams per cubic centimeter. All HDPE pipe and fittings shall have a Hydrostatic



Design Basis (HDB) of 1,600 psi. E. HDPE pipe and accessories 2” and less in diameter, shall be 160 psi at 73.4-degrees F

meeting the requirements of Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) 9 as MINIMUM STRENGTH. F. Contractor shall obtain, and provide to Owner’s Authorized Representative, the pipe

Manufacturer’s certification of compliance with the above requirements. 2.3 FITTINGS

A. All molded fittings and fabricated fittings shall be fully pressure rated to match the pipe SDR pressure rating to which they are made. All fittings shall be molded or fabricated by the manufacturer. No Contractor fabricated fittings shall be used unless approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

B. The manufacturer of the HDPE pipe shall supply all HDPE fittings and accessories as well as any adapters and/or specials required to perform the work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

C. All fittings shall be installed using butt-fused fittings, thermo-fused fittings/couplings, or flanged adapters and must be approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. NO size on size wet taps shall be permitted.

2.4 PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. The following shall be continuously indent printed on the pipe or spaced at intervals not exceeding 5-feet: 1. Name and/or trademark of the pipe manufacturer. 2. Nominal pipe size. 3. Dimension ratio. 4. The letters PE followed by the polyethylene grade in accordance with ASTM

D1248 followed by the hydrostatic design basis in 160’s of psi, e.g., PE 3408. 5. Manufacturing standard reference, e.g., ASTM F714 or D-3035, as required. 6. A production code from which the date and place of manufacture can be determined.

B. Tracing Wire 1. Open trench installation of HDPE shall include a tracing wire.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 JOINING METHOD

A. The pipe shall be joined with butt, heat fusion joints as outlined in ASTM D2657 and conform to the Generic Butt Fusion Joining Procedure for Field Joining of Polyethylene Pipe, Technical Report TR-33/2005, published by the Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI). All joints shall be made in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. A factory qualified joining technician as designated by pipe manufacturer or experienced, trained technician shall perform all heat fusion joints.

B. Lengths of pipe shall be assembled into suitable installation lengths by the butt- fusion process. All pipes so joined shall be made from the same class and type of raw material made by the same raw material supplier. Pipe shall be furnished in standard laying lengths not to exceed 50 feet and no shorter than 20 feet.

C. On days butt fusions are to be made, the following shall apply: 1. Heating plate surfaces shall be inspected for cuts and scrapes and shall be free of dirt

and residue. Heater surfaces should be between 400OF (minimum) to 450OF (maximum). Measure the temperature @ 12:00, 3:00, 6:00 and 9:00 o’clock positions using a pyrometer of infrared thermometer at locations where the heating plate will contact the pipe/fitting ends. The maximum temperature difference between any two points on a single heating surface must not exceed 24OF. If this temperature is



exceeded, the heating plate shall be cleaned per the manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. The fusion or test section shall be cut out after cooling completely for inspection. 3. The test section shall be 12” or 30 times (minimum) the wall thickness in length and

1” or 1.5 times the wall thickness in width (minimum). 4. The joint shall be visually inspected as to continuity of “beads” from the melted

material, and for assurance of “cold joint” prevention (i.e. – joint shall have visible molded material between walls of pipe). Joint spacing between the walls of the two ends shall be a minimum of 1/16” to a maximum 3/16”.

D. The polyethylene flange adapters at pipe material transitions shall be backed up by stainless steel flanges conforming to ANSI B16.1 and shaped as necessary to suit the outside dimensions of the pipe. The flange adapter assemblies shall be connected with corrosion resisting bolts and nuts of Type 316 Stainless Steel as specified in ASTM A726 and ASTM A307. All bolts shall be tightened to the manufacturer’s specified torques. Bolts shall be tightened alternatively and evenly. After installation, apply a bitumastic coating to bolts and nuts.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe shall be installed in accordance with the instruction of the manufacturer, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. A factory qualified joining technician as designated by the pipe manufacturer shall perform all heat fusion joints.

B. HDPE shall be installed either by Open Trench Construction or Directional Bore Method as outlined in Section 3.2 – Installation, Item Q – Open Trench Installation.

C. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting and unloading to prevent damage to the pipe. Pipe or fitting shall not be dropped. All pipe or fitting shall be examined before installation, and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective. Any damage to the pipe shall be repaired as required by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been installed, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound pipe in a satisfactory manner by the contractor, at his own expense.

D. Under no circumstances shall the pipe or accessories be dropped into the trench or forced through a directional bore upon “pull-back”.

E. Care shall be taken during transportation of the pipe such that it will not be cut, kinked or otherwise damaged.

F. Ropes, fabric or rubber protected slings and straps shall be used when handling pipes. Chains, cables or hooks inserted into the pipe ends shall not be used. Two slings spread apart shall be used for lifting each length of pipe.

G. Pipes shall be stored on level ground, preferably turf or sand, free of sharp objects, which could damage the pipe. Stacking of the polyethylene pipe shall be limited to a height that will not cause excessive deformation of the bottom layers of pipes under anticipated temperature conditions. Where necessary due to ground conditions, the pipe shall be stored on wooden sleepers, spaced suitably and of such width as not to allow deformation of the pipe at the point of contact with the sleeper or between supports.

H. Pipe shall be stored on clean level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging. The handling of the pipe shall be in such a manner that the pipe is not damaged by dragging it over sharp and cutting objects. The maximum allowable depth of cuts, scratches or gouges on the exterior of the pipe is 5 percent of wall thickness. The interior pipe surface shall be free of cuts, gouges or scratches.

I. Pipe shall be laid to lines and grade shown on the Drawings with bedding and backfill as shown on the Drawings.

J. When laying is not in progress, including lunchtime, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed by fabricated plugs, or by other approved means.

K. Sections of pipe with cuts, scratches or gouges exceeding 5 percent of the pipe wall



thickness shall be removed completely and the ends of the pipeline rejoined. L. The pipe shall be joined by the method of thermal butt fusion, as outlined in PART 3

– Execution, Section 3.1 Joining Method. All joints shall be made in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

M. Mechanical connections of the polyethylene pipe to auxiliary equipment such as valves, pumps and tanks shall be through flanged connections which shall consists of the following: 1. A polyethylene flange shall be thermally butt-fused to the stub end of the pipe. 2. A 316 stainless steel back up ring shall mate with a 316 stainless steel flange. 3. A 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts shall be used.

N. Flange connections shall be provided with a full-face neoprene gasket. O. All HDPE pipe must be at the temperature of the surrounding soil at the time of

backfilling and compaction. P. If a defective pipe is discovered after it has been installed, it shall be removed and replaced

with a sound pipe in a satisfactory manner at no additional cost to the Owner. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation, shall be kept clean until they are used in the work and when laid, shall conform to the lines and grades required.

Q. Open Trench Installation: 1. Specification, Section 31 20 00 “Earthwork and Trenching,” shall apply in its entirety. 2. The centerline of the pipe shall not deviate from a straight line drawn between

the centers of the openings at the ends of the pipe by more than 1/16-in per foot of length. If a piece of pipe fails to meet this requirement check for straightness, it shall be rejected and removed from the site. Laying instructions of the manufacturer shall be explicitly followed.

3. Good alignment shall be preserved during installation. Deflection of the pipe shall occur only at those places on design drawings and as approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Fittings, in addition to those shown on the Drawings, shall be used only if necessary or required by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

4. Each length of the pipe shall have the assembly mark aligned with the pipe previously laid and held securely until enough backfill has been placed to hold the pipe in place. Joints shall not be “pulled” or “cramped”.

5. Precautions shall be taken to prevent flotation of the pipe in the trench. 6. When moveable trench bracing such as trench boxes, moveable sheeting, shoring or

plates are used to support the sides of the trench, care shall be taken in placing and moving the boxes or supporting bracing to prevent movement of the pipe, or disturbance of the pipe bedding and the backfill. Trench boxes, moveable sheeting, shoring or plates shall not be allowed to extend below top of the pipe. As trench boxes, moveable sheeting, shoring or plates are moved, pipe bedding shall be placed to fill any voids created and the backfill shall be recompacted to provide uniform side support for the pipe.

7. Restrained joints shall be installed where shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

3.3 CLEANING

A. At the conclusion of the work, thoroughly clean all of the new pipe lines to remove all dirt, stones, pieces of wood or other material which may have entered during the construction period by forcing a cleaning swab through all mains 4” or greater. Flushing velocities shall be a minimum of 2.5 feet per second. Debris cleaned from the lines shall be removed from the job site.

3.4 TESTING

A. Pressure testing shall be conducted per Manufacturer’s recommendations. B. All HDPE water mains shall be flushed prior to pressure testing.



C. All HDPE mains shall be field-tested. Contractor shall supply all labor, equipment, material, gages, pumps, meters and incidentals required for testing. Each main shall be pressure tested upon completion of the pipe laying and backfilling operations, including placement of any required temporary roadway surfacing.

D. All mains shall be tested at 150 percent of the operating design pressure of the pipe unless otherwise approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

E. Pressure testing procedure shall be per Manufacturer’s recommendations or as follows: 1. Fill line slowly with water. Maintain flow velocity less than 2 feet per second. 2. Expel air completely from the line during filling and again before applying test

pressure. Air shall be expelled by means of taps at points of highest elevation. 3. Apply initial test pressure and allow to stand without makeup pressure for two

to three hours, to allow for diametric expansion or pipe stretching to stabilize. 4. After this equilibrium period, apply the specified test pressure and turn the

pump off. The final test pressure shall be held for one to three hours. 5. Upon completion of the test, the pressure shall be bled off from a location other

than the point where the pressure is monitored. The pressure drop shall be witnessed by the project manager at the point where the pressure is being monitored and shall show on the recorded pressure read-out submitted to the Engineer of Record.

F. Allowable amount of makeup water for expansion during the pressure test shall conform to Chart 6, Allowance for Expansion Under Test Pressure, Technical Report TR 31/9-79, published by the Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI). If there are no visual leaks or significant pressure drops during the final test period, the installed pipe passes the test.

G. If any test of pipe laid disclosed leakage significant pressure drop greater than the manufacturer’s recommended loss, the Contractor shall, at his/her own expense, locate and repair the cause of leakage and retest the line. The amount of leakage, which will be permitted, shall be in accordance with AWWA C600 Standards.

H. All visible leaks are to be repaired regardless of the amount of leakage. I. The Contractor must submit his plan for testing to the Owner’s Authorized Representative for

review at least 10 days before starting the test and shall notify Inspector a minimum of 48 hours prior to test.



ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS FOR VALVES 40 92 10 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 40 92 10 - ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS FOR VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL

A. This section includes materials and installation of electric motor actuators for valves. B. Submittals

1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions, Section 1 and the following.

2. Submit manufacturer's catalog data showing motor actuator parts and materials of construction, referenced by AISI, ASTM, SAE, or CDA specification and grade. Show motor actuator dimensions and weights. Show coatings.

3. Show the maximum torque required to open and close each motor-actuated valve. 4. Submit certified factory performance test records. 5. Submit motor data including nameplate data, insulation type, duty rating, and torque

output at duty rating. 6. Submit electrical schematic drawings and wiring diagrams showing physical locations of

components. 7. The manufacturer’s inspection, field testing and evaluation of the existing valves where

actuators are to be installed. C. Manufacturer's Services

Provide equipment manufacturer's services at the jobsite for the minimum labor days listed below, travel time excluded: 1. One (1) labor day at each site (for a total of two (2) labor days) to check the installation

and advise during start-up, testing, and adjustment of the equipment. PART 2 - MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers 1. Electric motor actuators with torque output requirements of 750 ft-lbs and less for

butterfly valves and eccentric plug valves shall be quarter-turn type and shall be Rotork “IQT” Series, Auma SQ, or equal.

2. Other electric motor actuators for open-close, modulating or explosion proof service shall be intelligent multi-turn type and shall be Rotork “IQ” Series, Auma SA, or equal.

3. All actuators on the project shall be of one manufacturer. B. Actuator Tagging

Provide aluminum stamped or engraved identifying tags for electric motor-actuated valves. Show valve actuator tag number, name or designation as shown in the drawings, and valve size. Attach tags to actuators by means of stainless steel wire.

C. Motors for Electric Actuators 1. Motors shall be 120V/single phase or 480 volt/3 phase as called for on the drawings;

specifically designed for high torque, low inertia duty. Motors for on/off, open/close actuators shall be designed and rated for 15-minute duty or 60 starts per hour at 104°F. Motors and starters for modulating actuators shall be designed for 30-minute duty or 600 starts per hour at 104°F.

2. Output capacity shall be sufficient to open or close the valve against the maximum differential pressure when the voltage is 10% above or below normal at the specified service conditions. Motors shall have Class F insulation. Provide motor with torque output (at duty rating) that exceeds the requirements of paragraph E below including safety factor.

3. Provide an electrical and mechanical disconnection of the motor without draining the lubricant from the actuator gear case.

D. Actuator Torque Requirements 1. Actuators being installed on existing valves shall include the manufacturer’s inspection,

field testing and evaluation of the existing valve in order to apply the applicable torque



requirements in order to properly actuate the existing valves. 2. The rated output torque of the motor actuator shall be at least 1.5 times the maximum

torque required to open or close the valve at any position including seating and unseating conditions when subjected to the most severe operating condition including any mechanical friction and/or other restrictive conditions that are inherent in the valve assembly. Do not include hammer-blow effect in sizing the actuator to comply with this torque requirement. Coordinate with the valve manufacturer to assure that the motor actuator stall torque output does not exceed the torque limits of the valve operating stem or shaft.

3. Maximum torque shall include seating or unseating torque, bearing torque, dynamic torque, and hydrostatic torque. Assume that the differential pressure across the valve is equal to the pressure or head rating of the valve.

4. Assume a maximum pipeline fluid velocity of 10 fps with the valve fully open, unless a higher velocity is specified in the detailed valve specification.

E. Design of Electric Motor Actuators 1. Actuators shall comply with AWWA C542, except as modified herein. Output capacity

of motors shall be sufficient to open or close the valve against the maximum differential pressure when the voltage is 10% above or below normal at the specified service conditions. Provide motor with torque output (at duty rating) that exceeds the requirements of the following paragraphs including safety factor.

2. Provide a reversing starter, three overloads (one in each ungrounded leg) or two motor thermal cutouts, 120-volt control power transformer, local-off- remote selector switch, stop-open-close push buttons, and open and closed indicator lights. Provide magnetic starters in actuators for open/close operation and for modulating operation. Provide dry contact for remote indication of the actuator mode of operation. The contact shall be closed when the local-off-remote selector switch is in the remote position and the internal control power exists.

3. Provide a separate (remote) NEMA 4X enclosure with local/remote selector switch, stop-open-close push buttons, and open and closed indicator lights for motor actuators in height over 6 feet 6 inches above floor, or deck, in lieu of integral controls. A separate (remote) NEMA 4X enclosure with local/remote selector switch, stop-open-close push buttons, and open and closed indicator lights for all motor actuators positioned outside the limits of walkways, accessible areas or positioned over open water shall be provided.

4. Do not use external conduit for wiring any components within the actuator. 5. Gear actuators shall be totally enclosed and factory-grease packed or oil- bath lubricated.

The power gearing shall consist of helical gears of heat- treated steel. Worm gears shall be alloy bronze accurately cut with a hobbing machine. Worm shall be hardened steel alloy. Design gears for 24- hour continuous service with an AGMA rating of 1.50.

6. Position switches shall be adjustable and capable of actuation at any point between fully opened and fully closed positions. The position switches shall operate while the actuator is either in manual or in motor operation. Provide motor actuators with position switches capable of being separately used to provide remote indication of end of travel in each direction and to stop motion at the end of travel in each direction.

7. Provide two individually adjustable torque switches to protect the valve and motor against overload in the opening and closing directions. To prevent hammering, the torque switch shall not reclose until the valve is made to travel in the opposite direction.

8. Provide a manually operated handwheel that shall not rotate during electrical operation. In the event electrical power is interrupted, handwheel operation shall be activated by a hand lever attached to the mechanism. While the valve is being operated manually, the motor shall not rotate. Upon restoration of electrical power, the handwheel shall automatically disengage. Design the handwheel diameter such that hand operation will not damage the valve.

9. The position switch and torque switch contacts shall be capable of interrupting at least 0.2-



ampere inductive load at 125-volt dc or 6-ampere inductive load at 120-volt ac. 10. Provide a lost motion device for open/close operation to permit the motor to reach full speed

before the load is applied. Provide lost motion action for manual operation also. Do not provide lost motion device for modulating applications.

11. “Latching” shall be provided to inhibit high torque during unseating or starting in mid-travel against high inertia loads. The actuator electrical diagram shall be identical, regardless of whether the valve is to operate on torque or position limit. Provide the actuator with means to non-intrusively calibrate torque or position and interrogate the status and performance of the actuator.

12. Motor shall de-energize in the event of a stall when attempting to unseat a jammed valve. 13. Provide a time delay to prevent instant reversal of the actuator motor. 14. Provide terminal connections for external remote controls fed from an internal 24-volt or

120-volt supply. 15. Provide two separate 3/4-inch conduit connections for control and power wiring.

F. Local Actuator Control 1. Integral to the actuator shall be local controls for Open, Close, and Stop, and a

local/remote selector Switch: a. Open/Stop/Close Push Buttons b. Local/Off/Remote Selector Switch

2. All the necessary wiring, indication relays and terminals shall be provided in the actuator to accommodate the remote mounted push button control functions. Provide terminal connections for external remote controls fed from an internal 120-volt AC supply.

3. The following Control, Status and Alarm indication shall be available locally at the actuator:

Controls: Status: Alarms: 1. Open/Stop/Close 1. Motor Running Open

Direction 1. Actuator Alarm

2. Desired Valve Position Control

2. Motor Running Closed Direction

2. Valve Alarm

3. Fully Open

3. Battery Low Alarm, if required

4. Fully Closed

5. Percentage Open

4. The actuator must provide a local display of the position of the valve, even when the power supply is not present. The display shall be able to be rotated in 90 degree increments so as to provide easy viewing regardless of mounting position.

5. The actuator shall include a digital position indicator with a display from fully open to fully closed in 1% increments with +/- ½% accuracy. Red, green, and yellow lights corresponding to Open, Closed, and Intermediate positions shall be included on the actuator. The digital display shall be maintained even when the power to the actuator is isolated.

6. The local display should be large enough to be viewed from a distance of six feet (6’) when the actuator is powered up.

7. Provide a diagnostic module, which will store and enable download of historical actuator data to permit analysis of changes in actuator or valve performance. A software tool for a PDA or laptop shall be provided to allow configuration and diagnostic information to be reviewed, analyzed and reconfigured.

8. Diagnostic status screens must be provided to show multiple functions. Emergency Shut



Down shall be selectable; Last-position, Full Open, Full Closed. G. Actuator Communication

1. Capabilities shall be provided to position the valve (or gate) locally via the Local/Off/Remote selector switch and Open/Stop/Close push buttons.

2. For on/off service, when in remote, the actuator shall accept one remote signal to open the valve or gate and a second remote signal to close the valve or gate.

3. For modulating service, when in remote the actuator shall accept a 4- 20mADC position control signal, and shall position the valve 0-90 degrees or gate 0-100% of travel in proportion to the control signal.

4. Valve position shall be sensed by an 18-bit, optical, absolute position encoder with redundant position sensing circuits designed for Built-In-Self-Test [BIST]. Each of the position sensing circuits shall be redundant permitting up to 50% fault tolerance before the position is incorrectly reported. The BIST feature shall discern which failures signal a warning only and which require a warning plus safe shutdown of the actuator. Open and closed positions shall be stored in permanent, nonvolatile memory. The encoder shall measure valve position at all times, including both motor and handwheel operation and with or without power present. The absolute encoder will be capable of resolving ±7 degrees of output shaft position over 10,000 output drive rotations.

5. Discrete outputs to SCADA shall be provided for all limit and torque switches, and for Local/Off/Remote switch in Remote position, as required by the Drawings.

H. Wiring and Terminals 1. Internal wiring shall be tropical grade insulated stranded cable of appropriate size for the

control and three-phase power. Each wire shall be clearly identified at each end. All wiring supplied as part of the actuator to be contained within the main enclosure for physical and environmental protection. External conduit connections between components are not acceptable.

2. The terminal compartment shall be separated from the inner electrical components of the actuator by means of a watertight seal. The terminal compartment of the actuator shall be provided with a minimum of four threaded cable entries.

3. Control logic circuit boards and relay boards must be mounted on plastic mounts to comply with double insulated standards.

4. A durable terminal identification card showing plan of terminals shall be provided attached to the inside of the terminal box cover indicating: a. Serial Number b. External Voltage Values c. Wiring Diagram Number d. Terminal Layout This must be suitable for the contractor to inscribe cable core identification beside terminal numbers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Factory Performance Testing of Motor Actuator Test each actuator prior to shipment in accordance with C542, Section 5.3. The application torque shall be maximum torque required to open or close the valve at position including seating and unseating conditions.

B. Storage and Temporary Installation Before Start-Up If actuators are stored or installed outside or in areas subject to temperatures below 40°F or are exposed to the weather prior to permanent installation, provide the manufacturer’s recommended procedures for extended storage. Provide temporary covers over the actuator electrical components. Exercise each actuator from its fully open to fully closed position at least once every seven days. Inspect electrical contacts before start-up.

C. Attaching Electric Actuators The valve manufacturer shall mount the electric motor actuator and accessories on each valve



and stroke the valve prior to shipment. Adjust limit switch positions and torque switches. D. Painting and Coating

Provide factory applied powder coating for electric motor actuators. The coating system shall be suitable for an ASTM B117 salt spray test for a minimum of 1,500 hours.

E. Field Installation Install the valve and actuator as indicated in the drawings in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Keep units dry, closed, and sealed to prevent internal moisture damage during construction. Provide additional hangers and supports for actuators which are not mounted vertically over the valve or which may impose an eccentric load on the piping system.

F. Field Testing of Motor Actuators 1. Test motor actuators as installed by measuring the current drawn (in amperes) by each

motor for unseating, seating, and running conditions. The measured current shall not exceed the current measurement recorded during the factory performance test.

2. If the measured current drawn exceeds the above value, provide a larger motor or gear drive or adjust the actuator so that the measured amperage does not exceed the value.

3. Assure that limit switches are placed at their correct settings. Open and close valves twice and assure that limit switches function.

G. Warranty 1. As called for in the General Conditions.

H. Certification 1. Provide a written certification from the equipment manufacturer that the equipment has

been properly installed according to the plans, specifications and manufacturer’s specifications, and that the equipment is operating normally. Make all necessary corrections and adjustments at no additional cost to the Owner.







DIVISION 42 – PROCESS WATER SYSTEMS





VALVES 42 05 23 Trask Hatchery New Hatchery Building

SECTION 42 05 23 –VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. The work covered by this section consists of furnishing labor, materials, and equipment required to

provide and install valves as shown on the Drawings and as specified.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's product data, catalog cuts, or shop drawings describing construction, pressure

classification, end connection, dimensions, weights, and materials. Include a list indicating each valve and its application.

B. Affidavits of compliance with AWWA C504 for butterfly valves. C. Affidavits of compliance as required by AWWA C500 for Gate Valves, include a certificate of

approval and results of testing for backflow preventers in accordance with AWWA C506. D. Operation and maintenance information for each type of valve and operator. E. Hydrostatic test results.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set gate valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 5. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. C. Use slings to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use

handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Backflow preventers shall meet the factory and field test provisions of AWWA C510 or C511.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VALVES - GENERAL A. Valves shall be manufacturer's standard design unless otherwise specified and shall be furnished

with operating wheel, wrench nut or lever. Unless otherwise indicated, the direction of rotation of the wheel, wrench nut or lever to open the valve shall be to the left (counter-clockwise) and shall have cast thereon the word OPEN. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, 2-1/2 inch or larger buried valves shall have nonflanged ends, 2-1/2 inch or larger exposed valves shall have flanged ends, and 2 inch or smaller valves shall have threaded ends. Flanges shall conform to ANSI B16.5. A union, flanged, grooved or shouldered type connection shall be provided within 2 feet of each threaded end valve unless the valve can be otherwise easily removed and such technique of removal is approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Exposed valves four-inch and smaller shall have lever operators with 10-position stops. Exposed valves 2-inch and smaller shall be ball valves or globe valves as designated on the Drawings.

B. Valves of the same type shall be from a single manufacturer. C. Cast-iron valve boxes extending to the finished or established ground or paved surfaces shall be

provided for buried valves. They shall have suitable base castings to fit properly over the bonnets of their respective valves and heavy top sections with stay-put covers as shown on the Drawings.



Boxes shall be of the screw or sliding type having 5-1/4-inch shaft diameter or greater. Parts of the valve boxes, bases and covers shall be coated by dipping in hot bituminous varnish. Covers for boxes shall have cast thereon an appropriate name designating the service for which the valve is used. Valve boxes shall be set in 12 inch by 12 inch by 8 inch thick concrete pad at ground except where valve box is set in concrete sidewalk.

D. Buried valves shall have position indicators in the valve box and wrench nut operator complying with Section 20 of AWWA C500. Wrench nuts shall be provided on buried valves, on valves which are to be operated through floor boxes, and where shown. Wrench nuts shall comply with Section 20 of AWWA C500. Extend shafts to within 6 inches from grade, and support every 5 feet with the last support just below the operating nut. Wrenches shall be 3 feet 6 inches long.

E. All buried valves shall have restrained end connections.

2.2 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Butterfly valves are specified according to size as follows.

1. Size 3 through 36 Inches shall be constructed of the following materials unless otherwise specified: Component Material Shaft Stainless steel, ASTM A276, type 304 Disc Ductile iron, ASTM A536, or cast iron, ASTM A436, type 1

(Ni-Resist); or ASTM A48, Class 40, or ASTM A126, Class B

Seat mating surface Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 304, mounted in body or on disc edge; or Ni-Chrome on the disc edge

Seat sealing surface Neoprene or Buna N Body Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B

B. Butterfly Valves 6-inch and larger shall have gear operators with handwheels if exposed and 2-inch square nut operators if buried or if operator extension is required.

C. General: 1. Butterfly valves shall be the stub or through shaft design. Valves shall be flanged or full

lug. Unless otherwise specified, valve flange drilling shall be per ANSI B16.1, Class 125.

2. Butterfly valves shall meet ANSI B16.34 and MSS SP61 standards. 3. Butterfly valves, size 3 through 24 inches, shall have seats that are vulcanized, bonded,

mechanically secured, or clamped to the body or disc. 4. Full lug butterfly valves shall have minimum (4) threaded lug inserts.

2.3 GATE VALVES A. General: Flanged, Mechanical Joint, or Push-On Gate Valves

Iron body, bronze mounted, solid wedge, resilient seated, non-rising stem, O-ring pack-ing.ANSI/AWWA C500, 200 psi working pressure. Open counterclockwise. Provide with double disc wedge.

2.4 OPERATORS A. Operators shall be mounted on the valve, damper or gate and provided as a unit. Each valve body

or operator shall have cast thereon the word "OPEN," an arrow indicating the direction to open, and flow direction arrows.

B. Manual Operators - General: Manual operators shall have operating torques less than 80 foot-pounds. Unless specified otherwise, each manual operator shall be provided with an operating wheel. Unless specified otherwise, the direction of rotation of the operator shall be counterclockwise for opening.

C. Wrench Nuts: Wrench nuts shall comply with Section 3.16 of AWWA C500. A minimum of two operating keys, but no less than one key per every ten valves, shall be provided for operation of the wrench nut operated valves.



2.5 OPERATOR APPURTENANCES A. Valve Boxes: Valve boxes shall be cast iron and shall have suitable base castings to fit properly

over the bonnets of their respective valves and heavy top sections with stay-put covers. Covers shall be hot-dip galvanized.

B. Adjustable Shaft Valve Boxes: Adjustable shaft valve boxes shall be concrete or cast iron Brooks No. 3RT, Christie G5, Empire 7 1/2 valve extension box, or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Valves shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings, and in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations. C. Manufacturer’s authorized representative shall be available for customer service during installation

and start-up and to train personnel in the operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting of each valve type.

D. Valve operators shall be located so that they are readily accessible for operation and maintenance. Valve operators shall be mounted for unobstructed access, but mounting shall not obstruct walkways. Valve operators shall not be mounted where shock or vibration will impair their operation. Support systems shall not be attached to handrails, process piping, or mechanical equipment.

3.2 TESTING A. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, material and labor to perform the required tests.

Defects which become evident during the tests shall be corrected by the Contractor at his own expense. The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Authorized Representative prior to performing tests.

B. Records shall be maintained by the Contractor of tests indicating date of test, item tested, test pressure passed, and inspector's name. Test reports shall be promptly submitted to the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

3.3 OPERATORS A. General: Valves and gates shall be provided with manual operators, unless specified otherwise.

Where possible, manual operators shall be located between 48 inches and 60 inches above the floor or a permanent work platform.

B. Wrench Nuts: Wrench nuts shall be provided on buried valves, on valves which are to be operated through floor boxes, and where specified. Extended wrench nuts shall be provided if necessary so that the nut will be within 6 inches of the valve box cover.

3.4 OPERATOR APPURTENANCES A. Valve Boxes: Valve boxes extending to finished surfaces shall be provided for buried valves.

3.5 WARRANTY A. All valves and gates, and related equipment such as operators, shall be covered under warranty for

a minimum of 2 years from project substantial completion, unless noted otherwise.




